MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 s – Block Elements

MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 s – Block Elements

s – Block Elements Important Questions

s – Block Elements Objective Type Questions

Question 1.
Choose the correct answer:

Question 1.
Plaster of Paris is :
(a) (CaSO4)2.H2O
(b) CaSO4.2H2O
(c) CaSO4.H2O
(d) CaSO4
Answer:
(a) (CaSO4)2.H2O

Question 2.
Lowest melting point compound:
(a) LiCl
(b)NaCl
(c) KCl
(d) RbCl
Answer:
(a) LiCl

Question 3.
Active constituent of Bleaching powder:
(a) CaOCl2
(b) Ca(OCl)Cl
(c) Ca(O2Cl2)
(d) CaCl2O2
Answer:
(b) Ca(OCl)Cl

MP Board Solutions

Question 4.
Hydration energy of Mg2+ ion will be more than:
(a) Al3+
(b) Na+
(c) Be2+
(d) Mg3+
Answer:
(b) Na+

Question 5.
Which magnetic property is present in alkaline earth metals:
(a) Diamagnetic
(b) Paramagnetic
(c) Ferro – magnetic
(d) Anti – magnetic
Answer:
(a) Diamagnetic

Question 6.
Solubility of which sulphate is the least:
(a) BaSO4
(b) MgSO4
(c) SrSO4
(d) CaSO4
Answer:
(a) BaSO4

Question 7.
Compounds of which element are mainly covalent:
(a) Ba
(b) Sr
(c) Ca
(d) Be
Answer:
(d) Be

MP Board Solutions

Question 8.
Important ore of magnesium is:
(a) Malachite
(b) Kaesiterite
(c) Camallite
(d) Galena.
Answer:
(c) Camallite

Question 2.
Fill in the blanks:

  1. Radius of Ca2+ ion is less than K+ because of ……………………………
  2. On heating Rb(ICl2) decomposes to form ………………………….. and ………………………….
  3. Be(OH)2 is soluble in both acid and base because it is of ……………………… nature.
  4. Lithium resembles ………………………… element of group 2.
  5. Sodium metal gives blue colour in liquid ammonial this is because of ………………………………
  6. Potassium forms three oxides ………………………. and …………………………..

Answer:

  1. High positive charge
  2. RbCl, ICI
  3. Amphoteric
  4. Mg
  5. e(NH3)2
  6. K2O, K2O2, KO2

MP Board Solutions

Question 3.
Answer in one word/sentence:

  1. Sodium metals are kept in kerosene oil. Why?
  2. What is lithopone?
  3. Which element is present in teeth and bones?
  4. What is Caustic soda?
  5. What is Sorrel cement?
  6. Write formula of Plaster of Paris?

Answer:

  1. Highly reactive
  2. BaSO4 and ZnS
  3. Calcium
  4. NaOH
  5. Mixture of MgCl2 and MgO
  6. (CaSO4)2H2O

s – Block Elements Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Arrange the alkali metals in the increasing order of their reactivity?
Answer:
The reactivity of alkali metals increases from top to bottom.
Be < Mg < Ca < Sr < Ba < Ra.

Question 2.
Write the name of two ores of lithium with formula?
Answer:
Ores of lithium are:

  1. Spodumene LiAl(SiO3)2
  2. Lepidolite Li2Al2(SiO3)3.F(OH)2.

Question 3.
Write the name of two ores of magnesium?
Answer:

  1. Camolite
  2. Dolomite.

Question 4.
Why alkali metals are kept in kerosene oil?
Answer:
Due to high reactivity.

MP Board Solutions

Question 5.
What is the formula of global salt?
Answer:
Na2SO4.10H2O.

Question 6.
What is Lithophone?
Answer:
BaSO4 + ZnS.

Question 7.
What is the formula of hydrolite?
Answer:
CaH2.

Question 8.
Carnolite is ore of which metal?
Answer:
Magnesium (Mg).

Question 9.
Which alkali metal show radioactivity?
Answer:
Radium.

Question 10.
Which compound is useful in purification of air in aircrafts?
Answer:
Potassium superoxide.

MP Board Solutions

Question 11.
Name one mineral in which Ca and Mg both are present?
Answer:
Name: Dolomite, Formula: MgCO3.CaCO3.

Question 12.
Which flux is used for the removal of acidic impurities in metallic processes?
Answer:

  1. Limestone CaCO3
  2. Magnesite MgCO3.

Question 13.
Formula of Nitrolium is?
Answer:
CaCN2 and C.

Question 14.
Which forms curtain of smoke?
Answer:
SiCl4.

MP Board Solutions

Question 15.
What is used to join the fractured bone and make statues?
Answer:
Plaster of paris.

Question 16.
What is the order of stability of carbonates of alkali metals?
Answer:
BeCO3 < MgCO3 < CaCO3 < SrCO3.

Question 17.
Write the configuration of alkali metals?
Answer:
ns1-2.

Question 18.
What is the formation of Apsum and Gypsum salt?
Answer:
Magnesium sulphate (MgSO4.2H2O) and Calcium sulphate (CaSO4.2H2O).

s – Block Elements Short Answer Type Questions – I

Question 1.
Why alkali metal do not found in free state?
Answer:
Alkali metals are highly reactive and electropositive because the value of ionization energy is very low due to larger size thus alkali metals easily donate electron and form positive ion. (MPBoardSolutions.com) These positive ion easily combine with oxygen, moisture and other electronegative element present in nature and form ionic compound.

Question 2.
Explain, why sodium is less reactive than potassium?
Answer:
The ionization enthalpy of sodium is higher than that of potassium. Therefore, sodium lose electron less readily as compared to potassium. Hence, sodium is less reactive than potassium.

Question 3.
Potassium carbonate cannot be prepared by Solvay process. Why?
Answer:
Potassium carbonate cannot be prepared by Solvay process because potassium bicarbonate being more soluble than sodium bicarbonate and does not get precipitated when CO2 is passed through a concentrated solution of KCl with NH3.

MP Board Solutions

Question 4.
Why is Li2CO3 decomposed at a lower temperature whereas Na2CO3 at higher temperature?
Answer:
Lithium is less electropositive than sodium and therefore, carbonates of lithium is less stable than that of sodium. Li2CO3 is not so stable to heat and therefore, decomposes at lower temperature. (MPBoardSolutions.com) This is because lithium being veiy small in size polarizes a large. CO32- ion leading to the formation of Li2O and CO2. On the other hand, Na2CO3 is very stable and decomposes at higher.

Question 5.
I – A and II – A group is called s – block elements. Why?
Answer:
I – A and II – A group elements have their electronic configuration of ns1 and ns2. So the last electron fill in 5 – block so the I – A and II – A group is called 5 – block elements.

Question 6.
What is Soral cement and write its uses?
Answer:
When MgCl2 solution reacts with MgO and product is formed as MgCl2.2MgO. nH2O. It is a white paste and called as Soral cement.
Uses:

  1. It is used to fill the teeth cavity.
  2. They use in porcelain in point.

Question 7.
Find the oxidation state (O.S.) of Na in Na2O2?
Answer:
Let the O.S. of Na in Na2O2 = x
One peroxide bond (Na – O – O) is present in Na2O2 where the O.S. of O = -1
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 s - Block Elements img 1
So, in Na2O2 the O.S. of Na = +1.

Question 8.
How calcium sulphate is prepared? Write its uses?
Answer:
In the lab, calcium sulphate is formed by Ca oxide, carbonate, chloride. They react with dil. H2SO4 to form calcium sulphate.
CaO + H2SO4 → CaSO4 + H2
Ca(OH)2 + H2SO4 → CaSO4 + 2H2O
CaCl2 + H2SO4 → CaSO4 + 2HCl
CaCO3 + H2SO4 → CaSO4 + H2O + CO2

Question 9.
What is Gypsum? How plaster of Paris is formed by gypsum?
Answer:
Calcium sulphate CaSO4.2H2O is called gypsum. Gypsum is heated at 120° – 130°C and 3 parts of water molecule are released and plaster of Paris is formed.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 s - Block Elements img 2
The plaster of Paris again absorb the water molecule and again get converted to calcium sulphate (Gypsum).

Question 10.
Why during the formation of quick lime the temperature of furnance is not kept more than 1000°C? Explain with equation?
Answer:
During the formation of quick, lime the temperature is maintained at 1000°C because at high temperature the clay present as impurity in the limestone combines with lime producing fusible silicate which fill the pores of lime. Due to this reason slaking of lime become very difficult.
1000°C.
CaO + SiO2 \(\underrightarrow { 1000^{ \circ }C } \) CaSiO3.

MP Board Solutions

Question 11.
Why sodium kept in kerosene oil?
Answer:
Alkali metals are very reactive specially against electronegative elements like oxygen, moisture and CO2. These are oxidized quickly from oxide and hydroxide due to their reactivity. Sodium is kept in kerosene oil to prevent oxidation on exposure to air.
4Na + O2 → 2Na2O
2Na + H2O → Na2O + H2
Na2O + H2O → 2NaOH.

Question 12.
Write the formula of lime water. What happens when CO2 passes through it?
Answer:
The formula of lime water is Ca(OH)2. Due to the flow of the CO2 gas in Ca(OH)2 it becomes milky due to formation of a white precipitate of calcium carbonate. (MPBoardSolutions.com) On passing excess of CO2, milkyness disappears and calcium bicarbonate is formed which is soluble in water.
Ca(OH)2 + CO2 → CaCO3 + H2O
CaCO3 + CO2 + H2O → Ca(HCO3)2.

Question 13.
Why K2CO3 is not prepared by Solvay method?
Answer:
Potassium carbonate cannot be prepared by Solvay method because the potassium salt analogous to NaHCO3 is KHCO3 which is much soluble and hence, cannot be obtained by crystallization.

Question 14.
Which metal is used in photochemical cell and why?
Answer:
In photochemical cell potassium and caesium metals are used, as their ionization energy is very low.

Question 15.
Why the extraction of sodium from sodium chloride cannot be done by general reducing agents?
Answer:
Sodium is a strong reducing agent. In electrochemical series, it is present at top position. Due to new availability of strong reducing agent than sodium, it cannot be reduced by normal reducing agents. It can only be reduced by electrolytes.

MP Board Solutions

Question 16.
Why Li and Be have the tendency to form covalent compounds? Explain?
Answer:
Due to small size of Li and Be atoms and their high ionization energy, the electrons of the valence shell are firmly bound to their nuclei. The polarizing power of their ions is also high due to high charge density, hence Li and Be form covalent compounds.

Question 17.
Write the Lewis structure of O2 ion and write the O.N. of each O atom. In this ion what is the average oxidation state of O?
Answer:
Lewis structure of O2 ion = MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 s - Block Elements img 3
Oxygen without charge have 6 electrons. So, its O.S. = 0, but oxygen with -1 oxidation state have 7 electrons so its O.S. = —1.
Oxidation state of each oxygen atom = \(\frac{-1}{2}\)
O2 = 2x = -1
x = \(\frac{-1}{2}\)

Question 18.
In Solvay’s process, can be obtain sodium carbonate by direct reaction of ammonium carbonate and sodium chloride?
Answer:
No, because the reaction between ammonium carbonate and NaCl.
(NH4)2CO3 + 2NaCl ⇄ Na2CO3 + 2NH4Cl
As the products obtained are highly soluble the equilibrium will not shift to,yards forward direction. This is the reason why NaCO3 cannot be prepared by reaction of (NH4)2CO3 and NaCl in Solvay’s process.

MP Board Solutions

Question 19.
AH compounds of alkali metals are easily soluble in water but lithium compounds are more soluble in organic solvents? Explain?
Answer:
The size of LT ion is small and thus, it has high polarizing power. This brings covalent character in lithium compounds. Due to covalent character, Li compounds are soluble in organic solvents.

Question 20.
Why are potassium and caesium rather than lithium used n photoelectric cells?
Answer:
Potassium and caesium have much lower ionization enthalpy than that of lithium. Therefore, these metals on exposure to light, easily emit elec arm but lithium does nN. Therefore, K and Cs rather than Li are used in photoelectric cells.

Question 21.
Beryllium chloride (BeCl2) produces smoke when kept in air. Why?
Answer:
Normally air contains moisture, thus beryllium halide hydrolyses in water and releases HCl due to which it produces smoke in air.
BeCl2 + 2H4O → Be(OH)2 + 2HCl.

Question 22.
On moving downward in the first group the hardness of the elements increases. Why?
Answer:
In the first group on moving downwards along with the increase in size cf the elements their density also increases and the force of attraction between its atoms increases due to which there is an increase in their hardness.

s – Block Elements Short Answer Type Questions – II

Question 1.
Why s – block and p – block elements are called representative elements?
Answer:
The elements present in the s and p-block are called normal or representative elements.

  1. The elements of group 1 and 2 constitute the s – block of the periodic table. These are known as s – block elements because the last electron in them enters the s – orbital of the valence shell.
  2. The elements of p group of the periodic table these are known as p – block elements because the last electron in them enters the p-orbital of the valence shell.

Question 2.
Why alkaline metals are strong or reducing agents?
Answer:
Due to less ionization energy of alkali metals. They have tendency to loose electron (Get oxidized) and form positive ion (M+) also alkali metals have negative value of standard reduction potential. (MPBoardSolutions.com) Therefore, alkali metals are good reducing agent.

MP Board Solutions

Question 3.
Why are BeSO4 and MgSO4 readily soluble in water while CaSO4, SrSO2 and BaSO4 are insoluble?
Answer:
The hydration energy of SO4 of alkaline earth metals decreases down the group. The high hydration energy of Be2+ and Mg2+ diminishes the lattice energy due to this their SO2 are soluble in water. But in case of Ca2+, Sr2+ and Ba2+ the hydration energy is low due to this the SO4 are insoluble in water.

Question 4.
Why the reducing power of lithium is high in solution?
Answer:
Electrode potential is a measure of the tendency of an element to loose electron in aqueous solution. It may depend on the following three factors:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 s - Block Elements img 4
With the small size of its ion, Li has the highest hydration enthalpy. However, ionization enthalpy of Li is highest among alkali metals but hydration (MPBoardSolutions.com) enthalpy predominates over I.P. Therefore, Li is the strongest reducing agent in aqueous solution.

Question 5.
Explain, why can alkali and alkaline earth metals not be obtained by chemical reduction method?
Answer:
The s – block elements themselves are good reducing agents therefore, reducing agent better than s – block elements are not available. Therefore, the chlorides, oxides etc. of s – block elements cannot be reduced to obtain metal.

Question 6.
Explain why alkaline metals form M+ cation not M+2 type of cation?
Answer:
There is one electron in the valence shell of alkali metals. The ionization energy is very low due to bigger size. So they can easily donate electron and can form M+ cation. (MPBoardSolutions.com) In the M+ state the electronic configuration becomes similar to nobel gases and stable so in this state they become unreactive and the ionization energy become high. So they did not form M2+ ion.

Question 7.
In alkali metals, which metal is strongest reducing agent. Why?
Answer:
The reducing character increases from sodium to caesium. However, lithium is the strongest reducing agent among all the alkali metals. Inspite of its highest I.P. This is because of extensive hydration of Li+ ions and large amount of energy released during hydration more than compensates the higher I.P. value of Lithium.

MP Board Solutions

Question 8.
Why alkali metals are not found in free state in nature? Or, Why alkali metals always form ionic compounds?
Answer:
Due to bigger size of alkali metals, the ionization energy is very low. So they can easily donate electron and form positive ion. So due to positively charge and highly reactive nature they combine with the (MPBoardSolutions.com) electronegative elements in the nature like moisture, CO2 etc. and form ionic compounds. Therefore, they cannot be found in free state in nature.

Question 9.
Why alkali metal give flame test?
Answer:
The ionization energy of alkali metal is very low. When these elements or their compounds are heated in Bunsen flame electron present in valency shell absorb energy and easily goes to higher energy level. When these excited electron comes to ground state they emit energy in the form of radiation in visible region and give characteristic colour to flame.

Question 10.
Why Be and Mg do not give flame test?
Answer:
Beryllium and Magnesium atoms in comparison to other alkaline earth metals are comparatively smaller and their ionization energy are very high. (MPBoardSolutions.com) Hence, the energy of the flame is not sufficient to excite their electrons to higher energy levels. These elements therefore do not give any colour in Bunsen flame temperature.

Question 11.
When an alkali metal dissolves in liquid ammonia, the solution acquires different colours? Explain the reason for this type colour change?
Answer:
All alkali metals dissolve in liquid ammonia giving highly conducting deep blue solutions.
M + (x + y )NH3 M+ (NH3) → x + e (NH3 )y
When ordinary light falls on these ammoniated electrons. They get excited and jump to higher energy levels by absorbing energy corresponding to red region of the visible light. (MPBoardSolutions.com) As a result transmitted light is blue which imparts blue colour to the solution. However, when the concentration increases the ammoniated metal ion may get bound by free electrons and colour becomes copper bronze.

MP Board Solutions

Question 12.
Why Be and Mg do not give flame test but other metals give? Why?
Answer:
Except beryllium and magnesium all the alkaline earth metals impart characteristic colours to Bunsen flame. Due to small size of Be and Mg atom, the energy required to excite the valency electrons is very high which is not obtained in Bunsen flame. That is why Be and Mg do not impart any colour to flame.

Question 13.
Give two uses of each:

  1. Caustic soda
  2. Sodium carbonate
  3. Quick lime.

Answer:
1. Uses of Caustic soda:

  • In soap and paper industry.
  • For mercerization of cotton thread.

2. Uses of Sodium carbonate:

  • Washing soda is used for washing clothes.
  • Removes permanent hardness of water.

3. Uses of Quick lime:

  • For making statues, floor, buildings in the form of marble.
  • For manufacture of lime, cement, glass and washing soda.

Question 14.
Alkali metals form blue coloured solution when dissolved in ammonia, which is a strong electrolyte. Give reason with equation?
Answer:
Alkali metals dissolve in liquor ammonia to form deep blue coloured solution of high electrical conductivity.
M + (x+y) NH3 → [M(NH3)x] + [e(NH3)y]
The blue colour of the solution is due to ammoniated electrons positive ion and electrons are responsible for the conductivity.

Question 15.
Na is alkaline or Na2O? Clarify the statement?
Answer:
Monoxide of all alkali metals are alkaline and form strongly alkaline solution in water.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 s - Block Elements img 5
Na2O is alkaline because it reacts with water to form NaOH. Na also react with water to form NaOH but it first forms Na2O and then NaOH, thus Na2O us alkaline not Na.
4Na + 2H2O → 2Na2O + 2H2
Na2O + H2O → 2NaOH

MP Board Solutions

Question 16.
Compare Alkali metals and Alkaline earth metals on the basis of following points:

  1. Reaction of heat on carbonate
  2. Reaction with nitrogen
  3. Solubility of sulphates in water.

Answer:
Comparison of Alkali metals and Alkaline earth metals:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 s - Block Elements img 6

Question 17.
Hydroxides and Carbonates of (Sodium and Potassium) Alkali metals are completely soluble in water whereas that of (Magnesium and Calcium) Alkaline earth metals are partially soluble?
Answer:
All alkali metal carbonates are soluble in water because the value of their Lattice energy is less than their hydration energy.
Lattice energy < Hydration energy (Compound soluble)
Alkaline earth metal carbonates are insoluble because the value of their Lattice energy is more than their hydration energy.
Lattice energy < Hydration energy (Compound insoluble)
∆Hsolution = ∆HHydrogen energy + ∆HLattice energy

Question 18.
Why are lithium salts commonly hydrated and those of the other alkali ions usually anhydrous?
Answer:
Because of smallest size among alkali metals, Li+ can polarize water molecule more easily than the other alkali metal ions and hence get attached to lithium salts as water of crystallization.

Question 19.
Why is LiF almost soluble in water whereas LiCI soluble not only in water but also in acetone?
Answer:
To make compound water soluble, its lattice energy should be low and hydration energy should be high. Lattice energy of LiCl is less than that of LiF. The difference in these two energies for LiCl and LiF is 31 and 14 kJ/mol respectively. (MPBoardSolutions.com) The difference is larger for LiCl, which is soluble in water. Moreover, lattice energy of LiF is much higher than that of LiCl. It makes LiF sparingly soluble in water. Moreover, LiCl is largely covalent, so it is soluble in organic solvent such as acetone.

Question 20.
If the alkali metals are kept open in the air, after sometime the metallic brightness is lost. Why?
Answer:
On exposure to moist air alkali metals soon get covered with a thick crust of their oxide, hydroxides and carbonate hence, their surface get tarnished. For this reason these metals are stored under kerosene and which prevents them from coming in contact with air and moisture.
4M + O2 → 2M2O
M2O + H2O → 2MOH
2MOH + CO2 → M2CO3 + H2O
Here, M is any alkali metal.

MP Board Solutions

Question 21.
Among LiCl and RbCl which will ionize more. Why?
Answer:
Among LiCI and RbCl, RbCl is more reactive because LiCl is slightly covalent in nature due to which it is soluble in organic solvent like pyridine and alcohol.

Question 22.
Among alkali metals and alkaline earth metals whose carbonates are soluble in water? Or, The carbonates of alkali metals are souble in water but that of alkaline metals are insoluble?
Answer:
Carbonates of alkali metals are soluble in water because its hydration energy is greater than lattice energy. Whereas alkaline earth metals are smaller in size and have high density, so its hydration energy is lower than lattice energy. So the carbonates of alkaline earth metals are insoluble in water.

Question 23.
Give the differences between the 8eCl2 and other chlorides of alkaline earth metals?
Answer:
1. Anhydrous halide are deliquescent and they absorb moisture or water forming hydrated salt.
Example: MgCl2.6H2O, CaCl2.6H2O, BaCl2.2H2O, etc.

2. BeCl2 fumes on hydrolysis in moist air.
BeCl2 + 2H2O → Be(OH)2 + 2HCl

3. BeCl2 has different structure in solid and in vapour state. In solid state, it exists as polymeric chain in which each Be atom is surrounded by four chlorine atom. Two of the chlorine atom are covalently bonded while, other two are bonded through co – ordinate bond. In vapour state, at a temperature above 1200 K it has linear monomeric structure with zero dipole moment. Below 1200 K it exist as a dimer.

4. Except BeCl2 and MgCl2 other metal chloride give characteristic colour to the flame.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 s - Block Elements img 7

5. Anhydrous CaCl2 has strong affinity for water therefore, it is used as dehydrating agent.

Question 24.
Why solubility of BaSO4 is less than CaSO4?
Answer:
The solubility of sulphates decreases from top to bottom as lattice energy is same. But as we move top to bottom the atomic size increases and hydration energy decreases so solubility decreases.

Question 25.
Why ionization energy of Be is more than B?
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 s - Block Elements img 8
These orbitals of Be is full – filled so this element is stable but orbitals of B is not full – filled (Completely), so this element is not stable.

Question 26.
How sodium carbonate is formed by soda process? Write its principle?
Answer:
Solvay method or Ammonia soda process: It has replaced Le – Blanck process and is most commonly employed.
Principle:
In this process, concentrated solution of sodium chloride (Brine) is saturated with NH3 to form ammoniacal sodium chloride. On passing CO2 gas to this solution, ammonium bicarbonate is formed which reacts with sodium chloride and forms sodium bicarbonate.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 s - Block Elements img 9

Question 27.
How will you prepare

  1. Sodium bicarbonate
  2. Sodium hydroxide
  3. Sodium silicate from sodium carbonate?

Answer:
1. In sodium carbonate (Aqueous solution) pass CO2 gas and sodium bicarbonate is formed (White precipitate).
Na2CO3 + H2O + CO2 → 2NaHCO3

2. Sodium carbonate is boiled with limewater then sodium hydroxide is formed.
Na2CO3 + Ca(OH)2 → 2Na0H + CaCO3

3. Sodium carbonate is treated with silica to form sodium silicate.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 s - Block Elements img 10

Question 28.
What is Baking soda? Write its method of preparation, properties and uses?
Answer:
Sodium Bicarbonate (NaHCO3):
It is also known as sodium hydrogen carbonate or baking soda.

Method of preparation:
Sodium bicarbonate is obtained as an intermediate in the manufacture of sodium carbonate by Solvay’s process. It can be also obtained by passing carbon dioxide through aqueous solution of sodium carbonate.
Na2CO3 + H2O + CO2 → 2NaHCO3

Physical property:
It is a white, crystalline solid, slightly soluble in water.

Chemical properties:
1. Effect of heat:
When heated to 373 K it decomposes into Na2CO3 and CO2 is set free.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 s - Block Elements img 11

2. Action of water:
Sodium bicarbonate hydrolyses when dissolved in water. Its aqueous solution is alkaline.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 s - Block Elements img 12

Uses:

  1. As a source of carbon dioxide in fire extinguisher.
  2. It acts as mild antiseptic for skin infection.
  3. As a component of baking powder.
  4. As a digestive powder to remove acidity of stomach.

Question 29.
Describe the Le – Blanck method of preparation of sodium carbonate with chemical equation? How Solvay method is better than this?
Answer:
Le – BIanck method:
Sodium chloride when heated with cone. H2SO4 produces sulphates and HCl gas. Mixture of sodium sulphate, calcium carbonate and coke on heating provide sodium carbonate and calcium sulphide. This mixture is called blanck ash. (MPBoardSolutions.com) Now in this mixture water is added and filtered. Gas is removed as residue while sodium carbonate being soluble goes into filtrate. Evaporation of filtrate provide solid sodium carbonate.
2NaCl + H2SO4 → Na2SO4 + 2HCl
Na2SO4 + 4C → Na2S + 4CO
Na2S + CaCO3 → Na2CO3 + CaS

Advantages of Solvay method:

  1. It is cheap
  2. Pure Na2CO3 is formed
  3. No harmful smoke is obtained
  4. In the middle of reaction NaHCO3 is formed which is a useful compound.

s – Block Elements Long Answer Type Questions – I

Question 1.
Describe the manufacture of caustic soda by Nelson cell on the following point: Labelled diagram, Chemical reactions.

Answer:
It consists of perforated steel tube Graphite anode lined inside with asbestos act as cathode. It is fitted with NaCl solution (brine) and is suspended in the steel tank. Here asbestos lining separates cathode from anode.

One passing current electrolysis of NaCl takes place. (MPBoardSolutions.com) Chlorine is liberated at anode and escapes out. Sodium ions passed through asbestos and is liberated at cathode they reacts with steam for caustic soda.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 s - Block Elements img 14
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 s - Block Elements img 13
At anode:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 s - Block Elements img 15
At cathode:
2Na+ + 2e → 2Na (Reduction)
2Na + 2H2O → 2NaOH + H2

Question 2.
Ions of an element of group 1 participate in the transmission of nerve signals and transport of sugars and amino acids into ceils. This element imparts yellow colour to the flame in flame test and forms an oxide and a peroxide with oxygen. Identify the element and write chemical reaction to show the formation of its peroxide. Why does the element impart colour to the flame?
Answer:
The element is sodium. This imparts yellow colour to the flame. Na+ ions participate in the transmission of nerve signals and transport of sugars and amino acids to cell. It forms a monoxide (Na2O) and a peroxide (Na2O2).
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 s - Block Elements img 16

The reason for flame colouration is, ionisation energy of Na is low. (MPBoardSolutions.com) Therefore, when Na metal or its salts is heated in Bunsen flame, its valence shell electron is excited to higher energy levels by absorption of energy. When the excited electron returns to the ground state, it emits extra energy in the yellow region of electromagnetic spectrum. Therefore, Na imparts yellow colour to the flame.

MP Board Solutions

Question 3.
Write the diagonal relationship between Be and Al?
Answer:
Diagonal relationship between Beryllium and Aluminium:
Beryllium resembles aluminium of group 3 in the following properties:

  1. Both beryllium and aluminium form covalent compounds.
  2. Both metals are passive towards reaction with concentrated HN03, because they are covered with a layer of oxide on their surface.
  3. Both the metals are of weak electropositive nature.
  4. Both do not form hydride quickly.
  5. Carbides of both the metals react with water to form methane.

Be2C + 2H2O → 2BeO + CH4
Al4C3 + 6H2O → 2AlCl3 + 3CH4

6. Oxides of both are soluble in water and form hydroxides which are amphoteric in nature and react with acid and base to form salt.

BeO + 2HCl → BeCl2 + H2O
Al2O3 + 6HCl → 2AlCl3 + 3H2O
BeO + 2NaOH → Na2BeO2 + H2O
Al2O3 + 2NaOH → 2NaAlO2 + H2O

7. Both Be and Al do not give colour to the flame.

Question 4.
When water is added to compound (A) of calcium, solution of compound (B) is formed. When carbon dioxide is passed into the solution, it turns milky due to the formation of compound (C). (MPBoardSolutions.com) If excess of carbon dioxide is passed into the solution milkiness disappears due to the formation of compound (D). Identify the compounds A, B, C and D. Explain why the milkyness disappears in the last step?
Answer:
The compound (A) is quick lime, CaO. This combines with water and forms calcium hydroxides Ca(OH)2.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 s - Block Elements img 17
When CO2 is passed through the solution having Ca(OH)2, the solution turns milky due to formation of calcium carbonate, CaCO3.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 s - Block Elements img 18
When excess of CO2 is passed into milky solution the milkiness disappears due to formation of calcium bicarbonate Ca(HCO3)2 which is soluble.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 s - Block Elements img 19

Question 5.
How is lithium different from other members of its group?
Answer:
Anomalous behaviour of Lithium:
Properties of lithium are different than other members of the group due to the following reasons:

  1. Size of lithium atom and ion is very small.
  2. Due to small size, polarizing power of lithium ion is high, due to w hich compounds possess covalent character.
  3. In comparison to other alkali metals its electropositive nature is less and ionization energy is high.

Lithium differ from alkali metals of group I due to following properties:

    1. Lithium is comparatively harder than the other alkali metals.
    2. Melting and boiling point of lithium is comparatively high.
    3. Lithium reacts with oxygen to form only normal oxide (Li2G), whereas other metals form peroxide (M2O2) and superoxide (MO2).
    4. Lithium hydride (LiH) is more stable as compared to hydrides of other metals.
    5. Lithium hydroxide (LiOH) is a weak base and is partially soluble in water, but hydroxides of other metals of the group are more soluble in water.
    6. Lithium forms nitride (Li3N) with nitrogen, whereas other metals of the group do not form nitride.
    7. Lithium nitrate when heated decomposes to nitrogen dioxide and oxygen.

4LiNO3 \(\underrightarrow { \Delta } \) 2Li2O + 4NO2 + O2

Whereas sodium nitrate and potassium nitrate when heated strongly form corresponding nitrate with the release of oxygen.

2NaNO3 \(\underrightarrow { \Delta } \) 2NaNO2 + O2

Question 6.
What happens when:

  1. Magnesium is burnt in air –
  2. Quick lime is heated with silica –
  3. Chlorine reacts with slaked lime –
  4. Calcium nitrate is heated?

Answer:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 10 s - Block Elements abc

s – Block Elements Long Answer Type Questions – II

Question 1.
How is sodium carbonate manufactured by Solvay process?
Answer:
Principle:
In this process, first concentrated solution of sodium chloride (Brine) is saturated with NH3 to form ammanica sodium chloride.(MPBoardSolutions.com) On passing CO2 gas to this, ammonium bicarbonate is formed which reacts with sodium chloride and forms sodium bicarbonate. Precipitate of sodium bicarbonate is filter ed which on calcination gives sodium carbonate.
NH3 + CO2 + H2O → NH4HCO3
NH4CO3 + 2NaCl → NaHCO3 + NH4Cl
Na2HCO3 → Na2CO3 + H2O + CO2

CO2 formed is used agiain for carbonation NH4Cl formed on treatment with slaked lime gives NH3 which is used for saturation of brine.
2NH4CL + Ca(OH)2 → CaCl2 + 2H2O + 2NH3

The various steps and reactions involved are given below:

1. Saturating tank:
In this tank brine (NaCl) is saturated with ammonia. NaCl solution is introduced from the top while ammonia is introduced from bottom so that ammonium brine is formed and which collects at bottom. Calcium and magnesium salts are present as impurity in sodium chloride solution. They get precipitated as hydroxides by ammonium hydroxide.

2. Filter:
Ammonical brine is filtered to removed the precipitated hydroxides of calcium and magnesium.

3. Cooler:
The filtrate is cooled by passing through condenser. Cooling is necessary because when ammonia dissolves in brine a lot of heat is produced.

4. Carbonating tower:
The cold solution of brine saturated with ammonia is introduced into the carbonating tank from top. Carbonating tower is fitted with a number of compound diaphragms each made of a horizontal iron plate. Following reactions take place here:
2NH3 + CO2 + H2O → (NH4)2CO3
(NH4)2CO3 + 2NaCl → Na2CO3 + 2NH4Cl
Na2CO3 + H2O + CO2 → 2NaHCO3

5. Vacuum filter:
The precipitated sodium bicarbonate along with solution of traces of ammonium carbonate and ammonium chloride is passed through rotatory vacuum filter at the bottom of tower where sodium bicarbonate separates leaving behind mother liquor containing ammonium chloride.

6. Limekiln:
Here limestone is burnt to produce quick lime and carbon dioxide.
CaCO3 \({ \underrightarrow { \Delta } }\) CaO + CO2
Formed CaO reacts with water to form slaked lime.
CaO + H2O → Ca(OH)2

7. Ammonia recovery tower:
The mother liquor obtained from rotatory filter pump containing ammonium chloride is introduced into the ammonia recovery tank from the top part while the milk of lime is introduced from the top of lower part and steam is introduced into the tower from the bottom, ammonium chloride reacts with milk of lime to produce ammonia.
2NH4Cl + Ca(OH)2 → 2NH3 + CaCl2 + 2H2O
Sodium bicarbonate obtained from rotatory filters is ignited in a specially constructed cylindrical vessels when sodium carbonate is formed and CO2 evolved is collected and used again.
2NaHCO3 → Na2CO3 + H2O + CO2

MP Board Solutions

Question 2.
What happens when:

  1. Reaction of NaOH with Zn or A1
  2. Reaction of NaOH with S
  3. Reaction of NaOH with halogen
  4. Reaction of NaOH with metal oxides
  5. Reaction of NaOH with metal salts.

Answer:
1. Zn + 2NaOH → Na2ZnO2 + H2
2Al + 2NaOH + 2H2O → 2NaAlO2 + 3H2

2. 4S + 6NaOH → Na2S2O3 + 2Na2S + 3H2O Hypo
8S + 2Na2S → 2Na2S5

3. 2NaOH + Cl2 → NaCl + NaCIO + H2O
(Cold) Sodium hypochlorate
6NaOH + 3Cl2 → 5NaCl + NaClO3 + 3H2O
(Warm)

4. ZnO + 2NaOH → Na2ZnO2 + H2O

5. CuSO4 + 2NaOH → Na2SO4 + Cu(OH)2
3NaOH + FeCl3 → Fe(OH)3 + 3NaCl
2NaOH + 2 AgNO3 → Ag2O + 2NaNO3 + H2O.

Question 3.
How Lithium show similarity with Magnesium?
Answer:
In the periodic table some elements differ from elements of the same period but show diagonal similarity with elements of next period.
Example:
Elements of second period show similarities with elements of third period. Like Lithium (second) period with magnesium (third period), Beryllium with A1 and Boron shows similarity with Si.

The relationship between Li and Mg:

  1. The Li atomic radius is 1.34 Å and atomic radius of Mg is 1.36 Å .
  2. The polar capacity of Li and Mg is equal.
  3. Li and Mg is harder elements.
  4. The Li and Mg is electronegativity is equal to (1.0 and 1.2).
  5. The melting and boiling point of Li and Mg is very high.
  6. Li and Mg reacts with N2 and they form nitrite.
  7. Li and Mg reacts with O2 and they form monoxide.
  8. Li and Mg reacts with water to release of hydrogen gas.
  9. Li and Mg carbonate is heated and release CO2 gas.
  10. LiOH and Mg(OH)2 is the weak basicity.

Question 4.
Write the formation of calcium oxide and write its properties and uses?
Answer:
Manufacture:
Commercially, calcium oxide is manufactured by heating limestone.

This process is exothermic and reversible. In order to get good yield of lime, carbon dioxide is to be removed from time to time. (MPBoardSolutions.com) The temperature of the reaction should not exceed 900°C because at higher temperature lime and clay reacts to form fusible silicate.

Furnace used for the manufacture of lime contain two fire boxes, one each on each side. Lime stone is added from the top. It decomposes on reach¬ing down. CO2 produced is collected and stored in cylinders in liquid state. Lime farmed gets collected at the bottom of the furnace.
Physical properties:

  1. It is a white solid.
  2. Its melting point is high i.e., 2870K.
  3. It is highly stable and it does not decompose in oxy-hydrogen flame but produces a brilliant white light called lime light.

Chemical properties:
1. It reacts with moist air absorbing CO2 to form Ca(OH)2 and CaCO3
CaO + H2O → Ca(OH)2 (Slaked lime)
CaO + CO2 → CaCO3 (Lime stone)

2. When heated with ammonium salt, ammonia gas evolved.
2NH4Cl + CaO → CaCl2 + H2O + 2NH3

3. When heated with coke at high temperature, calcium carbide is produced.

4. It forms calcium chloride when chlorine gas is passed over hot and dry calcium oxide.
2CaO + 2Cl2 → 2CaCl2 + O2

5. Calcium oxide is a strong basic oxide. It reacts with acid to form salt and water while, with acidic oxide it forms respective salt.
CaO + 2HCl → CaCl2 + H2O
CaO + H2SO4 → CaSO4 + H2O
CaO + CO2 → CaCO3 (Calcium carbonate)
CaO + SiO2 → CaSiO3 (Calcium silicate)
CaO + SO2 → CaSO3 (Calcium sulphite)
3CaO + P2O5 → Ca3(PO4)2 (Calcium phosphate)

6. It forms slaked lime when dissolved in water. It is an exothermic reaction.
CaO + H2O → Ca(OH)2 + 15,000 cal.

Uses:

  1. For making basic lining in furnaces.
  2. For drying alcohol and gases.
  3. Lime water is used as laboratory reagent and in medicine.
  4. For purification of coal gas and in paper industry.
  5. As flux in metallurgical process.
  6. For producing lime light.
  7. For manufacture of ammonia, sodalime, calcium carbide, cement and glass.

Question 5.
Differentiate between Alkali metals and Alkaline earth metals?
Answer:
Differences between Alkali metals and Alkaline earth metals:
Alkali metals:

  1. They show +1 oxidation state.
  2. Their hydroxides are strong bases.
  3. Their carabonate, sulphate and phosphate compounds of alkaline earth plate are soluble in water.
  4. Their ionisation energy is comparatively less.
  5. They are melleable, ductile and lustrous.

Alkaline earth metals:

  1. These show +2 oxidation state.
  2. Their hydroxides are comparatively weaker bases.
  3. These compounds of alkaline earth metals are insoluble in water.
  4. Their ionization energy is high.
  5. These are comparatively less.

MP Board Solutions

Question 6.
Explain the Castner – Kellner cell with diagram to obtained sodium hydroxide?
Answer:
Castner – Kellner Cell:
It consists of rectangular iron tank which is fitted with three slate portion which do not touch the bottom but fit into grooves at bottom. The bottom of cell is covered with mercury and this is brought into circulation with the help of an eccentric wheel. (MPBoardSolutions.com) The outer compartmentA is filled with brine and inner Graphite compartment B with caustic soda solution. Two slot graphite electrode project from the ceiling of the outer compartment of the vessel and act anode. The iron cathode consisting of several rods is filled in middle compartment.

There are exit pipes fitted in compartment and for removal of hydrogen in central compartment. On passing current sodium chloride (brine) solution is electrolyzed in the two outer compartment. Chlorine is liberated at anode. (MPBoardSolutions.com) Sodium amalgam formed is pushed by the help of eccentric wheel into the central compartment. In the central compartment B when caustic soda is electrolyzed OH move to the mercury layer which act as anode and after discharge react with the sodium of Na – Hg to form caustic soda with the release of H2 gas. Simultaneously an equivalent amount of sodium liberated at cathode reacts with water to produce more caustic soda.
2Na – Hg + 2H2O → 2NaOH + 2Hg + H2

The mercury obtained can again be used in the cell. Caustic soda solution is evaporated to obtain solid caustic soda which is fused and cast into flakes or sticks.
Cell reactions are as follows:

1. In outer compartments:
Ionization:
2 NaCl ⇄ 2Na+ + 2Cl; (Ionization)

At cathode:
2Na+ + 2e → 2Na (Reduction)
2Na + xHg → HgxNa2 (Sodium amalgam)

At anode:
2Cl → 2Cl + 2e; (Oxidation)
2Cl → Cl2-

2. In central compartment:
Ionization:
NaOH ⇄ Na+ + OH; (Ionization)

At cathode:
2Na – Hg + 2H20 2NaOH + 2Hg + H2
Na+ + e → Na, (Reduction)
2Na +2H2O 2NaOH + H2(g)

At anode:
2OH → 20H + 2e, (Oxidation)
HgxNa2 + 20H → 2NaOH + xHg

MP Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions

MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Hydrogen

MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Hydrogen

Hydrogen Important Questions

Hydrogen Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
In which compound the oxidation state of hydrogen is negative?
Answer:
CaH2.

Question 2.
The bleaching property of H2O2 is due to oxidation or reduction?
Answer:
H2O2 easily gives oxygen therefore, it is used as bleaching agent. This is due to oxidation property it is used in bleaching.
H2O2 → H2O + [O].

Question 3.
Who discovered hydrogen?
Answer:
Henry Cavendish.

MP Board Solutions

Question 4.
What is used as moderator in atomic reactors?
Answer:
Heavy water (D2O).

Question 5.
H2O2 reduces Cl2 in which compound?
Answer:
In HCl.

Question 6.
The bleaching property of H2O2 depends upon?
Answer:
Oxidation.

Question 7.
Which oxide forms H2O2 with dii. HCI?
Answer:
Na2O2 and BaC2.

MP Board Solutions

Question 8.
Why the vapourisation of ethanol takes place faster than water?
Answer:
Due to weak hydrogen bonding.

Question 9.
Which type of compounds formed lattice carbides?
Answer:
d and f – block elements.

Question 10.
What is the use of lattice hydrides?
Answer:
For storage of H2 and to catalyze the hydrogenation reaction.

Question 11.
Which acts as propellant in rockets?
Answer:
H2O2 (Hydrogen peroxide).

Question 12.
What is known as the absorbtion of hydrogen by palladium?
Answer:
Absorption.

MP Board Solutions

Question 13.
Which chemical compound is called calgon?
Answer:
Sodium hexa metaphosphate.

Question 14.
What is main difference between ortho and meta hydrogen?
Answer:
Nuclear Spin.

Question 15.
What is prepared by the combustion of kerosene?
Answer:
Oil gas.

Question 16.
What is used as trace to study the processes occuring in organisms?
Answer:
Heavy water.

Question 17.
What is the radioactive isotope of hydrogen?
Answer:
Tritium.

Question 18.
What is formed by the reaction of calcium phosphate with water?
Answer:
Phosphene.

MP Board Solutions

Question 19.
What is the bond angle in H – O – O in H2O2?
Answer:
97°.

Question 20.
Which hydrides are not in simple proportion?
Answer:
Interfacial hydrides.

Hydrogen Short Answer Type Questions – I

Question 1.
What is the reason for the temporary and permanent hardness of water? Explain?
Answer:
The temporary hardness of water is due to calcium and magnesium carbonate and the permanent hardness is due to presence of calcium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium sulphate and magnesium sulphate.

Question 2.
Write an expression to show the amphoteric nature of water?
Answer:
Water has amphoteric nature. It behaves both as acid and base. With strong acid it behaves as base and with strong bases it behaves as acid.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Hydrogen img 1

Question 3.
How the impure hydrogen is purified?
Answer:
When hydrogen gas is passed on platinum black or palladium metal, the hydrogen gas is adsorbed this is called adsorption. The impure hydrogen gets purified.

Question 4.
Write the disadvantages of hard water?
Answer:

  1. Hard water cannot be used in laboratory and for injection in medical.
  2. Much quantity of soap is wasted if clothes are cleaned with hard water due to the formation of insoluble calcium and magnesium soap.
  3. Hard water is unuseful in dyeing and printing.
  4. Cooking with hard water take longer time and spoil the taste and quality of food.

MP Board Solutions

Question 5.
Explain the Lane’s method to prepare hydrogen?
Answer:
By passing alternate currents of steam and water gas over red hot iron. The oxidation and reduction processes are alternatively carried out.

Oxidizing stage:
Superheated steam is passed over red hot iron at about 1023 K and 1073K, hydrogen gas is produced and magnetic oxides of iron (Fe3O4) is left.
3Fe + 4H2O → Fe3O4 + 4H2↑.

Question 6.
Write the method of removal of permanent as well as temporary hardness of water?
Answer:
By adding washing soda (Na2C03) when permanent hard water is treated with calculated quantity of sodium carbonate solution calcium and magnesium salts present in water get precipitated as insoluble carbonate. Soft water is then decanted off.
CaCl2 + Na2CO3 → CaCO3 + 2NaCl
MgSO4 + Na2CO3 → MgCO3 + Na2SO4
MgCl2 + Na2CO3 → MgCO3 + 2NaCl
CaS04 + Na2CO3 → Na2SO4 + CaCO3.

Question 7.
How the strength of H2O2 is expressed?
Answer:
Strength of Hydrogen Peroxide Solution:
The strength of hydrogen peroxide solution is expressed in terms of the volume of oxygen obtained from it. For example, 10 volume, 20 volume etc. (MPBoardSolutions.com) The strength is equal to the volume of oxygen produced at NTP which is obtained by heating one unit of that solution. The ‘10 volume’ solution of hydrogen peroxide will give 10 ml oxygen at NTP when 1 ml of the sample is heated.

Question 8.
Write the uses of hydrogen?
Answer:
Uses of hydrogen:

  1. As a reducing agent.
  2. On account of its lighter nature, it was previously used in filling of balloons and aeroplanes but due to its combustible nature, a mixture of inert gas helium (85%) and hydrogen (15%) is used now.
  3. In the manufacture of methyl alcohol, ammonia, synthetic petrol and fertilizers.
  4. For preparing vegetable ghee: Hydrogenation of vegetable oil gives vegetable ghee.
  5. Oxyhydrogen flame: Hygrogen produces high temperature when bums with oxygen which is used for welding and cutting purposes.
  6. Hydrogen is used as a rocket propellent.

MP Board Solutions

Question 9.
What is the difference between the terms “hydrolysis” and “hydration”?
Answer:
Hydrolysis:
Hydrolysis is the interaction of H+ and OH ions of water with the anion and cation of salt respectively to form acid and base.
Example:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Hydrogen img 2

Hydration:
Hydration is the interaction of water with the salts to form co – ordinated or hydrated ions or hydrated salts.
Example:
1. Water molecules are co-ordinated to metal ion in a complex.
[Cr(H2O)6]Cl3.

2. Water occupying interstitial sites in the crystal lattice.
BaCl2.2H2O.

Question 10.
What is oil gas? How it is prepared?
Answer:
Coal gas is a mixture of many gases. When a thin layer of kerosene is dropped on red hot retort, then big molecules break and converts into methane, ethylene, acetylene. It is used in burners.

Question 11.
What is coal gas? Write its constituent?
Answer:
Coal gas is mixture of many gases where hydrogen gas is main element.
H2 = 43.55%, N2 = 2.12%, CH4 = 25.35%, CO2 = 0.3%, CO = 4.11%, O2 = 0 – 1.5%.

Question 12.
When sodium reacts with water, which gas is released? Write name and formula?
Answer:
The more reactive metals (Na, K, Ca) react with water and metal hydroxide are formed and H2 gas is released.
2Na + 2H – OH → 2NaOH + H2
Ca + 2H – OH → Ca(OH)2 + H2
2K + 2H – OH → 2K—OH + H2↑.

Question 13.
Write the reason for hardness of water and how many types of hardness are there?
Answer:
Water which does not readily produce lather with soap solution and cause of hardness of water. It is due to the presence of bicarbonate, sulphates and chlorides of calcium and magnesium in it. These salts get dissolved in it as it passes through the rock or ground.
Types of hardness:

  1. Temporary hardness: It is due to the presence of bicarbonates of calcium, magnesium ion dissolved in water.
  2. Permanent hardness: It is due to the presence of chlorides and sulphates of calcium, magnesium and iron in water.

Question 14.
What are hard and soft water?
Answer:
Hard water:
Water which does not readily produce lather with soap solution is known as hard water.
Soft water:
Water which readily produce lather with soap solution is known as soft water.

MP Board Solutions

Question 15.
What is distilled water? Give its one use?
Answer:
The water which is formed with the help of distillation, this water is called distilled water. Its main use is in medicines and to prepare reagents in laboratory.

Question 16.
Write the uses of heavy water?
Answer:
Deuterium oxide is known as heavy water, its chemical formula is D20. It contains two deuterium atom in place of normal hydrogen atom.
Uses of heavy water:
1. Heavy water is used in nuclear reactors to slow down the speed of neutrons to carry out many important reactions. It is also used in the preparation of deuterium D2. It is employed as a tracer in the study of reactions occurring in living organisms.

2. D2O is used in atomic reactors where it serves two purposes:

  • It acts as a coolant and
  • Act as a moderator.

3. The water of some rivers like the Ganga remains clear and pure even when kept for years. It is due to presence of heavy water in it.

Question 17.
Explain the oxidising and reducing nature of H2O2?
Answer:
1. H2O2 liberates oxygen atom easily so it is strong oxidising agent but when it reacts with other oxidising agent it easily extracts oxygen atom from them hence it possesses reducing property too.
Oxidising nature:

  1. PbS + 4H2O2 → PbSO4 + 4H2O
  2. NaNO2 + H2O2 → NaNO3 + H2O
  3. Na2SO3 + H2O2 → Na2SO4 + H2O

Reducing nature:

  1. H2O2 + O3 → H2O + 2O2
  2. H2O2 + Na2O2 → Na2O + H2O + O2
  3. Ag2O + H2O2 → 2Ag + H2O + O2.

Question 18.
Why the solution H2O2 did not concentrated on heating? How it can be concentrated?
Answer:
Hydrogen peroxide obtained by any method is dilute. It cannot be concentrated by boiling because it decomposes at a temperature below its boiling point. Therefore it is concentrated by following step:
1. Evaporation:
Evaporation of dilute solution of H2O2 on water bath at 70°C gives 45 – 50% H2O2 solution.

2. Vacuum evaporation:
The evaporation is further carried on, in a vacuum desiccator over concentrated sulphuric acid. In this way 66% solution of hydrogen peroxide is obtained.

3. Distillation under reduced pressure:
66% solution of hydrogen peroxide on distillation under reduced pressure, yields hydrogen peroxide of 99% concentration.

4. Crystallization:
H2O2 solution obtained in the above step is placed in a freezing mixture of solid CO2 and ether. Crystals of H2O2 formed are separated and melted to obtain pure H2O2.

MP Board Solutions

Question 19.
For the manufacture of hydrogen peroxide from peroxides, phosphoric acid is more useful than sulphuric acid why?
Answer:
H2SO4 acts as catalyst in the decomposition of H2O2. So for the manufacture of H2O2 from peroxides instead of H2SO4, weak acids like H3PO4, H2CO3 etc. are more useful.
3BaO2 + 2H3PO4 → Ba3(PO4)2 + 3H2O2
insoluble.

Question 20.
An ionic crystal of an alkali metal has significant covalent character and is almost unreactive towards oxygen and chlorine. This is used in the synthesis of other useful hydrides. Write the formula of this hydride? Write its reaction with Al2Cl6?
Answer:
The hydride is LiH. Due to Li it behaves as covalent compound. It is highly stable.
8LiH + Al2Cl6 → 2LiAlH4 + 6LiCl

Question 21.
Why hard water does not give fast lather with soap?
Answer:
In hard water bicarbonate, chlorides and sulphates of Ca and Mg are present. Soaps are sodium salt of higher fatty acids e,g., sodium stearate (C17H35COONa). (MPBoardSolutions.com) Salts of calcium and magnesium react and form precipitates of calcium and magnesium stearate.
2C17 H35 COONa + M2+ → (CH17 H35 COO)2 M + 2Na+
Until all the salts are precipitated, no lather is formed with soap and this soap is wasted.

Question 22.
Write four uses of H2O2?
Answer:

  1. It has antiseptic properties and hence used cleaning teeth, ears, wounds, etc.
  2. It is used for bleaching hair, silk, wool, feathers, ivory, etc.
  3. As oxidizing agent in laboratory.
  4. In the preservation of milk, wine and some other drinks.
  5. As a rocket fuel (as propellant) by producing oxygen.

Question 23.
Write the method of production of hydrogen from water gas?
Answer:
Process of preparation of hydrogen from water gas is known as Bosch process. Bosch process : In this process, hydrogen is obtained by separating it from water gas. Water gas is produced by passing steam over red hot coke.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Hydrogen img 3

Water gas is mixed with steam and heated at a temperature of 450 °C in presence of Fe2O3 as catalyst and chromic oxide as promoter when carbon monoxide gets oxidized to carbon dioxide.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Hydrogen img 4

The mixture of hydrogen and carbon dioxide is passed through water under 25 atmospheric pressure. Carbon dioxide gets dissolved leaving behind hydrogen. (MPBoardSolutions.com) Hydrogen so obtained still contains some carbon monoxide. It is removed by passing the gas through ammoniacal solution of cuprous chloride. The hydrogen so obtained contains nitrogen as impurity.

Question 24.
What is conducting water? Write their uses?
Answer:
Kohlrausch distilled the water 42 times at low pressure in an aperture made up of quartz. This water is called conducting water. This is used for
conductivity.

Question 25.
Write the redox reaction between fluorine and water?
Answer:
Fluorine is strong oxidising agent. It oxidizes H2O into O2 and O3.
2F2(g) + 2H2O(l) → O2(g) + 4H+(aq) + 4F(aq) 3F2(g) + 3H2O(l) → O3(g) + 6H+(aq) + 6F(aq).

MP Board Solutions

Question 26.
Explain why HCI is a gas and HF is a liquid?
Answer:
F is smaller and more electronegative than Cl, so it forms stronger H – bonds as compared to Cl. As a consequence, more energy is needed to break the H – bonds in HF than HCI and hence the boiling point of HF is higher than that of HCI. That’s why HF is liquid and HCI is a gas.

Question 27.
Write an equation for the manufacturing of D2O2?
Answer:
On reaction of D2SO4 with BaO2, D2O2 is prepared.
BaO2 + D2SO4 → BaSO4 + D2O2

Question 28.
Why H2O2 cannot be kept for a longer time?
Answer:
Since hydrogen peroxide decomposes on storage, therefore H2O2 is stored in brown bottle to avoid the effect of light. This is because the light cause the decomposition of H2O2. (MPBoardSolutions.com) A small quantity of acetanilide is also added which retard the decomposition of H2O2. Here acetanilide acts as an inhibitor.

Question 29.
Why H2O2 is called Antichlor?
Answer:
In neutral medium H202 reduce halogen to acid, metal oxides to metals and ozone to 02.
Cl2 + H2O2 → 2HCl + O2
Br2 + H2O2 → 2HBr + O2.
Due to its ability to reduce chlorine it acts as an Antichlor in bleaching by destroying the unreacted chlorine.

Question 30.
When the temporary hard water is boiled with lime water, it becomes soft Why?
Answer:
This method is called Clark method. When temporary hard water is treated with calculated quantity of lime, bicarbonate present in water change to insoluble carbonates which settle down. Soft water is then decanted off.
Ca(HCO3)2 + Ca(OH)2 → 2CaCO3 + 2H2O
Mg(HCO3)2 + Ca(OH)2 CaCO3 + MgCO3 + 2H2O

MP Board Solutions

Question 31.
Do you expect the carbon hydrides of the type (Cn H2n+2) to act as Lewis acid or base? Justify your answer?
Answer:
CnH2n+2 such as CH4, C2H6 etc. neither act as Lewis acid nor Lewis base. It is because octet of all the carbon atoms are completed.

Question 32.
Explain the effect of high enthalpy of H – H bond on reactivity of dihydrogen?
Answer:
Due to high enthalpy of dissociation of H – H bond. Hydrogen is unreactive at room temperature. But at high temperature and in presence of catalyst it forms hydrides with metals and non – metals.

Question 33.
In which compound the oxidation number of hydrogen is negative?
Answer:
When hydrogen reacts with higher metal or highly reactive metals like Na, K, Ca etc then electrovalent hydrides are formed. In this hydride the hydrogen has negative oxidation state.

Hydrogen Short Answer Type Questions – II

Question 1.
What is deuterium? Write its two uses?
Answer:
Deuterium is obtained by electrolysis of heavy water. It is collected at cathode and shows reaction similar to hydrogen like its form heavy ammonia (ND3) with nitrogen heavy water (D2O) with oxygen.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Hydrogen img 5
Uses:

  1. Chemical and Biological reaction.
  2. It is used in artificial transmutation as target particle.

MP Board Solutions

Question 2.
Give reason:

  1. Lakes freeze from top towards bottom.
  2. Ice floats on water.

Answer:

  1. Water has maximum density at 4°C. In severe cold, the surface of the lake almost freezes but below the surface, there is water at a temperature about 4°C. This property is extremely helpful for animals living under lake water.
  2. Ice floats on liquid water as its density is less than liquid water.

Question 3.
If same mass of liquid water and a piece of ice is taken, then why is the density of ice less than that of liquid water?
Answer:
The mass per unit volume (i.emass/volume) is called density. Since water expands on freezing, therefore, volume of ice for the same mass of water is more than liquid water. In other words, density of ice is lower than liquid water and hence ice floats on water.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Hydrogen img 6

Question 4.
How is the detection of hydrogen peroxide is performed?
Answer:
Test for hydrogen peroxide:

  1. When few drops of H2O2 is added to acidified potassium dichromate solution containing ether, blue colour solution is formed which confirms the presence of H2O2.
  2. Titanium dioxide is mixed with hot and cone. H2SO4 and then cooled followed by addition of few drops of hydrogen peroxide, yellow – orange pertitanic acid is produced.
  3. On adding few drops of H2O2 to acidified glycol solution, blue colour is obtained.
  4. Addition of few drops of H2O2 to a solution of FeSO4 and starch and potassium iodide solution gives blue colour.
  5. Addition of few drops of H2O2 to a mixture of aniline and potassium chlorate in dilute sulphuric acid give violet solution.

Question 5.
On the basis of electronic configuration justify the position of hydrogen in periodic table?
Answer:
Hydrogen is the first and the lightest element of the periodic table. It is not a metal but a non – metallic element. But on the basis of electronic configuration it is kept in first group of 5 – block. It is found in atomic form only at high temperature. (MPBoardSolutions.com) In elemental form it is found as diatomic molecule i.e., as H2 and is also called as dihydrogen. One proton and one electron is found in hydrogen atom. Hydrogen forms large number of compounds and is an element of high industrial importance.

Hydrogen is the first element of periodic table with one proton in the nucleus and one electron in the first shell (K – shell). It is not possible to assign a to hydrogen in Mendeleev’s and modem periodic table because it shows similarities and dissimilarities with alkali metals (IA group), halogens (VIIA group) and carbon group (IV A group). This makes position of hydrogen very controversial. Because of this it is also known as Rogue element.

MP Board Solutions

Question 6.
H2O2 is used for shining the old oil paintings?
Answer:
Old oil paintings contain basic lead oxide, H2S present in atmosphere change lead oxide into lead sulphide. Thus, white paintings become black.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Hydrogen img 7
When the paintings are washed with hydrogen peroxide black lead sulphide oxidised into lead sulphate and painting shine again.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Hydrogen img 8

Question 7.
Draw the atomic structures of all isotopes of hydrogen?
Answer:
Atoms of an element having same atomic number but different atomic mass is known as isotope. Hydrogen has three isotopes :

  1. Protium or ordinary hydrogen \(_{ 1 }^{ 1 }\)H
  2. Deuterium or heavy hydrogen \(_{ 1 }^{ 1 }\)H
  3. Tritium or radioactive hydrogen \(_{ 1 }^{ 3 }\)H

Structural diagram:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Hydrogen img 9
Isotopic effect:
The difference in properties mass is called isotopic effect.

Question 8.
On the basis of structure and chemical reactions? Explain, what are the characteristics of electron deficient hydrides?
Answer:
Electron deficient hydrides do not have sufficient number of electrons to form normal covalent bonds. They generally exist in polymeric forms such as B2H6, B4H10, (AlH3)n etc.
Due to deficiency of electrons, these hydrides act as Lewis acids and thus, form complex entities with Lewis bases such as NH3, H ions.
B2H6 + 2NH3 → BH2(NH3)2]+(BH4)
B2H6 + 2NaH → 2Na+(BH4)
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Hydrogen img 10

Question 9.
Describe ortho and para hydrogen. How will you obtain para hydrogen?
Answer:
Hydrogen atom consists of one proton in the nucleus and one electron in the extra nuclear part. Both electron and nucleus spin about their own axis. (MPBoardSolutions.com) When two atoms of hydrogen combine to form a hydrogen molecule, the spins of electron should be in opposite direction but the spins of nuclei may either be in the same direction or in opposite directions. When nuclear spins are in same direction, it is called ortho hydrogen. When nuclear spins are in opposite directions, it is called para hydrogen.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Hydrogen img 11
Preparation of para hydrogen:
Para hydrogen can be obtained from ordinary hydrogen by keeping it in a quartz vessel with active charcoal at 20K for about 3 to 4 hours.

Question 10.
Why, hard water does not used in boiler?
Answer:
1. Hard water is not used in boiler because compound of calcium and magnesium are deposited on internal side of boiler. This coating is bad conductor of heat so wastes of fuel take place. Due to this coating boiler have to the heated very much for heating water.

2. The boiler may burst if sudden cracks appear in boiler scale. Due to these sudden cracks, the water that comes in contact with the heated boiler is at once converted into steam and the sudden increase in pressure may cause the boiler to burst.

3. Hydrogen is volatile gas therefore, it is risk for explosion.

MP Board Solutions

Question 11.
How the production of dihydrogen obtained from coal gasification can be increased?
Answer:
The gasification of producing syn gas from coal or coke is called coal gasification.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Hydrogen img 12
This is called water gas shift reaction. The CO2 thus produced is removed by scrub-bing with sodium arsenite solution.

Question 12.
Expiain the structure of hydrogen peroxide?
Answer:
Dipole moment of H2O2 is 2.1 D, it indicates that structure of H2O2 is non – planar. By X – rays and other physical methods it is known that structure of H2O2 is like open book. (MPBoardSolutions.com) In gaseous state planes form an angle of 111.5°. In the axis, there are two oxygen atoms and one hydrogen in each plane.

The H – O and O – O bond lengths are 0.95Å and 147Å respectively. There is a slight change in the crystalline state due to hydrogen bonding. The angle between the planes is 90.2°, angle O – O – H = 101.9°, bond length H – O = 0.99Å and O – O is 1.46Å.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Hydrogen img 13
According to modem and latest belief probably both forms occur in equilibrium in aqueous solutions involving ionisation which explains the feeble acidic nature of hydrogen peroxide.

Question 13.
What is water gas? Write its constituents and uses?
Answer:
Bosch processes:
When steam is passed over red hot coke, water gas is produced.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Hydrogen img 14
Water gas is mixed with steam and passed over Fe2O3 oxidized to CO2.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Hydrogen img 15
This mixture of CO2 and H2 is passed in water at 25 atmospheric pressure CO2 gas is absorbed and H2 gas remains.
Constitution:
H2 = 49%, N2 = 4%, CO = 44%, CO2 = 2.7%, CH4 = 0.3%
Uses:

  1. As fuel in furnaces
  2. For preparation of carbonated water gas
  3. For manufacturing of ammonia.

Question 14.
What do you understand by the term “non – stoichiometric” hydrides? Do you expect this type of the hydrides to be formed by alkali metals? Justify your answer?
Answer:
The hydrides in which the ratio of the metal and hydrogen is found to be fractional are called non – stoichiometric hydrides. It is also observed that this fractional ratio is not fixed but varies with the temperature and pressure. (MPBoardSolutions.com) Such hydrides are formed by d and f – block elements. Usually all the holes are not occupied i.e., some holes always remain vacant and thus, these compounds are non – stoichiometric. Alkali metals do not form non – stoichiometric hydrides as each sodium atom loses its valency electron which is accepted by hydrogen atom to form H ion. In this way, an ionic compound, Na+ H, is formed.

MP Board Solutions

Question 15.
What is Calgon? How hardness of water is removed by using it?
Answer:
Calgon is a trade name for the complex salt (NaPO3)6 as Na2 [Na4 (PO3)6]. When calgon is added to hard water are rendered ineffective due to the formation of water soluble complex ion. This is known as sequstration.
Na2[Na4(PO3)6] + 2CaCl2 → Na2[Ca2(PO3)6] + 4NaCl
Na2 [Na4(PO3)6] + 2MgSO4 → Na2[Mg2 (PO3)6] + 2Na2SO4
The complex calcium and magnesium ion do not form any precipitate with soap. Therefore, they readily form lather with soap solution. Modem detergent contains sodium hexa – meta phosphate to remove the hardness of water due to Ca2+ and Mg2+ ion hence wastage of soap is checked.

Question 16.
Explain that H2O2 acts as both oxidizing and reducing agent. Why?
Answer:
H2O2 liberates oxygen atom easily, so it is strong oxidizing agent, but when it reacts with other oxidizing agent, it easily extracts oxygen atom from them hence, it possesses reducing property too.
Oxidizing nature:
1. 2KI + H2O2 → 2KOH + I2
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Hydrogen img 16
Reducing nature:
(a) In basic medium, it converts ferricyanide to ferrocyanide.
2[Fe(CN6)]3- + 20H + H2O2 → 2[Fe(CN)6]4- + 2H2O + O2

(b) In acidic medium; it reduces permanganate to manganese (II) salt.
2MnO4 + 6H+ + 5H2O2 → Mn2+ + 8H2O + 5O2

Question 17.
Consider a reaction of water with F2 and suggest, in terms of oxidauon and reduction, which species will oxidized/reduced?
Answer:
2F2(g) + 2H2O(l) → O2(g) + 4H+(aq) + 4F(aq)
3F2(g) + 3H2O(l) → O2(g) + 6H+(aq) + 6F(aq)
In these reactions, water acts as a reducing agent as it gets oxidized to either O2 or O3 while fluorine acts as an oxidizing agent as it is reduced to F ion.

Question 18.
How does H2O2 behave as bleaching agent?
Answer:
Hydrogen peroxide acts as a bleaching agent due to the release of nascent oxygen.
H2O2 → H2O + [0]
The nascent oxygen combines with colouring matter which in turn gets oxidized. The bleaching action of H2O2 is due to the oxidation of colouring matter by nascent oxygen. It is used for bleaching materials like jury, silk, wool, feathers etc.

Question 19.
Why the density of water is maximum at 4°C?
Answer:
Maximum density of water:
Melting of ice decreases hydrogen bonds because cage – like structure is broken. With increase in temperature from 0°C to 4°C with the cleavage of H – bonds, water molecules starts moving closer to each other as a result volume decreases while density increases. (MPBoardSolutions.com) When the temperature becomes greater than 4°C, kinetic energy of H2O molecule increases resulting in expansion of water. As a result of this volume increases while density decreases. That is at 4°C, density of water is maximum.

MP Board Solutions

Question 20.
What do you understand by

  1. Electron deficient
  2. Electron precise and
  3. Electron rich compounds of hydrogen? Provide justification with suitable examples?

Answer:
1. Electron deficient hydride:
Electron deficient hydrides are those which do not have sufficient number of electrons to form normal covalent bond.
Examples: BH3, AlH3
To makeup their deficiency they generally exist in polymeric form such as B2H6, Al2H6.

2. Electron precise hydride:
Electron precise hydrides are those which have suffi-cient number of electrons required for forming covalent bond.
Examples:
CH4, SiH4 etc.

3. Electron rich hydride:
Electron rich hydrides are those which have excesses electron as required to form normal covalent bond. The excesses electron present as lone pair.
Examples: NH3, PH3 etc.

Question 21.
Tell the group of hydrides which include H2O, B2H6 and NaH?
Answer:

  • H2O: Covalent or molecular hydride (Electron rich hydride)
  • B2H6: Covalent or molecular hydride (Electron deficient hydride)
  • NaH: Ionic or salt hydride.

Hydrogen Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Explain Permutit process of removal of hardness of water?
Answer:
Permutit process or Zeolite process:
The water is passed over such substances which readily replace the Ca2+ and Mg2+ ions of hard water by sodium ions. The water does not become hard in presence of sodium salts. Ofcourse too much of sodium salts also make it hard just as in sea water. (MPBoardSolutions.com) The water thus obtained is soft. These products are called as zeolites. Zeolite is a technical name given to certain hydrated silicates of aluminium and sodium. It is also known as permutit. It is obtained by fusing sodium carbonate with alumina and silica.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Hydrogen img 17
Na2CO3 + Al2O3 + 2SiO2 → Na2Al2Si2O8 + CO2
Na2Al2Si2O8 is known as sodium zeolite and Al2Si2O8 is zeolite and can be represented by Z. Sodium zeolite reacts with chlorides, sulphates of Ca and Mg as given below and hardness is removed.
CaCl2 + Na2 → CaZ + 2NaCl
MgSO4 + Na2 → MgZ + Na2SO2
Reactions have been given by representing sodium zeolite as Na2Z.
After sufficient use permutit gets exhausted and cannot be used further. It is regenerated and made usable by passing 10% solution of sodium chloride.
CaZ + 2NaCl → CaCl2 + Na2Z
MgZ + 2NaCl → MgCl2 + Na2Z

Question 2.
What happens when:

  1. Calcium hydride reacts with water
  2. H2O2 is added in acidic KMnO4 solution
  3. Reaction of potassium ferricyanide with H202
  4. Reaction of H2 with N2 at high temperature and pressure in presence of Fe?

Answer:

  1. On reaction of calcium hydride with water, H2 is formed
    CaH2 + 2H2O → Ca(OH)2 + 2H2
  2. The pink colour disappear of KMnO4
    2KMnO4 + 3H2SO4 + 5H2O2 → K2SO4 + 2MnSO4 + 8H2O + 5O2
  3. On adding H2O2 in potassium ferricyanide, it reduces to potassium ferrocyanide
    2K3[Fe(CN)6] + 2KOH + H2O2 → 2K4[Fe(CN)6] + 2H2O + O2
  4. Ammonia is formed when hydrogen reacts with N2 200 atm. pressure

MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Hydrogen img 18

Question 3.
Explain the processes of formation of hydrogen in laboratory?
Answer:
Preparation of hydrogen (laboratory method):
Hydrogen is prepared in laboratory by action of dil. H2SO4 on granulated Zn. Zn is taken into woulf bottle fitted with thistle funnel and a outlet tube.
Hydrogen formed by this method is collected over water by displacement method.
Zn + H2SO4 → ZnSO4 + H2
Purification of hydrogen : Hydrogen prepared by this method contains following impurities:

  1. Arsine (AsH3) and phosphene (PH3)
  2. H2S
  3. SO2, CO2 and oxides of nitrogen (NO2)
  4. Water vapours.

MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Hydrogen img 19
In order to remove these impurities, gas is passed in a series of U – tubes containing different solutions:

  1. Passed in tube filled with AgNO3 solution to absorb AsH3 and PH3.
  2. Passed in the tube containing lead nitrate solution to remove H2S.
  3. Passed in the tube filled with cone. KOH solution to remove SO2, CO2 and NO2.

Question 4.
Rohan heard that instructions were given to the laboratory attendent to store a particular chemical Le., keep it in the dark room, add some urea in it, and keep it away from dust This chemical acts as an oxidizing as well as a reducing agent in both acidic and alkaline media. This chemical is important for use in the pollution control treatment of domestic and industrial effluents?

  1. Write the name of this compound.
  2. Explain, why such precautions are taken for storing this chemical?

Answer:

  1. H2O2 (Hydrogen peroxide).
  2. The following precautions must be taken while storing hydrogen peroxide:
  3. It must be kept in wax lined coloured bottles because the rough glass surface, light and dust particles are responsible for its decomposition.
  4. A small amount of negative catalyst such as urea, glycerol, phosphoric acid etc. is generally added which retards its decomposition.

MP Board Solutions

Question 5.
Calculate the strength of 5 volume of H2O2 solution?
Answer:
5 volumes 2O2 solution means that 1 volume of this solution will decompose to give 5 volumes of oxygen at S.T.P.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Hydrogen img 20
5 L oxygen is obtained from \(\frac{68×5}{22.4}\) g H2O2 = 15.17 g H2O2
i.e. 15g H2O2 is present in 1L solution. Thus, strength of the solution = 15 g/L.

Question 6.
Complete the following reactions:

  1. PbS(s) + H2O2(aq)
  2. MnO4(aq) + H2O2(aq)
  3. CaO(s) + H2O(g)
  4. AlCl3(g) + HzO(l)
  5. Ca3N2(s) + H2O(l)

above

  1. Hydrolysis
  2. Redox
  3. Solvation process.

Answer:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 9 Hydrogen img 21

MP Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions

MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions

MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions

Redox Reactions Important Questions

Redox Reactions Objective Type Questions

Question 1.
Choose the correct answer:

Question 1.
Metals used in Daniel cell are:
(a) N and Cu
(b) Zn and Ag
(c) Ag and Cu
(d) Zn and Cu
Answer:
(d) Zn and Cu

Question 2.
Which of the following is strongly reducing:
(a) r
(b) cr
(c) Bf
(d) r
Answer:
(d) r

Question 3.
Oxidation in electrolyte occurs:
(a) At anode
(b) At cathode
(c) At both the electrodes
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) At anode

MP Board Solutions

Question 4.
Which of the following statement is correct? Galvanic cell converts:
(a) Chemical energy to electrical energy
(b) Electrical energy to chemical energy
(c) Electrical state of metal to combined state
(d) Electrolytes to ions
Answer:
(b) Electrical energy to chemical energy

Question 5.
Oxidation number of chlorine in HOCl is:
(a) – 1
(b) 0
(c) +I
(d) +2
Answer:
(c) +I

Question 6.
Oxidation number of Mn in K2MnO4 is:
(a) +2
(b) +6
(c) +7
(d) 0
Answer:
(b) +6

Question 7.
Oxidation number of Cr in K2Cr2O7 is:
(a) -6
(b) +6
(c) +2
(d) -2.
Answer:
(b) +6

Question 8.
Oxidation number of Ni in Ni(CO)4 is:
(a) 0
(b) +2
(c) +1
(d) – 1.
Answer:
(a) 0

MP Board Solutions

Question 9.
Unit of cell constant is:
(a) ohm-1cm-1
(b) ohm cm
(c) cm
(d) cm-1
Answer:
(d) cm-1

Question 10.
Oxidation state of nitrogen is maximum in:
(a) N3H
(b) NH2OH
(c) N2H4
(d) NH3
Answer:
(a) N3H

Question 11.
Oxidation state of oxygen is zero in:
(a) CO
(b) O3
(c) SO2
(d) H2O2
Answer:
(b) O3

Question 12.
Oxidation state of Fe in K4[Fe(CN)6] is:
(a) +2
(b) +6
(c) +3
(d) +4
Answer:
(a) +2

Question 13.
Oxidation state of S In H2S2O8 is:
(a) +2
(b) +4
(c) +6
(d) +7
Answer:
(c) +6

MP Board Solutions

Question 14.
Oxidation state of Mn in KMnO4 is:
(a) +4
(b) +6
(c) +7
(d) +5
Answer:
(c) +7

Question 15.
oxidation state of chlorine is in:
(a) HCl
(b) HClO4
(c) ICI
(d) Cl2O
Answer:
(d) Cl2O

Question 16.
Oxidation state of Cl in ClO3 ion is:
(a) +4
(b) +5
(c) +3
(d) +2
Answer:
(b) +5

Question 17.
Halogen which is reduced most easily is:
(a) I2
(b) Br2
(c) Cl2
(d) F2
Answer:
(a) I2

Question 18.
Oxidation state of C in CCl4 is:
(a) +4
(b) -4
(c) +6
(d) – 6
Answer:
(a) +4

Question 19.
Oxidation state of S in S04-2 is:
(a) +6
(b) -6
(c) +5
(d) – 5
Answer:
(a) +6

MP Board Solutions

Question 20.
Oxidizing agent are:
(a) Electron acceptor
(b) Electron donor
(c) Proton acceptor
(d) Neutron acceptor
Answer:
(a) Electron acceptor

Question 2.
Fill in the blanks:

  1. Process of loss of electrons is called ……………………..
  2. Process of gain of electrons is called …………………….
  3. The deterioration of metals in presence of atmospheric gases and moisture is called …………………………
  4. A device in which electric energy gets converted to chemical energy is called …………………….. cell
  5. In electrochemical series the ability to reduce ………………………… on moving down
  6. Most strong reducing element is ………………………….
  7. Most strong oxidizing element is ………………………..
  8. Theory of dissociation of electrolyte was proposed by ……………………….

Answer:

  1. Oxidation
  2. Reduction
  3. Corrosion
  4. Electrochemical cell
  5. Decreases
  6. Lithium
  7. Fluorine
  8. Arrhenius

MP Board Solutions

Question 3.
Answer in one word/sentence:

  1. What is balanced redox reaction?
  2. Why does iron displaced copper from its salt solution?
  3. What is the oxidation state of chlorine in Cl2O?
  4. Why does an electrolyte dissociate into ions when dissolved in water?
  5. A saturated solution of KNO3 is used for the formation of salt bridge. Why?
  6. In SnCl2 + 2 FeCl3 → SnCl4 + 2 FeCl2, reaction which element is oxidizing agent?
  7. What is oxidation state of Xe in XeO3?

Answer:

  1. Redox reaction in which amount of oxidation and reduction is to the same extent.
  2. Because standard eletrode potential value of iron is less then the standard electrode potential of copper.
  3. +1
  4. Because the electrostate attractive force between the ions break due to water.
  5. Because the speed of K+ and NO3 and is almost same.
  6. FeCl3
  7. +6

Question 4.
Match the following:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions img 1
Answer:

  1. (c)
  2. (d)
  3. (a)
  4. (b)
  5. (e)

Redox Reactions Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Why iron displaces copper from its salt solution?
Answer:
Because the standard electrode potential of iron is less than copper.

Question 2.
What is the oxidation number of Cl in Cl2O?
Answer:
+1.

Question 3.
When an electrolyte is dissolved in water, it dissociates into ions? Why?
Answer:
Because due to water the electrostatic attraction force between the ions breaks.

Question 4.
Why the saturated solution of KNO3 is used to prepare salt bridge?
Answer:
Because the speed of K+ and NO3 ions is similar.

MP Board Solutions

Question 5.
In SnCl2 + 2FeCl3 → SnCl4 + 2FeCl2, which is oxidizing agent?
Answer:
FeCl3.

Question 6.
What is the oxidation number of Xe in XeO3?
Answer:
+6.

Question 7.
Which metal is used in Daniel cell?
Answer:
Lithium.

Question 8.
What is the oxidation state of Mn in K2MnO4?
Answer:
+6.

Question 9.
Which is the most reducing element?
Answer:
Lithium.

Question 10.
Who maintains the neutrality among the two half cells?
Answer:
Salt bridge.

MP Board Solutions

Question 11.
What is the standard electrode potential of SHE?
Answer:
0.00V (Zero).

Question 12.
Which is the best conducting metal?
Answer:
Silver (Ag).

Question 13.
The reaction 3ClOaq → Cl3 + 2Cl is an example of?
Answer:
Disproportionation reaction.

Question 14.
Which halogen reduces very easily?
Answer:
F2.

MP Board Solutions

Question 15.
Which reaction is called electron acceptance reaction?
Answer:
Reduction.

Question 16.
Where oxidation occurs in electrolysis?
Answer:
At anode.

Redox Reactions Short Answer Type Questions – I

Question 1.
What is oxidation process? Explain redox reaction with example?
Answer:
Oxidation state of an element is defined as “The residual charge left on its atom”. When all the other atoms are removed from the molecule as ion.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions img 2
2Mg + O2 → 2MgO [Addition of oxygen]
2FeCl2 → 2FeCl3 [Addition of electronegativity element]
H2S + Cl2 → S + 2HCl [Removal of hydrogen]
2Ki + H2O2 → 2KOH + I2 [Removal of electropositive element]

Question 2.
What is reduction process? Explain with example?
Answer:
The ability of any substance to accept hydrogen atom or +ve electrolytic element or to release oxygen or – ve element is called reduction process.
CuO + H2 → Cu + H2O [Remove of oxygen]
2FeCl3 + H2 S → 2FeCl2 + 2HCl + S [Removal of electromagnetive element]
Cl2 + H2S → 2 HCl + S [Addition of H]
S + Fe → Fes [Addition of electropositive element]

Question 3.
AgF2 is unstable compound, but if it is formed then it will acts as strong oxidising agent Why?
Answer:
In AgF2, Ag has oxidation state +2, it is highly unstable, it very easily accept electron and forms oxidation state +1. Because Ag+ has stable configuration so it is stable.
Ag2+ + e → Ag+
This is the reason why AgF2 behaves as a strong oxidizing agent.

MP Board Solutions

Question 4.
By the structure of S4O62-clarify that the oxidation state of S is +5?
Answer:
The oxidation state of two central sulphur atom is 0. As the electron pair remains in the centre cf the bond. So the remaining sulphur atom has oxidation state 4 – 5.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions img 3
⇒ 6(-2) + 2x = -2
⇒ -12 + 2x = -2
⇒ 2x = -2 + 12 = 10
⇒ x = \(\frac{10}{2}\) = 5.

Question 5.
What is electrochemical series?
Answer:
Electrochemical series:
When different elements and ions are arranged in increasing order of their standard electrode potential, a series is obtained which is called electrochemical series as activity series.

Question 6.
What is salt bridge? Write its two uses?
Answer:
1. It connects the solution in two half ceil and completes the cell circuit

2. The salt bridge which contains the solution of an electrolyte say K+NO3 maintains the electrical neutrality by diffusion of ion through it. As positive ion begins to be formed in oxidation half cell negative ion from the salt bridge diffuse out into this half cell. Similarly, as the positive Ion begin to be consumed in the reduction.

Hair cell positive:
On from the salt bridge diffuse out into this half cell. As a result the solution in the two half cell remain electrically neutral and the current continous to flow.

Question 7.
On the basis of electron transfer explain oxidation and reduction reactions?
Answer:
Reactions involving exchange of electrons are called redox reaction. Reaction given below
2FeCl3 + SnCl2 → 2FeCl2 + SnCl4
It is an example of redox reaction in which FeCl3 is oxidizing agent while SnCl2 is a reducing agent.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions img 4
According to electronic concept during oxidation substance loses one or more electron and its positive oxidation number increases while negative oxidation number decreases. (MPBoardSolutions.com) On the other hand, during reduction substance gains one or more electron and is positive oxidation number decreases while negative oxidation number increases.

Question 8.
What is electrochemical equivalent?
Answer:
According to Faraday’s first law:
The mass of any substance deposited at any electrode is directly proportional to the quantity of electricity passed.

Thus, if W gm substance is deposited on passing Q coulomb electricity, then W ∝ Q or W = ZQ
Where, Z is a constant of proportionality and is called electrochemical equivalent of the substance deposited. If a current of I ampere is passed for t second, then Q = I × t. (MPBoardSolutions.com) So that, W = Z × Q = Z × I × r

Thus, if, Q = 1 coulomb, 1=1 ampere and t = 1 second, then W = Z. Hence, electrochemical equivalent of a substance may be defined as, “The mass of the substance deposited when a current of one ampere is passed for one second”.

As one Faraday (96500 C) deposits one gram equivalent of the substance, hence, electrochemical equivalent can be calculated from the equivalent mass.
\(\frac { Equivalentmassofthesubstance\quad }{ 96500 } \)

MP Board Solutions

Question 9.
What happens when Zn is kept in CuS04 solution? Explain with equation?
Answer:
The reaction occurring in the beaker may be written as
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions img 5
Cancelling the common S042+ ions
Zn(s) + Cu2+(eq) → Zn2+(eq) + Cu(s)
In this case Zinc metal loses electron and gets oxidised to Zn++ ions which goes into the solution. Due to this, weight of zinc plate gradually decreases. On the other hand, electrons lost by Zinc atom are taken up by Cu2+ ions of CuS04 solution.

Question 10.
What do you mean by standard electrode potential?
Answer:
Standard electrode potential: Standard electrode potential (E°) of a half cell (electrode) is the potential difference which is produced when one electrode is dipped in the solution of molar concentration of its ion at 298 K. (MPBoardSolutions.com) If electrode is gaseous, the pressure of gas must be one atmosphere.
In IUPAC system reduction potentials are known as standard electrode potential.

Question 11.
The reaction Cl2(g) + 2OH(aq) → ClO(aq) + Cl(aq) + H2O(l) represents the process of bleaching. Identify and name species that bleaches the substances due to its oxidizing action?
Answer:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions img 6
In this reaction, O. N. of Cl increases from 0 in Cl2 to +1 in ClO and decreases to -1 in Cl. Therefore, Cl2 is both oxidized to ClO and reduced to Cl (Disproportionation reaction). Since, Cl ion cannot act as oxidizing agent (Because it cannot decrease its O.N. lower than -1) therefore, Cl2 bleaches substance due to oxidizing action of ClO (Hypochlorite) ion.

Question 12.
Define oxidizing agent and reducing agent?
Answer:
Oxidizing agent:
A substance which brings oxidation is called oxidising agent. On the basis of electronic theory, an oxidizing agent may be defined as an electron acceptor. i.e. (MPBoardSolutions.com) in the reaction between Zn atom and Cu2+ ion in aqueous solution of Cu2+ salt, Cu2+ ion is the oxidizing agent as it brings about the oxidation of Zn atom by gaining the electron lost by it.
Zn + Cu2+ → Zn2 + Cu
(Gains e)
(∴ Oxidising agent)
Thus, oxidizing agent or oxidant undergoes gain of electrons during the reaction.
Reducing agent:
A substance which brings about reduction is called a reducing agent. On the basis of electronic theory, a reducing agent may be defined as an electron donor, e.g., in reaction between Zn atom (MPBoardSolutions.com) Cu2+ ion in an aqueous salt solution of Cu2+, Zn atom is the reducing agent as it brings about reduction of Cu2+ ion by losing the electrons.
Zn + Cu2+ → Zn2+ + Cu
(Loses e)
(∴Reducing agent)

MP Board Solutions

Question 13.
If iron rod is dipped in CuS04 solution then copper is displaced from its solution by iron but when copper rod is dipped in FeS04 solution. Why iron is not displaced by copper? Explain?
Answer:
Fe occupies higher position in electrochemical series than Cu. So, Fe is more active than Cu. That is why Fe displaces Cu from CuS04 solution, but Cu is not able to displace Fe from FeS04 solution.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions img 7

Question 14.
What is oxidation number?
Answer:
Oxidation number of an element is defined as, “The residual charge left on its atom when all the other atoms are removed from the molecule as ions.” Atoms can have positive, negative or zero oxidation state depending upon their state of combination. (MPBoardSolutions.com) In fact, oxidation number is the charge assigned to the atom in a species according to some rules. It is also known as oxidation state.

Question 15.
In electrochemical series, the activity of metals increases or decreases in which sequence?
Answer:
Species present in the right of electrochemical series are reducing agent. Smaller the value of E°, stronger is the reducing agent. The activity of metals decrease on going down the electrochemical series.

Question 16.
What is E° value be + ve shows in Galvanic cell?
Answer:
The positive value of E° shows:

  1. Oxidation occurs at anode and
  2. The electrode where reduction occurs can be taken as cathode.

Question 17.
What is electrode potential? Its value depends on what factors?
Answer:
The electrical potential difference setup between the metal and its solution is known as electrode potential.
The electrode potential depends upon:

  1. Concentration of ions in the solution
  2. Temperature.

MP Board Solutions

Question 18.
On the basis of standard electrode potential given below, arrange the metals in their increasing reducing power?
K+/ K = – 2.93V, Ag+/ Ag = 0.80V, Hg2+/ Hg = 0.79V, Mg2+/ Mg = -2.37V, Cr3+/ Cr = -0.74V?
Answer:
Less the value of E°, the reducing power increases of the metal. So the sequence is Ag < Hg < Cr < Mg < K.

Question 19.
Among MgO, ZnO, CuO and CaO which oxide will reduce by hydrogen?
Answer:
Mg, Zn and Ca are more reactive than H in electrochemical series. So they will not reduced by H. Cu is present below H, so the reactivity of Cu is less than H. So CuO will easily get reduced by H.

Question 20.
The electrode potential (E°) of Ag, Ba, Mg and Au are +0.80, -2.90, -2.37 and +1.42 volt. Among these metals which will displace H from acids and which will not?
Answer:
Those metals which have E° value negative they are more reactive than hydrogen and can easily displace H from weak acids. So, Ba and Mg can displace H from acid solution.

Question 21.
Can be put CuSO4 solution in silver container? Why?
Answer:
In electrochemical series Ag comes below Cu, so reactivity of Ag is less than Cu. There Ag will not displace Cu from CuSO4 solution. CuSO4 can be kept in Ag container.

Redox Reactions Short Answer Type Questions – II

Question 1.
Fluorine reacts with ice as follows:
H2O(s) → HF(g) + HOF(g)
Justify that, this reaction is a redox reaction.
Answer:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions img 8
Since, fluorine can undergo oxidation as well as reduction, it is an example of redox reaction.

Question 2.
In acidic medium MnO42- shows disproportionation reaction but MnO4 does not show why?
Answer:
In oxidation state of Mn in MnO4-2 is +6. It can increase oxidation state (+7) and decrease (+4, +3, +2, 0 etc.). So in acidic medium it shows disproportionation reaction.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions img 9
In MnO4, Mn has maximum oxidation state (+7). It can only decrease its oxidation state. Due to which it cannot show disproportionation reaction.

Question 3.
In the following reaction whose oxidation and whose reduction occur:
PbS + 4H2O2 → PbSO4 + 4H2O
Answer:
In this reaction PbS is oxidized as PbSO4 and H2O2 is reduced to form H2O.

MP Board Solutions

Question 4.
Differentiate between oxidation number and valency?
Answer:
Differences between Oxidation number and Valency:
Oxidation:

  1. It is the residual charge left on the atom of an element when all other atoms are removed from molecule or ion.
  2. It refers to charge and can be positive, negative or zero, e.g., oxidation number of C in CO2 is +4 and that of oxygen is -2.
  3. It may have fractional value.
  4. Elements like C, N, O have variable oxidation number.

Valency:

  1. It is the combining capacity of the element expressed as number of H – atom or double the number of oxygen atoms which combine with one atom of the element.
  2. It refers to number only and does not carry any sign, e.g., in CO2 valency of carbon is 4 and that of oxygen is 2.
  3. It is always a whole number.
  4. Elements like C, N, O exhibit constant valency.

Question 5.
Why fluorine doesn’t show disproportionation reaction?
Answer:
Like chlorine, bromine and iodine also undergo similar disproportionation reactions but fluorine does not. The reason for this anomalous behaviour is that fluorine being the strongest oxidizing agent does not show positive oxidation states. It, therefore, reacts in a different way forming oxygen difluoride (OF2).
2F2(g) + 2OH(g) → 2F(aq) + OF2(g) + H2O(l)

Question 6.
Show that galvanic cell where following reaction occurs:
Zn(s) + 2Ag+(aq) → Zn2+(aq) + 2 Ag(s)
Now explain :

  1. Which electrode is -ve?
  2. What is the motive of electricity in cell?
  3. What is the reaction occurring on each electrode?

Answer:
Galvanic cell Zn(s) ∥ Zn2+(aq)Ag(aq) ∥ Ag+(aq) ∥ Ag(s)

  1. Zn electrode is negatively charged. Zn is oxidized into Zn+2.
  2. Electricity flows from Ag electrode to Zn electrode and electrons flow from Zn to Ag electrode.
  3. Reactions on electrode:

Cathode — Zn(s) → Zn+2(s) + 2e
Anode — 2Ag+(aq) + 2e → 2Ag(s)

MP Board Solutions

Question 7.
Write the definition of electrochemical cell? Write the chemical reactions of Daniel cell?
Answer:
An electrochemical cell (Galvanic cell) is a device in which the redox reaction takes place indirectly and the decrease in free energy appears in the form of electrical work i.e. chemical energy is converted into electrical energy.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions img 10

Question 8.
Write the factors affecting electrode potential?
Answer:
The factors affecting electrode potential are:

  1. Tendency of metal to donate electrons: More the tendency to release electron more will be electrode potential.
  2. Temperature: With increasing temperature electrode potential increases.
  3. Concentration of solution: More the concentration of solution more will be electrode potential.

Question 9.
Determine the oxidation number of following:

  1. Cr in K2Cr2O7
  2. Mn in KMnO4
  3. S in Na2S4O6.

Solution:
1. Cr in K2Cr2O7
2 (+1) + 2x + 7 (-2) = 0
or 2 + 2x – 14 = 0
or 2x = 12
or x = +6.

2. Mn in KMnO4
1 (+1) + 1x + 4(-2) = 0
or 1 + x – 8 = 0
or x = +7.

3. S in Na2S4O6
2 (+1) + 4x + 6 (-2) = 0
or 2 + 4x – 12 = 0
or 4x = 10
or x = 2.5.

Question 10.
Why does the following reactions occur:
XeO6(aq)4- + 2F(aq) + 6H+(aq) → XeO3(g) + F2(g) + 3H2O(l)?
What conclusion about the compound Na4XeO6 (of which XeO64- is a part) K2MnF6 can be drawn from the reaction?
Answer:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions img 11
O.N. of Xe decreases from +8 to +6. This shows that XeO64- is an oxidizing agent. It oxidises F to F2. This reaction shows that Na2XeO6 (or XeO6) is a stronger oxidizing agent than F2.

Question 11.
Chlorine is used to purify drinking water. Excess of chlorine is harmful. The excess chlorine is removed by treating with sulphur dioxide. Present a balanced equation for this redox change taking place in water?
Answer:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions img 12
Multiplying Cl by 2 (As 2 atoms are in Cl2)
Cl2(aq) + SO2(aq) + H2O(l) → 2Cl(aq) + SO42-(aq)
On adding 4H+ in left side and multiplying in H2O by 2,
Cl2(aq) + SO2(aq) + 2H2O(l) → 2Cl(aq) + SO42- + 4H+
It is a balanced disproportionation reaction.

Question 12.
Differentiate between electrochemical cell and electrolytic cell?
Answer:
Differences between electrochemical cell and electrolytic cell:
Electrochemical (Galvanic) cell:

  1. In Galvanic cell, chemical energy is changed into electrical energy.
  2. Reaction in Galvanic cell is spontaneous.
  3. Oxidation and reduction occurs in different half cell.
  4. Anode is negative while cathode is positive terminal.
  5. The electrons move from anode to cathode in the external circuit.

Electrolytic cell:

  1. In electrolytic cell, electrical energy is changed into chemical energy.
  2. Reaction in electrolytic cell is non – spontaneous.
  3. Oxidation and reduction occurs in same container.
  4. Anode is positive while cathode is negative terminal.
  5. The electrons are supplied by the external circuit which enter through the cathode and came out through anode.

MP Board Solutions

Question 13.
What is Nernst equation? Derive relation between E and E°?
Answer:
In Standard cell, the concentration of the solution used is 1M and the temperature is maintained at 25°C (For 298K). But the Galvanic cells are often constructed under non standard condition. In such cases the cell voltage (or EMF) is calculated by Nernst equation as follows:
E = E° – \(\frac{RT}{nF}\) loge \(\frac { M_{ (s) } }{ M^{ n+ }_{ (aq) } } \)
or E = E° + \(\frac{RT}{nF}\) loge \(\frac { M^{ n+ }_{ (aq) } }{ M_{ (s) } } \)
In changing loge in log10
or E = E° + \(\frac{2.303}{nF}\) log10 \(\frac { M^{ n+ }_{ (aq) } }{ M_{ (s) } } \) [M(s) = 1]
or E = E° + \(\frac{2.303RT}{nF}\) log10[Mn+(aq)]
or E = E° + \(\frac{0.0591}{nF}\) log10 [Mn+(aq)].

Question 14.
Consider the reactions:
2S2O32-(aq) + I2(s) → S4O62-(aq) + 2I(aq)
S2O32-(aq) → 2SO42-(aq) + 4Br(aq) + 10H+(aq)
Why does the same reductant, thiosulphate reacts differently with iodine and bromine?
Answer:
Br2 is stronger oxidizing agent than I2, it oxidises SO32- to SO42- i. e. from +2 state to +6 state of sulphur. However, I2 being weaker oxidizing agent, oxidises S2O32- to S4O62- ion i.e. from + 2 to + 2.5 state of sulphur.

Redox Reactions Long Answer Type Questions – I

Question 1.
What is standard hydrogen electrode? How it is prepared?
Answer:
Standard hydrogen electrode: This consists of gas at 1 atmospheric pressure bubbling over a platinum electrode immersed in 1 M HCl at 25°C (298 K) as shown in figure. The platinum electrode is coated with platinum black to atmospheric increase its surface. (MPBoardSolutions.com) The hydrogen electrode thus Pressure constructed forms a half cell which on coupling with any other half cell begins to work on the principle of oxidation or reduction. Electrode depending upon the 1 M H+solution circumstances works both as anode or cathode.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions img 13
Cell reaction of standard hydrogen electrode platinum electrode (SHE) when it acts as anode is
H2(g) → 2H+ + 2e
It is represented as
H2(g)(1 atm) Pt | H3O+(aq)(1.0 M)
When it acts as cathode, the cell reaction is
2H+ + 2e → H2(aq)
and it is represented as
H3O+(aq) (1.0 M) | H2(g) (1 atm) Pt
Standard hydrogen electrode (SHE) is arbitarily assigned a potential of zero.

Question 2.
On the basis of electrode potential explain which reaction is feasible:
Cu2+/Cu = 0.34 V, E°Zn2+/Zn = -0.76 V, E°Mg2+/Mg = 2.37 V, E°Fe2+/Fe = -0.74V

  1. Cu + Zn2+ → Cu2+ + Zn
  2. Mg + Fe2+ → Mg2+ + Fe.

Solution:
1. Cu + Zn2+ → Cu2+ + Zn
Cu2+/Cu = 0.34 V and E°Zn2+/Zn = – 0.76 V
In given cell, Cu oxidised to Cu2+. So Cu2+/Cu will act as anode and Zn2+/Zn acts as cathode.
cell = E°cathode – E°anode
cell = – 0.74 – (-2.37) = +1.63V
cell = +Ve, shows that the reaction is feasible.

2. Mg + Fe2+ → Mg2+ + Fe
Mg2+/Mg = 2.37 V and E°Cu2+/Cu = – 0.74 V
Mg oxidised to Mg2+ and acts as anode Mg2+/Mg.
Fe2+ reduced to Fe and acts as cathode Fe2+/Fe.
cell = E°cathode – E°anode
cell = – 0.74 – (-2.37) = +1.63 V

MP Board Solutions

Question 3.
While sulphur dioxide and hydrogen peroxide can act as oxidizing as well as reducing agents in their reactions, ozone and nitric acid act only as oxidants, why?
Answer:
In sulphur dioxide (SO2) and hydrogen peroxide (H2O2), the oxidation states of sulphur and oxygen are +4 and -1 respectively. Since, they can increase as well as decrease when there compounds take part in chemical reaction, they can act as oxidizing as well as reducing agents. For example,
Increase in O.N.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions img 14
In ozone (O3), the oxidation state of oxygen is zero while in nitric acid (HNO3), the oxidation state of nitrogen is +5. Since, both of them can undergo decrease in oxidation state and not an increase in its value, they can act only as oxidizing agents and not as reducing agents.

In ozone (O3), the oxidation state of oxygen is zero while in nitric acid (HNO3), the oxidation state of nitrogen is + 5. Since both them can undergo decrease in oxidation state and not an increase in its value, they can act only as oxidizing agents and not as reducing agents.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions img 15

Question 4.
How do you count for the following observation though alkaline potassium permanganate and acidic potassium permanganate both are used as oxidants, yet in manufacture of benzoic acid from toluene we use alcoholic potassium permanganate as an oxidant, why? Write a balanced redox equation for the reaction?
Answer:
Toluene can be oxidized to benzoic acid in acidic, alkaline and neutral medium by using potassium permanganate.

1. In acidic medium:
[MnO4(aq) + 8H+(aq) + 5e → Mn2+(aq) + 4H2O(l)] × 6
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions img 16
In the manufacture of benzoic acid alcoholic KMnO4 is more useful.
Alcohol if used as solvent will help in the formation of a homogeneous mixture between toluene (non – polar) and KMnO4 (ionic). Actually alcohol has non – polar alkyl group as well as polar OH group.

Question 5.
How the redox reactions are balanced by ion – electron method?
Answer:
The redox reactions are balanced by ion – electron method are as follows:
1. Indicate oxidation number of each element and identify the elements which undergoes change in oxidation number.

2. Indicate increase and decrease in oxidation number per atom. Multiply the increase or decrease in oxidation number with number of atoms undergoing the change.

3. Multiply the formula with suitable integer to equalise the increase and decrease in oxidation number.

4. Balance O atoms:
K2Cr2O7 + 6HCl + xHCl → 2KCl + 2CrCl3 + yCl2 + H2O + 6H2O

5. Balance H atoms:
K2Cr2O7 + 6HCl + 8 HCl → 2KCl + 2CrCl3 + 3Cl2 + 7H2O
Here x = 8 and y = 3 to balance Cl atoms
K2Cr22-O7 + 14 HCl → 2KCl + 2rCl3 + 3Cl2 + 7H2O.
Example 2. Cr2O72- + Fe2+ + H+ → Cr3+ + Fe3+ + H2O.
Solution:
Step 1. (Cr2O7)2- + Fe2+ + H+ → Cr3+ + Fe3+ + H2O.

Step 2.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions img 17

Step 3.
Multiply Fe by 6 to equalise increase or decrease in O.N.
Cr2O72- + 6Fe2+ + H+ → Cr3+ + Fe3+ + H2O

Step 4.
Balance atoms other than O and H
Cr2O72- + 6Fe2+ + H+ → 2Cr3+ + 6Fe3+ + H2O

Step 5.
Balance O atoms
Cr2O72- + 6Fe2+ + H+ → 2Cr3+ + 6Fe3+ + H2O + 6H2O

Step 6.
Balance H atoms
Cr2O72- + 6Fe2+ + 14H+ → 2Cr3+ + 6Fe3+ + 7H2O.

Question 6.
On the basis of electrode potential values given below? Determine reaction between reactants will occur or not?
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions img 18
Answer:
For feasibility of any reaction E° = +ve.
cell = E°cathode – E°anode
(a) Fe3+(aq) and I(aq):
2Fe3+ + 2I(aq) → 2Fe2+(aq) + 2I2g
Half cell reaction (oxidation)
2I(aq) → I2(g) + 2e E° = – 0.54 V
Reducion half cell,
2Fe3+(aq) + 2e → 2Fe2+(aq) E° = +0.77 V
Complete reaction,
2Fe3+(aq) + 2I(aq) → 2Fe2+(aq) + I2(g)cell = +0.23 V
E° = +ve, reaction is feasible.

(b) Ag+(aq) and Cu(s)2+:
2Ag(aq) + Cu(s) → Cu2+(aq) + 2Ag(aq)
Oxidation half reaction,
Cu(s) → Cu2+(aq) + 2e E° = – 0.34 V
Reduction half reaction,
2Ag+(aq) + 2e → 2Ag(s) E° = – 0.80 V
Complete reaction,
Cu(s) + 2Ag+(aq) → Cu2+(aq) + 2Ag(s)cell = +0.46 V

MP Board Solutions

Question 7.
Give the main characteristics of electrochemical series?
Answer:
The main characteristics of electrochemical series are:

  1. Tendency to loose electron becomes greater and the corresponding element or ion behaves as strong reducing agent if it has greater negative value of E°.
  2. The substances above hydrogen are weak oxidising agents and substances below it are strong oxidising agents.
  3. If the reducing agent of electrode pair is strong reducing agent, its oxidising agent is weak and when reducing agent of electrode pair is weak, its oxidising agent is strong.
  4. In series the reducing efficiency decreases from above to downwards.
  5. The more the positive value of E°(MPBoardSolutions.com) the stronger is its oxidising properties. In the series the oxidising power of cation decreases as we move upwards from downwards.
  6. In series the electropositive character of metals decreases from upwards to downwards.
  7. Along the series the electronegative character of non – metal increases from upward to downwards.
  8. The metals which come prior to hydrogen displaces hydrogen from acids,
  9. The metals which occupy higher position in the series displaces metals which come later in series from their salt solution.

Question 8.
Balance the equation by oxidation number method and identify the oxidising agent and reducing agent?
Cl2O7(g) → ClO2(aq) + O2(g).
Answer:
Oxidation number method:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions img 19
Balance the increase and decrease in O.N. multiply H2O2 by 4,
Cl2O7 + 4H2O2 → ClO2 + O2
Balance atom other,
Cl2O7(g) + 4H2O2(aq) → 2ClO2(aq) + 4O2(g)
Balance ‘H’,
Cl2O7(g) + 4H2O2(aq) + 2OH(aq) → 2ClO2(aq) + 4O2(g) + 5H2O.

Question 9.
Whenever a reaction between an oxidizing agent and a reducing agent is carried out compound of lower oxidation state is formed if the reducing agent is ¡n excess and compound of higher oxidation state is formed if the oxidising agent is in excess. Justify this statement by giving three illustrations?
Answer:
1. Let us consider the reaction between carbon and oxygen.
Reducing agent + Oxidising agent
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions img 20

2. Let us consider the reaction between white phosphorous (P4) and Cl2(g)
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions img 21

3. Let us consider the reaction between sulphur and oxygen.
Reducing agent + Oxidising agent
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions img 22

Redox Reactions Long Answer Type Questions – II

Question 1.
Balance the following reaction by ion – electron method:
Cr2O72- + Fe2+ + H+ → Cr+3 + Fe+3.
Solution:
Cr2O72- + Fe2+ → Cr+3 + Fe+3 + H2O

1. Write the oxidation number of each atom in skeleton equation.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions img 23
Species undergo change is Cr and Fe.

2. Dividing the equation into two half reaction.
Cr2O72- → Cr+3 (Reduction half)
Fe+2 → Fe+3 (Oxidation half)

3. Balancing reduction half:
(a) Balancing Cr atom,
Cr2O72- → 2Cr+3

(b) Adding e to make up the difference in O.N.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions img 25
(Since each Cr atom gain 3e ∴ for 2 Cr atom 6e)

(iv) Balancing oxidation half:
(a) Balancing Fe atom (Balanced)
(b) Adding e to make up the difference in O.N.
Fe+2 → Fe+3 + e

(v) Balancing ‘O’ atom,
Cr2O72- + 6e → 2Cr+3 + 7H2O
Fe+2 → Fe+3 + e

(vi) Balancing H by adding H+ ions to the side which is deficient on H atoms.
Cr2O72- + 6e + 14H+ → 2Cr+3 + 7H2O
Fe2+ → Fe+3 + e

(vii) Equalising e,
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions img 27

Question 2.
To determine the oxidising power/reducing power in a solution which method is used? Explain with example?
Answer:
Determination of standard electrode potential ; To determine electrode potential of an electrode, a cell is setup using this electrode and standard hydrogen electrode. The EMF of the cell is measured with the help of a voltameter (or more accurately by potentiometer). (MPBoardSolutions.com) The electrode potential of hydrogen electrode is taken as zero. Therefore, the E.M.F. of such a cell will directly give the value for electrode potential for the given electrode at standard condition (298 K, 1M, 1 atm pressure).

1. If the deflection in galvanometer is towards metal electrode (experimental electrode) then it is anode (-ve terminal) of the cell. It is allotted negative value of standard reduction electrode potential.
For example, in the determination of E° value of zinc, zinc acts as anode and has got negative value of E°.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions img 28
cell = E°cathode – E°anode
∴ 0.76 V = 0.00V – E°zn+2/Zn = -0.76V

Question 3.
What is oxidation number? Write its main rules of determination?
Answer:
Oxidation number of an element is defined as, “The residual charge left on its atom when all the other atoms are removed from the molecule as ions”. Atoms can have positive, negative or zero oxidation state depending upon their state of combination. (MPBoardSolutions.com) In fact, oxidation number is the charge assigned to the atom in a species according to some rules. It is also known as oxidation state.

Rules for assigning oxidation number:
The assignment of oxidation numbers is arbitrary and is usually governed by the following conclusions:

1. The oxidation number of an element in free state i. e., elementary state is regarded as zero. For example,
Oxidation state of hydrogen in H2 = 0
Oxidation state of helium in He = 0
Oxidation state of sulphur in S8 = 0
Oxidation state of sodium in Na = 0
Oxidation state of magnesium in Mg = 0

2. In a compound, the more electronegative elements are assigned negative (-) oxidation state and less electronegative elements are assigned positive (+) values. For example, in HCl as chlorine is more electronegative than hydrogen its oxidation state will have negative value while that of hydrogen will be positive.

3. In the formula of a compound, the sum of the negative oxidation states is equal to the sum of the positive oxidation states.

4. The sum of oxidation number of all the atoms in a neutral molecule is taken as zero.

5. Hydrogen has an oxidation state +1 in compounds like H2S, H2O, HCl, etc. Exceptionally it has the oxidation number -1 in metallic hydrides, such as NaH, CaH2, etc.

6. Oxygen is usually assigned oxidation number -2, except in H2O2 and in oxide of fluorine [F2O], in which the oxidation number -1 and +2 respectively. In all, oxidation number of oxygen is -1.

7. Fluorine being the most electronegative element is assigned oxidation number -1 in all its compounds. Other halogens also show -1 oxidation number.

8. The number of monoatomic ion in an ionic compound is equal to its electric charge. Thus, the elements of group IA of the periodic table (Li, Na, K, Rb, Cs) all have oxidation number + 1, while the alkaline earth metals of group IIA (Ca, Sr, Ba) have oxidation number + 2.

MP Board Solutions

Question 4.
Balance the following reaction by ion – electron method?
Answer:
Ion – electron method:
Oxidation half equation is:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions img 29
The oxidation number is balanced by adding 2 electrons as:
H2O2(aq) → O2(g) + 2e
The charge is balanced by adding 2OH ions as:
H2O2(aq) + 2OH(aq) → O2(g) + 2e
The oxygen atoms are balanced by adding 2H2O as:
H2O2(aq) + 20H(aq) → O2(g) + 2H2O(s) + 2e ……………… (1)
The reduction half equation is:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions img 30
The Cl atoms are balanced as:
Cl2O7(g) → 2ClO2(aq)
The oxidation number is balanced by adding 8 electrons as:
Cl2O7(g) + 8e → 2ClO2(aq)
The charge is balanced by adding 6OH as:
Cl2O7(g) + 8e → 2ClO2(aq) + 6OH(aq) ………………………… (2)
The balancing equation can be obtained by multiplying equation (1) with 4 and adding equation (2) to it as:
Cl2O7(g) + 4H2O2(aq) + 2OH(aq) → 2ClO2(aq) + 4O2(g) + 5H2O(l)

Question 5.
Write the main uses of electrochemical series?
Answer:
Electrochemical series:
When different elements and ions are arranged in increasing order of their standard electrode potentials, a series is obtained which is called electrochemical series or activity series.
The uses of electrochemical series are:
1. Electropositive character of metal:
Metal which loses electron easily from its outermost shell shows high electropositive character while the atom which loses electron with difficulty shows least electropositive character. In electrochemical series, Li shows maximum electropositive character while fluorine shows least electropositive character.

2. Comparison of reactivity of metals:
Metal having negative value of E° loses electron easily. Hence, greater the negative value of E° more is the reactivity and reducing character of a metal.

3. Knowledge of oxidizing agent and reducing agent:
Substance which gains electron and shows maximum value of standard electrode potential E° is strongest oxidizing agent. On the basis of this F is strongest oxidizing agent while Li is weakest oxidizing agent.

4. Displacement of elements:
Metal having greater tendency to form ion displaces others. Therefore, elements getting priority in the series displace ions of the elements following them. For example. When Cu turnings are added to AgNO3 solution, Ag gets precipitated.
2AgNO3(aq) + Cu(s) → Cu(NO3)2(aq) + 2Ag(s)

5. Electroplating:
Process of depositing layer of gold or silver on copper, brass, iron etc. is called electroplating. It makes articles lustrous and attractive.

6. Metallurgy:
More reactive metal displaces less reactive metal from their aqueous salt solution.

7. Corrosion of metals:
Destruction of metals due to action of chemicals, air and moisture is called corrosion.
e.g., iron rust in moist air. To prevent this a layer of more reactive metal like Sn or Zn is deposited on iron. Coating iron with zinc is called galvanization.

MP Board Solutions

Question 6.
What information did you get from the following reaction:
(CN)2(g) + 20H(aq) → CN(aq) + CNO(aq) + H2O(l)
Answer:
(CN)2(g) + 2OH(aq) → CNO(aq) + H2O(l).
1. Let the O.N. of C in (CN)2 = x
2x + 2 (-3) = 0
or x = +3.

2. Let the O.N. of C in CN = x
x + (-3) = -1
or x = +2.

3. Let the O.N. of C in CNO = x
x + (-3) + (-2) = -1 or
x = +4.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 8 Redox Reactions img 31
Following informations obtained from above equation:

  1. It is a disproportionation reaction.
  2. The reaction occurs in basic medium.
  3. O.N. of N in (CN)2 is -3 and that in CN is -2 and in CNO it is -5.
  4. Cyanogen (CN)2 gets simultaneously reduced to CN ion as well as oxidized to cyanate, CNO ion.

Question 7.
The Mn3+ ion is unstable in solution and undergoes disproportionation to give Mn2+, MnO2 and H+ ion. Write a balanced ionic equation for the reaction?
Answer:
The reaction is:
Mn3+(aq) → Mn2+(aq) + MnO2(s) + H+(aq)
Reduction half cell:
Mn3+(aq) + e → Mn2+ …………. (1)
Oxidation half cell:
Mn3+(aq) → Mn+4 + O2(s) + e
To balance the equation added 4H+ in right and in left 2H2O is added:
Mn3+(aq) + 2H2O(l) → MnO2(s) + e + 4H+(aq) ……………….. (2)
Adding eqns. (1) and (2),
2Mn3+(aq) + 2H2O(l) → Mn2+ + MnO2(s) + 4H+(aq)
This is last equation balanced (disproportionation reaction).

MP Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions

MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Equilibrium

MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Equilibrium

Equilibrium Important Questions

Equilibrium Objective Type Questions

Question 1.
Choose the correct answer:

Question 1.
Which of the following reaction have equal Kc and Kp:
(a) N2(g) + 3H2(g) ⇄ 2NH3
(b) 2H2S(g) + 3O2(g) ⇄ 2SO2(g) + 2H2O(g)
(c) Br2 + Cl2(g) ⇄ 2BrCl(g)
(d) P4(g) + 6Cl2(g) ⇄ 4PCl3(g)
Answer:
(c) Br2 + Cl2(g) ⇄ 2BrCl(g)

Question 2.
For the reaction N2(g) + 3H2(g) ⇄ 2NH3(g), ∆H = 92 kJ, the concentration of NH3 at the equilibrium increase by temperature:
(a) Increase
(b) No change
(c) Decrease
(d) None of the above
Answer:
(c) Decrease

Question 3.
In one litre container equilibrium mixture of reaction 2H2S(g) ⇄ 2H2S(g) + S2S(g) is filled 6.5 mol H2S. 0.1 mol H2 and 0.4 mol S2 are present in it. Equilibrium constant of this reaction will be:
(a) 0.004 mol litre-1
(b) 0.080 mol litre-1
(c) 0.016 mol litre-1
(d) 0.160 mol litre-1
Answer:
(c) 0.016 mol litre-1

MP Board Solutions

Question 4.
Favourable condition for exothermic reaction of ammonia synthesis N2S(g) + 3H2S(g) ⇄ 2NH3(g) are:
(a) High temperature and high pressure
(b) High temperature and low pressure
(c) Low temperature and high pressure
(d) Low temperature and pressure
Answer:
(c) Low temperature and high pressure

Question 5.
Oxidation of SO2 by O2 in SO3 is an exothermic reaction manufacture of SO3 will be maximum if:
(a) Temperature increased and pressure decreased
(b) Temperature decreased and pressure increased
(c) Temperature and pressure both increased
(d) Temperature and pressure both decreased.
Answer:
(b) Temperature decreased and pressure increased

Question 6.
At 440°C HI was heated in a closed vessel till equilibrium is attained. It is dissociated 22%. Equilibrium constant dissociation will be:
(a) 0.282
(b) 0.0796
(c) 6.0199
(d) 1.99
Answer:
(c) 6.0199

Question 7.
Kp and Kc can be expressed as:
(a) Kc = Kp (RT)∆n
(b) Kp = Kc (RT)Q∆n
(c) Kp = Kc(RT)∆n
(d) Kc = Kp (RT)∆n
Answer:
(c) Kp = Kc(RT)∆n

MP Board Solutions

Question 8.
The equilibrium constant of the reaction H2(g) + I2(g) ⇄ 2HI2(g), is 64. If the volume of the container is reduced to one – fourth of its original volume. The value of the equilibrium constant will be:
(a) 16
(b) 32
(c) 64
(d) 128
Answer:
(c) 64

Question 9.
What would happen to a reversible reaction at equilibrium when an inert gas is added while the presence remain unchanged:
(a) More of the product will be formed
(b) Less of the product will be formed
(c) More of the reactant will be formed
(d) It remains unchanged
Answer:
(d) It remains unchanged.

Question 10.
SO2(g) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) O2(g) ⇄ SO3(g), K1
2SO3(g) ⇄ 2SO2(g) + O2(g), K2 which of the following is correct:
(a) K2 = K12
(b) K2 = K1-2
(C) K2 = K1
(d) K2 = K1-1
Answer:
(b) K2 = K1-2

Question 11.
Which reaction is not affected by change in pressure:
(a) N2(g) + O2(g) ⇄ 2NO(g)
(b) 2O3(g) ⇄ 3O2(g)
(c) 2NO2(g) ⇄ N2O4(g)
(d) 2SO2(g) + O2(g) ⇄ 2SO3(g)
Answer:
(a) N2(g) + O2(g) ⇄ 2NO(g)

Question 12.
For N2 + 3H2 ⇄ 2NH3 + heat:
(a) Kp = Kc
(b) Kp = KcRT
(c) Kp = Kc (RT)-2
(d) Kp = Kc(RT)-1
Answer:
(c) Kp = Kc (RT)-2

Question 13.
Sodium sulphate dissolve in water with the release of heat. Imagine a saturated solution of sodium sulphate. If temperature is increased then according to Le – Chatelier principle:
(a) Mass of solid will be dissolved
(b) Some solid will be precipitated in solution
(c) Solution will be more saturated
(d) Concentration of solution will be unchangeble.
Answer:
(b) Some solid will be precipitated in solution

MP Board Solutions

Question 14.
For reaction, PCl3(g) + Cl2(g) ⇄ PCl5(g) value of Kc at 250° is 26 value of Kp at this temperature will be:
(a) 0.61
(b) 0.57
(c) 0.83
(d) 0.46
Answer:
(a) 0.61

Question 15.
According to Le – Chatelier principle when heat is given on solid – liquid equilibrium then:
(a) Amount of solid decreases
(b) Amount of liquid decreases
(c) Temperature increases
(d) Temperature decreases
Answer:
(a) Amount of solid decreases

Question 2.
Fill in the blanks:

  1. For an endothermic process, PCl5 ⇄ PCl3+ Cl2; ∆H = + Q cal. Hence, in this reaction, temperature should be kept ………………………. and pressure ………………………. (If reaction is to be carried out in forward direction)
  2. Ice ⇄ Water – Q cal. High temperature in this reaction favours …………………………. direction while increase in pressure favour reaction in ………………………… direction.
  3. According to Ostwald’s dilution law, mathematical relation between degree of dissociation and dissociation constant is expressed by ……………………….. Degree of dissociation of weak electrolyte is inversely proportional to its …………………………..
  4. Relation between solubility and solubility product for the reaction AB ⇄ A+ + B is expressed as ……………………….
  5. For the maximum yield of SO3 in the reaction 2SO2 + O2 → 2SO3, ……………………… temperature and pressure is required.
  6. Mixture of acetic acid and sodium acetate is an example of ……………………….. solution
  7. Mixture of ammonium hydroxide and ammonium chloride is an example of ……………………… solution
  8. Degree of dissociation of a weak electrolyte is inversely proportional to ………………………… of concentration.
  9. Ostwald dilution law is not applicable for ……………………..
  10. Heneiy’s law is related to solubility of in …………………………. solution
  11. Relation between Kp and Kc at constant temperature for reaction is ………………………

Answer:

  1. High, low
  2. Forward, forward
  3. α = \(\sqrt { \frac { K }{ C } } \), square root of concentration
  4. Ksp = [A+] [B]
  5. Low temperature, high pressure
  6. Acidic buffer
  7. Basic buffer
  8. Square root
  9. Strong electrolyte
  10. Gas
  11. Kp = Kc × RT∆n.

MP Board Solutions

Question 3.
Answer in one word/sentence:

  1. What is the value of Kp and Kc for the given reaction:
    • PCl5 ⇄ PCl3 + Cl2
    • H2 + I2 ⇄ 2HI
  2. For the unit of Kc, concentration is expressed in?
  3. Manufacture of nitrogen peroxide is exothermic. What should be temperature and pressure for maximum yield?
  4. Ammonia gas dissolves in water giving NH4OH. How is water reacting in it?
  5. When NH4Cl is added to NH4OH solution, dissociation of NH4OH decreases, why?
  6. pH of water at 298K?
  7. What is hydrogen ion concentration in pure water?
  8. pH of water at 25°C is 7. If water is heated to 50°C, what change in its pH will occur?
  9. Write conjugate base of H2PO4 and HCO3?
  10. Name one ion which behaves as both Bronsted acid and base?

Answer:

    • Kp > Kc
    • Kp = Kc
  1. mol/litre
  2. Low temperature and high pressure
  3. Like acid
  4. Common ion effect
  5. 7
  6. 1 × 10-7
  7. pH value decreases,
  8. HPO42- CO32-
  9. HCO3

Question 4.
Match the following:
[I]
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Equilibrium img 1
Answer:

  1. (d)
  2. (e)
  3. (b)
  4. (a)
  5. (c)
  6. (f)

[II]

MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Equilibrium img 2
Answer:

  1. (d)
  2. (c)
  3. (a)
  4. (e)
  5. (b)

Equilibrium Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
For unit of Kc the concentration is expressed as?
Answer:
mol/litre.

Question 2.
Ammonia when dissolve in water give NH4OH, here the water acts as?
Answer:
Like acid.

Question 3.
When NH4Cl is mixed with NH4OH solution, then the ionisation of NH4OH decreases. What is the reason?
Answer:
Due to Common ion effect.

Question 4.
The pH of water at 25°C pH = 7. If water is heated upto 50°C, then what will be the change in pH?
Answer:
The value of pH decreases.

MP Board Solutions

Question 5.
Write the conjugate base of H2PO4 and HC03?
Answer:
HPO42- and CO32-.

Question 6.
Write the name of an ion which acts as both Bronsted acid and base?
Answer:
HCO3.

Question 7.
Give an example of a salt formed by weak acid and weak base?
Answer:
Ammonium acetate.

Question 8.
What is the pH value of human blood?
Answer:
7.4.

Question 9.
What will happen when HCl gas is passed through NaCl?
Answer:
NaCl will precipitate.

Question 10.
Among conjugate bases CN and F, which is stronger base?
Answer:
CN is stronger base.

MP Board Solutions

Question 11.
What is the change in free energy (∆G) of reversible process at equilibrium?
Answer:
Zero (0).

Question 12.
What is solubility product?
Answer:
The product of the concentration of ions in the saturated solution of a sparingly soluble salt is a constant at a given temperature and is called solubility’ product.

Question 13.
What is buffer solution?
Answer:
The solution in which on adding acid or base in iess quantity, the pH change is negligible, is called buffer solution.

Question 14.
In the exothermic reaction of ammonia formation N2(g) + 3H2(g) ⇄ 2NH3(g), when be the formation of ammonia will be more?
Answer:
At low temperature and high pressure the formation of anunorua is more.

Question 15.
Give an example of acidic buffer?
Answer:
Mixture of acetic acid and sodium acetate.

MP Board Solutions

Question 16.
What is the condition for precipitation?
Answer:
For this ionic product should he more than solubility product.

Question 17.
What is the nature of aqueous solution of KCN?
Answer:
It is of basic nature.

Question 18.
What is the nature of aqueous solution of CH3COONH4?
Answer:
It is of neutral nature.

Question 19.
What will be the relation between Kc and Kp for the reaction
PCl5 ⇄ PCl3 + Cl2
Answer:
Kp > Kc.

Question 20.
What is Lewis concept?
Answer:
Acid is an electron pair acceptor and base is an electron pair donor.

MP Board Solutions

Question 21.
What is the definition of acid and base according to Bronsted and Lowry concept?
Answer:
Acid is that which furnishes proton and base accepts the proton.

Question 22.
What is pH?
Answer:
The pH value of a solution is the numerical value of the negative power to which 10 should be raised in order to express the Hydrogen ion concentration of the solution i.e. [H+] = 10-pH or pH = – log [H+].

Question 23.
The Ostwald dilution law applied on which electrolyte?
Answer:
On weak electrolytes.

Equilibrium Short Answer Type Questions – I

Question 1.
Explain the effects of catalyst at equilibrium?
Answer:
Effect of catalyst:
Le – Chatelier’s principle ignores the presence of a catalyst since the catalyst cannot displaces the equilibrium and simply reduce the time required for attaining the equilibrium when a catalyst is added to a reversible reaction in equilibrium. (MPBoardSolutions.com) It increases the speed of both forward and backward reaction i.e. rf and rb to the same extent. However the addition of a catalyst reduces the time required for a reaction to attain the equilibrium.

Question 2.
Explain Ostwald’s law of dilution?
Answer:
Ostwald’s time dilution law:
Ostwald gave law for weak elecrolytes. By applying law of mass action Ostwald gave a law for expressing the dissociation of weak electrolyte. It states that:
“The degree of dissociation of weak electrolyte is directly proportional to the square root of its dilution.”
α = \(\sqrt { KV } \) = \(\sqrt { \frac { K }{ C } } \)
Where, α = Degree of dissociation, K = Dissociation constant, V = Volume in litre in which one gram equivalent is dissolved, C = No. of gram equivalent in one litre.

Question 3.
What is the effect of pressure on chemical equilibrium?
Answer:
On increasing the pressure on chemical equilibrium, the equilibrium shifts in that direction where the volume decreases i.e., the number of moles decreases.
Example: On combining of SO2 and O2, SO3 is formed and 45.2 kcal energy is liberated.
2SO2(g) + O2(g) ⇄ 2SO3(g); ∆H = -45.2 kcal
In this reaction, 2 moles of SO2 react with 1 mole of O2 to form 2 moles of SO3. So, on increasing the pressure the reaction shifts toward forward direction.

MP Board Solutions

Question 4.
What do you mean by buffer solution?
Answer:
Buffer solution: Solution in which,

  1. pH value is definite.
  2. pH is not changed on dilution or on keeping for sometime.
  3. On adding acid or base in less quantity, pH change is negligible.

Such solutions are called buffer solutions.
Or
Buffer solutions are solutions which retain their pH constant or unaltered.

Question 5.
What are acidic buffer and basic buffer?
Answer:
1. Acidic buffers:
Acidic buffers are formed by mixing an equimolar quantities of weak acid and its salt with a strong base.
Example: Acetic acid and sodium acetate, boric acid and borax, citric acid and so-dium citrate, etc.

2. Basic buffers:
Basic buffers contain equimolar quantities of weak base and its salt with strong acid.
Example: Ammonium hydroxide and ammonium chloride.

Question 6.
On the basis ofthe equation pH = – log[H+], the pH of the 10-8mol dm-3 HCl solution should be pH = 8. But the observed value is less than 7. Explain the reason?
Answer:
The 10-8moldm-3HCl shows that the solution is very dilute. So, we cannot neglect the H3O+ ions formed from water in the solution. So, the total [H3O+ ] = (10 -8 + 10-7) M comes to be near 7 or less than 7 i.e., the pH is less than 7. (As the solution is acidic).

Question 7.
Ammonia is a Lewis base. Why?
Answer:
According to Lewis base, a base, is a substance (molecule or ion) which can donate an electron pair to form a co – ordinate. In the structure of ammonia, nitrogen is present in one lone pair of electron. So, ammonia donate a lone pair electron.
For example:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Equilibrium img 3

Question 8.
Write the uses of Buffer solution?
Answer:
Uses of Buffer solution:

  1. To keep the pH of the reaction constant during the determination of velocity of chemical reactions.
  2. The pH should be between pH – 5 to 6 – 8 in the formation of alcohol by fermentation.
  3. Preparation of sugar, paper and electroplating occurs at definite pH.

MP Board Solutions

Question 9.
What is the effect of pressure and temperature on solubility of gases in liquids?
Answer:
1. Effect of Pressure:
On increasing the pressure the solubility of gases increases as the molecules of gases enters in the intermoiecular spaces of solvent.

2. Effect of Temperature:
On increasing the temperature the solubility of gases decreases as the kinetic energy of gas molecules increases.

Question 10.
Write the name of the factors affecting the chemical equilibrium?
Answer:
The factors affecting the chemical equilibrium are:

  1. Temperature
  2. Pressure
  3. Change in concentration
  4. Catalyst.

Question 11.
Why the solubility of C02 decreases on Increasing the temperature?
Answer:
CO2(g) + aq ⇄ CO2(eq)
The solubility of CO2 in water is an exothermic reaction. So, according to Le – Chatelier’s principle, on increasing temperature the reaction proceeds towards backward direction. That is why on increasing temperature the solubility of CO2 decreases.

Question 12.
What do you understand by ionization of water?
Answer:
Auto ionisation occurs in water molecules. The ionic equilibrium of water can be shown by following equation:
H2O + H2O ⇄ H3OH+ + OH
Equilibrium constant K = \(\frac { [H_{ 3 }O^{ + }][OH^{ – }] }{ [H_{ 2 }O]^{ 2 } } \)
⇒ KH2O = [H3O+][OH] [∵ KH2O = Kw]
Kw = 1 × 10-14
Here Kw is a constant, called ionic product of water.

Question 13.
What is concentration Quotient?
Answer:
The ratio of concentration of products and reactants is called concentration quotient. It is denoted by Q. For any reversible reaction the concentration quotient is equal to the equilibrium constant Kc.
Kc = \(\frac { [C]^{ c }[D]^{ d } }{ [A]^{ d }[B]^{ b } } \)
and Q = \(\frac { [C_{ C }]^{ c }[C_{ D }]^{ d } }{ [C_{ A }]^{ d }[C_{ B }]^{ b } } \)
At equilibrium Q = Kc.

MP Board Solutions

Question 14.
What do you understand by Lewis acid and Lewis base? Explain with example?
Answer:
Lewis acid:
Acid is a substance (an atom, molecule or ion) which can accept a pair of electrons to complete its octet.
Example: BF3, AlCl3, Br+, NO2+ etc.

Lewis base:
Lewis base is a substance (an atom, molecule or ion) which have complete octet of the central metal atom and have a lone pair of electron to donate in a chemical reaction to form co – ordinate bond.
Example:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Equilibrium img 4

Question 15.
At 310 K, ionic product of water is 2.7 × 10-14. at this temperature determine the pH of neutral water?
Solution:
Kw = [H3O+].[OH] = 2.7 × 10-14 (At 310 K)
For reaction H2O + H2O ⇄ [H3O+] [OH]
[H3O+] = [OH]
So, [H3O+] = \(\sqrt { 2.7\times 10^{ -14 } } \) = 1.643 × 10-7M
pH = -log [H3O+] = -log 1.643 × 10-7
= 7 + (- 0.2156) = 6.7844.

Question 16.
Determine the concentration quotient for following reactions:

  1. CrO4-2(eq) + Pb(eq) ⇄ PbCrO4(s)
  2. CaC03(s) ⇄ CaO(s) + CO2(g)
  3. NH3(eq) + H2O(l) ⇄ NH4+(eq) + OH(eq)
  4. H2O(l) ⇄ H2O(g)

Answer:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Equilibrium img 5

Question 17.
What is the importance of solubility product in precipitation of soap?
Answer:
Soap is produced on alkaline hydrolysis of oil and fats. Soaps are actually sodium or potassium salts of higher fatty acids. (MPBoardSolutions.com) Soap is obtained in the form of concentrated liquid. Concentrated salt solution is added for its precipitation. In presence of increased concentration of common sodium ion, ionic product of [Na+] [Cn H2n+1 COO] exceeds its solubility product (Ksp) and it gets precipitated. It is separated by filtration.

Equilibrium Short Answer Type Questions – II

Question 1.
By comparing the values of Kc and how will you find out the following state of the reaction:

  1. Resultant reaction proceeds towards forward direction.
  2. Resultant reaction proceeds towards backward direction.
  3. No change in the reaction.

Answer:

  1. If Qc < Kc; reaction proceeds towards the direction by products (Forward reaction).
  2. If Qc > Kc; reaction proceeds towards reactant side (Backward reaction).
  3. If Qc = Kc; at equilibrium, the reaction mixture remains as before. So no change in the reaction.

MP Board Solutions

Question 2.
The aqueous solution of sodium carbonate is basic in nature, why?
Answer:
Na2CO3 ⇄ 2Na+ + CO3-2
2H – OH ⇄ = 2H+ + 2OH
Na2CO3 + 2H – OH ⇄ 2NaOH + H2CO3
Neither solid Na2CO3 nor water alone has any action on litmus paper. However aqueous solution of Na2CO3 turned red litmus blue. The problem is successfully explained by the Arrhenius theory of ionization in terms of hydrolysis, when a salt is dissolved in water, it undergoes ionization. (MPBoardSolutions.com) The ions of salt interact with opposite ion of water to form acidic basic or neutral solution. This process is called hydrolysis may be defined as the interaction of ion of a salt with oppositely charged ion of water to give acidic or basic solution. Consider the hydrolysis of a general salt (AB).
Dissociation of salt
AB +Water → A+ + B
Dissociation of water
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Equilibrium img 6

Question 3.
What is the effect on equilibrium when gases are dissolved in liquids? Explain with example?
Answer:
When the soda water bottle is opened, dissolved CO2 gas in it comes out rapidly. This is an example of equilibrium of any gas in equilibrium between gas and its liquid. At finite pressure of the gas there exists an equilibrium between soluble and insoluble molecules of the gas.
CO2(g) ⇄ CO2(eq)
Henry’s law: The solubility of gas in a given solvent is directly proportional to the pressure to which the gas is subjected, provided the temperature remains the same.
Thus, m ∝ P
or m = KP
Where, K is a constant of proportionality and known as Henry’s constant.
Example: You have seen that when a soda water bottle is opened, the carbon dioxide dissolved in it freezes out rapidly. This can be explained on the basis of Henry’s law. (MPBoardSolutions.com) Carbonated beverages are bottled under pressure to ensure high concentration of carbon dioxide. When the bottle is opened the pressure above the solution falls and the excess carbon dioxide comes out.

Question 4.
What is common ion effect? Explain?
Answer:
Common ion effect:
When, in a solution of weak electrolyte, a solution of strong electrolyte containing the same ion is added, then the ionisation of weak electrolyte decreases. This effect is called common ion effect.
Example: During precipitation of radicals of group II taken care that the radicals of group IV does not get precipitated. (MPBoardSolutions.com) On the basis of this, H2S gas is passed in presence of HCl in group II. Due to common ion effect dissociation of H2S is suppressed.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Equilibrium img 7
This reduces concentration of sulphide ion and hence only radicals of group II get precipitated as sulphide. For the precipitation of radicals of group IV, H2S is passed in presence of NH4OH. H+ ion of H2S combines with OH ions of NH4OH to produce water. This increases dissociation of H2S. In this way, increase in sulphide ion concentration helps in the precipitation of positive sulphides of group IV.

MP Board Solutions

Question 5.
What do you understand by conjugate acid and conjugate base?
Answer:
The relative strengths of conjugate pairs can be found out, if we know whether forward reaction is favoured or backward reaction is favoured.
For example:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Equilibrium img 8
In the above reaction, the reaction proceeds almost to completion. We must therefore conclude that HCl is a stronger acid than H3O+ i.e., HCl has stronger tendency to donate proton than H3O+. Similarly H2O is stronger base than H2O has stronger tendency to accept proton than Cl. Thus, the strong acid (HCl) has a weak conjugate base Cl.
Consider another reaction
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Equilibrium img 9
For the reaction, backward reaction is strongly favoured. This shows that H3O+ is a stronger acid than CH3COOH and CH3COO is a stronger base than H2O. Thus, we again observe that the strong acid (H3O+) has the weak conjugate base (H2O). Thus, we conclude that, A stronger acid has a weak conjugate base and vice – versa.

Question 6.
Explain the solubility product by giving definition?
Answer:
Solubility product:
The product of the concentration of ions in the saturated solution of a sparingly soluble salt as AgCl is a constant at a given temperature and is called solubility product. (MPBoardSolutions.com) If any sparingly soluble electrolyte at any temperature forms saturated solution, then the equilibrium is
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Equilibrium img 10
According to law of mass action from (b) and (c),
\(\frac { [A^{ + }][B^{ + }] }{ [AB] } \) = K
∴ [A+ ][B+ ] = K[AB]
When solution is saturated [AB] will be constant and value of K[AB] will also be a constant and is written as KJ which is the solubility product.

Question 7.
Explain the acid – base concept of Bronsted – Lowry by giving example?
Answer:
Bronsted – Lowry concept of acid and base (1923):
Scientist Bronsted and Lowry gave the theory for acids and bases which is equally applied to aqueous and non – aqueous solutions of acids and bases. According to it, “Acid is that which furnishes proton and base accepts the proton.”

Neutralization reaction:
A reaction in which a proton is transferred from acid to a base or a reaction between H+ and OH ion to form H2O molecule.
Relation between acid and base:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Equilibrium img 11
That means, every acid has conjugate base and every base has conjugate acid.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Equilibrium img 12
According to the definition given by Bronsted and Lowry, acid and base may be in molecular, cationic or anionic states.

Question 8.
Calculate the value of equilibrium constant for following reaction:
PCl5 ⇄ PCl3 + Cl2
Answer:
Let ‘a’ mole of PCl5, initiate the reaction and x moles dissociate at equilibrium state. If the volume of container is V litre then,
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Equilibrium img 13
According to law of mass of action
Kc = \(\frac { [PCl_{ 3 }][Cl_{ 2 }] }{ [PCl_{ 5 }] } \)
On putting the values,
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Equilibrium img 14

MP Board Solutions

Question 9.
With the help of Le – Chatelier’s principle at equilibrium for reaction 2SO3 + O2 ⇄ 2SO3;
∆H = – 188.2 kJ, determine the restrictions for the formation of sulphur trioxide?
Answer:
Le – Chatelier proposed a law. It states “If as equilibrium m £ chemical system is disturbed by changing temperature, pressure or concentration of the system, the equilibrium shift is such a way so that the effect of change gets minimised.”
On the basis of this principle, changes in chemical equilibria and physical equilibria can be explained.
Formation of SO3 by SO2 and O2:
2SO2 + O2 ⇄ 2SO3; ∆H = – 45.2 kcal

1. Effect of concentration:
On increasing concentration of SO2 and O2 more SO3 will be formed.

2. Effect of pressure:
On increasing pressure, the equilibrium shifts on that side in which number of moles are less or towards less volume. In this reaction, 2 moles of SO2 and 1 mole of O2 (Total 3 moies) change into 2 moles of SO3, So, on increasing pressure, more quantity of SO3 will be formed.

3. Effect of temperature:
Formation of SO3 is an exothermic reaction, so on increasing temperature, more SO3 will dissociate and on decreasing temperature, more SO3 will be formed.

Question 10.
What is the importance of solubility product m the purifkation of salt?
Answer:
Purification of common salt; Common salt contains impurities in it. For removal of these HCl gas is passed through the saturated solution of salt. HCl ionizes tc greater extent being a strong electrolyte.
HCl ⇄ H+ + Cl (More ionized)
NaCl ⇄ NaCl ⇄ Na+ + Cl

Equilibrium Long Answer Type Questions – I

Question 1.
Explain the buffering action of alkaline or basic buffer? Give its importance?
Answer:
Bask buffer:
Basic buffer contains equimolar quantities of weak base and sodium citrate etc.
Buffer action of basic buffer: Consider a basic buffer of NH4OH and NH4Cl. This buffer solution contains a large amount of NH4+ ions, Cl ions and excess of undissociated NH4OH molecules along with a small amount of OH ions.
NH4Cl → NH4+ + Cl
NH4OH ⇄ NH4+ + OH
On adding a drop of HCl, H3O+ ions produced combines with OH ions of the buffer to form weakly ionised H2O molecules. As a result of this ionisation of NH4OH increases to restore the concentration of OH ions. Sc, pH of solution remains unchanged.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Equilibrium img 15
When a few drops of NaOH is added, it provides OH ions. The additional OH ions combines with NH4+ ions to form weakly ionised NH4OH resulting an increase in ionisation of NH4OH to restore the concentration of NH4+ ion. Thus, pH remains unchanged.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Equilibrium img 16
Importance of Buffer solution:

  1. Buffer solutions are very important in laboratories, industries, botanical or zoological, physiology. Human blood is an example of buffer solution which has pH 7.34.
  2. In the extraction of phosphate the buffer solution of CH3COONa and CH3COOH is used.
  3. In industries, for the manufacturing of sugar and paper and electroplating occurs at fixed pH.

MP Board Solutions

Question 2.
What is pH? Explain?
Or, What is meant by pH? What is its relationship with hydrogen ion concentration?
Answer:
To express the acidity or basicity of a solution Sorensen in 1909 established a scale known as the pH scale.
The pH value of a solution is the numerical value of the negative power to which 10 should be raised in order to express the hydrogen ion concentration of the solution, i.e;
[H+] = 10-pH …………… (1)
On taking log of eqn.(1),
or log10[H+] = log10 10-pH
log10[H+] = -pH log10 10
or pH = -log [H+], (∵ log10 10 = 1)
or pH = log10\(\frac { 1 }{ [H^{ + }] } \)
This is the required relationship between pH and H+ ion concentration.
Thus, the pH value of a solution is the logarithm of its hydrogen ion concentration to base 10 with negative sign.
pH scale expresses acidic and basic nature of solution in terms of numbers from 0 to 14. Acidic solutions have pH value less than 7 while basic solutions have pH value greater than 7. pH value of neutral solution is 7.
Uses of pH measurement:

  1. In industries:
    • In the manufacturing of alcohol by fermentation, pH is maintained between 5 and 6.8.
    • Manufacturing of paper, sugar and electroplating is being done at fixed pH.
  2. In the study of velocities of chemical reactions, for maintaining pH, buffer solutions are used.
  3. In qualitative analysis for removal of phosphate to maintain pH, buffer solutions of CH3COONa and CH3COOH are used.
  4. pH of human blood is 7.34. Medium of stomach is acidic while in the intestine it is basic medium.

Question 3.
Write the characteristics of equilibrium constant?
Answer:
Characteristics of equilibrium constant:
1. The value of equilibrium constant for a reaction is constant at a given temperature and it changes with change in temperature.

2. The value of molar equilibrium constant does not depends upon the initial molar concentration of reactants and products but it depends upon their concentration at equilibrium state.

3. If the reaction is reversed the value of equilibrium constant is inversed. For example,
Then for, H2(g) + I2(g) ⇄ 2HI, Kc = 50
2HI(g) ⇄ H2(g) + I2(g)
∴ K’ = \(\frac { 1 }{ K } \) or K’c = \(\frac{1}{50}\) = 0.02

4. If the equation having equilibrium constant is divided by 2, the equilibrium constant for the new equation is the square root of K (i.e., \(\sqrt { K } \))
For example:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Equilibrium img 17

5. If the equation (Having equilibrium constant K) is multiplied by 2, the equilibrium constant for the new equation is square of K (i. e., K2)
K’ = K2

Question 4.
Give only the definition of:

  1. Salt hydrolysis
  2. Solubility product
  3. Common ion effect
  4. Buffer solution

Answer:
1. Salt hydrolysis:
The interaction of cation/anion or both with water making the solution acidic or basic is called salt hydrolysis.

2. Solubility product:
At a particular temperature the product of concentration of ions in a saturated solution of a sparingly soluble electrolyte is known as solubility product. (Ksp).

3. Common ion effect:
The dissociation of weak electrolyte (Weak acid or weak base) is suppressed by the addition of a strong electrolyte having a common ion is called common ion effect.

4. Buffer solution:
Buffer solutions are solutions which retain their pH constant or unaltered after addition of less quantity of acid or base.

MP Board Solutions

Question 5.
Before precipitation of IIIrd group radicals as hydroxides on adding NH4OH, why it is necessary to add NH4Cl first?
Answer:
Precipitation of hydroxide of group ill:
Radicals of group III i e.. Al3+, Fe3+, Cr3+ gets precipitated as hydroxides. Radicals cf succeeding groups such as Zn2+, Ni2+, Mg2+, etc. are also precipitated as hydroxide. (MPBoardSolutions.com) Solubility product of hydroxide of group III is lesser than that of other as given below:
Table: Solubility Product of Hydroxide at 18°C
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Equilibrium img 18
Due to the difference in the solubility product of the hydroxides, concentration of OH ion is kept low such that only radicals of group III gets precipitated.
Hence, NH4OH is added before adding NH4Cl which remains completely ionized. Due to common (NH4+) ion dissociation of weak electrolyte NH4OH is suppressed.
NH4Cl ⇄ NH4+ + Cl (More ionised)
NH4OH ⇄ NH4+ + OH (Less ionised)
This decreases comcentration of OH ion and only hydroxides with low solubility product gets precipated.

Equilibrium Long Answer Type Questions – II

Question 1.
Derive a relation between equilibrium constant Kp and Kc, Or, Prove that Kp = KcRT∆n?
Answer:
In year 1867 Guldberg and Waage put forward a relationship between the rate of reaction and the molar concentration of reactants. The reUucrjhip is.0 as law of mass action. (MPBoardSolutions.com) It states that “At constant temperature, the rate of a chemical reaction is directly proportional to the product of the molar concentration of the reaction each raised to a power equal to its corresponding stoichiometric coefficient that appears in the balanced chemical equation.”
Example: For solids and liquids: Consider a hypothetical reversible reaction in the state of equilibrium.
A + B ⇄ X + Y
Applying law of mass action: Rate of forward reaction
Rf ∝ [A] [B] or Rf = Kf[A][B] ……………… (1)
Where, Kf is rate constant or velocity constant for the forward reaction. Similarly, rate of backward reaction,
Rb ∝ [X] [Y] or Rb = Kb [X][Y] ………………… (2)
Where, Kb rate constant or velocity constant for the backward reaction.
At equlibrium,
Rate of forward reaction = Rate of backward reaction.
Kf[A][B] = Kb[X][Y]
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Equilibrium img 19
Its value remains constant at particular temperature. The equation (3) is called law of chemical equilibrium. For a general type of the reaction,
aA + bB ⇄ xX + yY
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Equilibrium img 20
For gaseous reactants and products:
In the expression for Kc, the concentrations of the various species are generally expressed in terms of moles/litre. (MPBoardSolutions.com) However, in case of gaseous reactions the concentrations of gases may also expressed in terms of their partial pressures. Therefore, for a gaseous reaction:
aA + bB ⇄ xX + yY
The law of chemical equilibrium may be expressed as:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Equilibrium img 21
Relationship between Kpc:
Let us consider the following general reaction,
aA + bB ⇄ xX + yY
In which all the substances A, B, X and Y are present in gaseous state. For this reaction, Kp and Kc is written as follows:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Equilibrium img 22
Since, for an ideal gas,
PV = nRT
∴ P = \(\frac{n}{V}\) RT = CRT ………………… (3)
Where, the term C (equal to \(\frac{n}{V}\)) represents the molar concentration of the gas. On the basis of equation (3), we have
PA = CART = [A] RT
PB = CBRT = [B] RT
PX = CX RT = [X] RT
PY = CY RT = [Y] RT
Substituting this value in equation (2), we get
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Equilibrium img 23
Proved.

MP Board Solutions

Question 2.
Derive Ostwald’s dilution law of ionization of weak electrolytes? Write its limitations?
Or, Deduce the relationship between degree of ionization and ionization constant?
Answer:
Ostwald’s dilution law: Weak electrolytes are partially ionised. The ions produced due to ionisation of weak electrolyte exist in dynamic equilibrium with the undissociated molecules.
The fraction of the total number of molecules of electrolyte dissolved, which ionises at equilibrium is called degree of ionisation or degree of dissociation. It is denoted by α.
Consider ‘C’ mol per litre be the initial concentration of weak electrolyte AB dissolved in water. Let α be its degree of ionisation. (MPBoardSolutions.com) Thus, the molar concentration of different species before ionisation and at equilibrium be as given below:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Equilibrium img 24
Under normal conditions, value of a is very small for weak electrolyte and it can be neglected in comparison to 1.
∴K = Cα2
or α2 = \(\frac{K}{C}\)
∴α = \(\sqrt { \frac { K }{ C } } \)
If V is the volume of the solution in litres containing 1 mole of electolyte, then C = \(\frac{1}{V}\). Thus,
α = \(\sqrt { KV } \)
The above equation helps us to conclude that:
The degree of ionisation is inversely proportional to the square root of the molar concentration or directly propotional to the square root of the volume of the solution containing one mole of electrolyte. This is called Ostwald’s dilution law.

Limitations:
This law is not applicable for strong electrolyte and concentrated solutions because attractive force also acts between the solutions of such electrolytes.

Question 3.
Derive a relationship between pH and pOH value? Or, Prove that pH + pOH = 14.
Answer:
The water ionizes as:
H2O + H2O ⇄ H3O+ + OH
K = \(\frac { [H_{ 3 }O^{ + }][OH^{ – }] }{ [H_{ 2 }O]^{ 2 } } \)
K [H2O ]2 = [H3O+] [OH]
[∵K [H2O ]2 = Kw]
Kw = [H3O+][OH] ……………. (1)
Kw is a constant, it is called product solubility.
At 298K, Temperature Kw = 1 × 10-14.
On putting the value in equation (1)
10-14 = [H3O+][OH]
Taking log on both sides,
-14 log1010 = log10[H3O+] + log10[OH]
-14 = log10[H3O+] + log10[OH], [∵log1010 = 1]
0r 14 = [-log10[H3O+]] + [-log10[OH]]
[∵log10 [H3O+] = pH]
[∵log10 [OH] = pOH]
14 = pH + pOH

MP Board Solutions

Question 4.
For the determination of pH value of buffer solution derive Henderson – Hazel equation?
Answer:
Henderson’s equation:
pH of a buffer solution can be calculated with the help of Henderson’s equation. For this consider a buffer of weak acid HA and its salt.
HA ⇄ H+ + A
Ka = \(\frac { [H^{ + }][A^{ – }] }{ [HA] } \)
Ka is dissociation constant of acid.
or [H+] = Ka \(\frac { [HA] }{ [A^{ – }] } \)
Salt is completely ionised while due to presence of excess A from the salt, the dissociation of weak acid will be depressed more due to common ion effect.
or [H+] = Ka \(\frac { [Acid] }{ [Salt] } \) [A] ≈ [Salt]
Taking log value,
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Equilibrium img 25
This equation is called Henderson equation.
In the same way, for basic buffer solution:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 7 Equilibrium img 26
pH of a buffer solution does not change woth dilution because on dilution the ration of conc. of acid or base does not change.

MP Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions

MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Thermodynamics

MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Thermodynamics

Thermodynamics Important Questions

Thermodynamics Objective Type Questions

Question 1.
Choose the correct answer:

Question 1.
In adiabatic expansion of an ideal gas always:
(a) Increase in temperature
(b) ∆H = 0
(c) q = 0
(d) W = 0
Answer:
(c) q = 0

Question 2.
For a reversible process, free energy change at equilibrium:
(a) More than zero
(b) Less than zero
(c) Equal to zero
(d) None of these.
Answer:
(c) Equal to zero

Question 3.
In isothermal expansion of an ideal gas:
(a) 9 = 0
(b) AE = 0
(c) W = 0
(d) dV = Q
Answer:
(b) AE = 0

MP Board Solutions

Question 4.
Hess’s law is an application of the following:
(a) First law of Thermodynamics
(b) Second law of Thermodynamics
(c) Entropy change
(d) Free energy change.
Answer:
(a) First law of Thermodynamics

Question 5.
When the value of heat of neutralization of an acid with a base is 13.7 kcal, then:
(a) Acid and base both are weak
(b) Acid and base both are strong
(c) Acid is strong and base is weak
(d) Acid is weak and base is strong
Answer:
(b) Acid and base both are strong

Question 2.
Fill in the blanks:

  1. Enthalpy is an …………………….. property.
  2. Nicely closed thermos flask is an example of an ……………………….
  3. Value of heat of combustion (∆H) is always ………………………..
  4. Extensive property depend on the ………………………. of matter.
  5. Value of heat of neutralization is always …………………………. kilocalorie.

Answer:

  1. Extensive
  2. Isolation
  3. Negative
  4. Amount
  5. – 13.7

MP Board Solutions

Question 3.
Answer in one word/sentence:

  1. Tell the value of heat of neutralization of strong acid and strong base?
  2. Give two examples of state function?
  3. What is entropy?
  4. Among NaCl, H2O(s) and NH3(g) value of whose entropy is higher?
  5. Expect the system, what is the remaining part of the universe called?
  6. System in which changes occur spontaneously and by which entropy of the system increases, what are they called?
  7. What is the type of heat of combustion?

Answer:

  1. – 57 kJ
  2. Enthalpy, Entropy
  3. Measure of disorder
  4. NH3
  5. Surroundings
  6. Spontaneous process
  7. Exothermic.

Thermodynamics Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Give two examples of state function?
Answer:
Enthalpy and Entropy.

Question 2.
Whose entropy is greater among NaCl, H2O(s) and NH3(g)?
Answer:
NH3(g).

Question 3.
Who gave the equation ∆G = ∆H – T∆S?
Answer:
Gibbs – Helmholtz.

Question 4.
Write the equation of first law of thermodynamics?
Answer:
∆E = q + W.

MP Board Solutions

Question 5.
What is the value of entropy when ice melts?
Answer:
Entropy increases.

Question 6.
What is Closed system?
Answer:
System which can exchange energy only and not matter with the surroundings.

Question 7.
The value of which enthalpy is always negative?
Answer:
Enthalpy of combustion.

Question 8.
Heat of neutralization of strong acid and strong base is equal to?
Answer:
-13.7 kcal or -57.1 kJ.

Question 9.
What is Adiabatic process?
Answer:
A process in which no exchange of heat between system and surroundings occur is known as adiabatic process.

Question 10.
What is Enthalpy?
Answer:
Heat change at constant pressure is known as enthalpy.

MP Board Solutions

Question 11.
The process in which pressure remains constant is called?
Answer:
Isobaric process.

Question 12.
In Exothermic reaction the value of ∆H is?
Answer:
Negative.

Question 13.
Unit of specific heat capacity is?
Answer:
joule per kelvin per gm.

Question 14.
The relation between ∆G, ∆S and ∆H is given by?
Answer:
∆G = ∆H – T∆S.

Question 15.
Which type of property is heat capacity?
Answer:
Extensive property.

Question 16.
What type of properties are temperature, pressure and surface tension?
Answer:
Intensive property.

MP Board Solutions

Question 17.
What is the unit of molar heat capacity?
Answer:
joule kelvin-1 mol-1.

Question 18.
For which process dq = 0?
Answer:
Adiabatic process.

Question 19.
The efficiency of any fuel is measured by which value?
Answer:
Calorific value.

Question 20.
What is entropy?
Answer:
The measurement of degree of disorder or randomness of the molecule of the system.

Question 21.
Write the relation between standard free energy change ∆G° and equilibrium constant (K)?
Answer:
∆G° = -RTlnK.

MP Board Solutions

Question 22.
What is the value of ∆G for Spontaneous process?
Answer:
∆G < 0.

Question 23.
“The electricity obtained from an electrochemical ceil is equivalent to decrease in free energy”. Write expression for this sentence?
Answer:
∆G° = -nE°F.

Thermodynamics Short Answer Type Questions – I

Question 1.
What is System?
Answer:
System:
A specified portion of the universe which is selected for experimental or theoretical investigations is called the system. (MPBoardSolutions.com) In the system, the effects of certain properties such as pressure, temperature, etc. are observed. A system is said to be homogeneous if it consists of only one phase. On the other hand, it is heterogeneous if it consists of more than one phase.

Question 2.
What is process and what are its kinds?
Answer:
The operation which brings about change in the state of a system is called a thermodynamics process.
Thermodynamics process may be further classified as follows:

  1. Isothermal process
  2. Adiabatic process
  3. Isobaric process
  4. Isochoric process
  5. Reversible process
  6. Irreversible process
  7. Cyclic process.

MP Board Solutions

Question 3.
Explain Exothermic reaction with example?
Or, Explain why the value of enthalpy change negative for exothermic reaction?
Answer:
The reactions in which heat is emitted are called exothermic reactions. In such reactions total heat content of products is less than that of reactants. Hence, ∆H is negative.
Example: 2NO(g) → N2(g) + O2(g); ∆H = – 180.5 kJ/mol.

Question 4.
Explain extensive and intensive properties?
Answer:
1. Intensive properties:
The properties of the system which are independent of the amount of matter present in it, are called intensive properties.
Example: Temperature, viscosity, surface tension, refractive index, specific heat, density, etc.

2. Extensive properties:
The properties of the system which depend upon the amount of matter present in it, are called extensive properties.
Example: Mass, volume, energy, etc.

Question 5.
State and Explain Zeroth law of Thermodynamics?
Answer:
According to this law, “Two bodies which are separately in thermal equilibrium with a third body are also in thermal equilibrium with each other”.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Thermodynamics img 1

Question 6.
Explain Enthalpy of neutralization with example?
Answer:
The enthalpy of neutralization is defined as:
“Change in enthalpy when one gram equivalent of an acid is neutralized with one gram equivalent of base in dilute solution at constant temperature.
Example: NaOH(aq) + HCl(aq) ⇄  NaCl(aq) + H2O(l); ∆H =- 57.1 kJ

Question 7.
The enthalpy of neutralization of weak acid and weak base is less than enthalpy of neutralisation of strong acid and base. Why?
Answer:
If either acid or base weak then its ionisation in solution remains incomplete. As a result a part of energy liberated during combination of H+ and OH” ion is used up for the ionisation of weak acid and weak base. Therefore, the value of enthalpy of neutralisation of weak acid with strong base or vice – versa is numerically less than – 57.1 kJ.

MP Board Solutions

Question 8.
What is Bond enthalpy and bond dissociation energy?
Answer:
It is a well known fact that during the formation of a chemical bond, energy is required. Therefore the breaking of a bond energy is to be supplied. Thus, the energy required to break a particular bond in a gaseous molecule is called bond dissociation energy.
Example: 2HCl(g) → H2(g) + Cl2(g)

Question 9.
What is the first law of thermodynamics? Write its mathematical form?
Or, Write the first law of thermodynamics and derive the mathematical expression of it?
Answer:
First law of thermodynamics is the law of conservation of energy .The common statement of this law is:
“Energy can neither be created nor be destroyed but it can be converted from one form to another form.” Let internal energy of the system is E1 and q calorie heat is supplied to the system. E2 is the energy of the final stage and work done is W. Therefore,
E2 – E1 = q + W
or ∆E = q + W.

Question 10.
Define the term Entropy?
Answer:
A change that brings about disorder or randomness is more likely to occur than one that brings about order. To account for the randomness or disorder of a system a state function called entropy was introduced. It is (MPBoardSolutions.com) defined as the measure of degree of disorder or randomness of the molecule of the system. Entropy is represented by symbol S. It is easier to define entropy change than entropy of a system.

MP Board Solutions

Question 11.
Whose entropy is more: Water vapour, water or ice, why?
Answer:
Entropy is the measure of randomness. In solid state the molecules are completely arranged, therefore its entropy is minimum and in gas the molecules move randomly in all directions, so the value of entropy is more. So
S(ice) < S(water) < S(water vapour).

Question 12.
Among NaCl, H2O and NH3 whose entropy will be maximum and why?
Answer:
Entropy is the measure of randomness. In solid state the molecules are regularly arranged, so entropy is minimum whereas in gas the molecules move randomly in all directions, so the entropy is maximum. So, in the above example, NaCl is a solid, H2O is liquid and NH3 is a gas. So, the entropy of NH3 is maximum and entropy of NaCl is minimum.

Question 13.
Prove that: P∆V = ∆ntRT?
Answer:
From ideal gas equation
P V = nRT
If the volume of gas at initial state is V1 and the number of moles of gas is n1 then,
PV1 = ∆n1RT …………….. (1)
If at final state, the volume of gas is V2 and number of moles of gas is n2, then,
PV2 = ∆n2RT …………. (2)
From eqn. (i) and (2),
P(V2 – V1) = (n2 – n1)RT
or P∆V = ∆nRT.

Question 14.
What is relation between ∆H and ∆U?
Answer:
If H be the enthalpy of any system and U is the internal energy, then the relation will be
H = U + PV
For enthalpy change, ∆H = ∆U + P∆V
We know that P∆V = ∆nRT
On putting the value,
∆H = ∆U + ∆nRT.

MP Board Solutions

Question 15.
What do you mean by specific heat capacity?
Answer:
It is the heat required to raise the temperature of 1 gram of substance by 1°C. It is denoted by Cs.
Cs = \(\frac{C}{m}\)
Where, C = Heat capacity, Cs = Specific heat capacity, m = Mass of substance.
Its S.I. unit is joule K-1g-1.

Question 16.
What do you mean by molar heat capacity?
Answer:
It is the heat required to raise the temperature of 1 mole of substance by 1°C.
Molar heat capacity = \(\frac{C}{n}\) \(\frac{q}{∆T × n}\)
Where C = Heat capacity (Absorbed heat), ∆T = Increase in temperature, n = Number of moles.
Its S.I. unit is joule K-1 mol-1.

Question 17.
Write Hess’s law?
Answer:
In 1840, G.H. Hess formulated a law known as Hess’s law. According to law, “The enthalpy change in a physical or chemical change is same whether the process is carried out in one step or in several steps.”

Question 18.
What is Adiabatic process?
Answer:
A process in which no exchange of heat between system and surroundings occur is known as adiabatic process. This process mainly occurs in isolated system. For this type of process dq = 0.

MP Board Solutions

Question 19.
What is standard enthalpy of reaction?
Answer:
The enthalpy change takes place at standard state i.e., at 298 K temperature (25°C), 1 atm pressure (760 mm) condition is called standard enthalpy of reaction. It is denoted by ∆H°r or ∆rH°.

Question 20.
What is enthalpy of solution? Explain with example?
Answer:
Enthalpy change taking place during the dissolution of one mole of a substance in excess of a solvent such that further addition of solvent does not produce any heat change is known as enthalpy of solution.
Example: KCl(s) + aq → KCl(aq)

Question 21.
What is enthalpy of hydration? Explain with example?
Answer:
Enthalpy change taking place when one mole of anhydrous salt combines with the required number of moles of water to form hydrated salt is called enthalpy of hydration.
Example: CuSO4(s) + 5H2O(l) → CuS04.5H2O ∆H = – 78.2kJ.

Thermodynamics Short Answer Type Questions – II

Question 1.
What is law of energy conservation? Write its mathematical expression. Or, What is the first law of thermodynamics? Deduce its mathematical expression?
Answer:
This law was first expressed by Meyer and Helmholt. According to this law, “Energy cannot be created or destroyed although one form and vice – versa”.
Or
Whenever a certain quantity of energy in one form disappear, an equivalent amount of energy in another form reappear.

Mathematical form:
Let us suppose that system has internal energy equal to U1. If it absorbs heat energy 17 from the surroundings then internal energy will increase and becomes U1 + q. If the work is done on the system then its final internal energy will become
U2 = U1 + q + w
U2 – U1 = q + w,
∆U – q + w, (∴ U2 – U1 = ∆U
If the work done on the system is w, then
∆U = q + w
If work done by the system
∆U = q – w

MP Board Solutions

Question 2.
What is Enthalpy of fusion? Explain with example?
Answer:
Enthalpy change taking place during the conversion of 1 mole of a solid substance into liquid at its melting point is known as enthalpy of fusion.
Example: Enthalpy of fusion of ice at 273 K is 6.0 kJ.
H2O(s) → H2O(l);
i.e 6.0 kJ of energy is absorbed for the conversion of 1 mole of ice into water. ∆H = +6.0 KJ

Question 3.
For an isolated system if ∆U = 0, what will be ∆S?
Answer:
For an isolated system, AU = 0 and for a spontaneous process, the change in entropy should be positive. For example: For a closed container, which is an isolated system, two gases A and B are diffused (MPBoardSolutions.com) Both gases A and B are separated by a kinetic separator. When the separator is removed, the gases starts fusing with each other and randomness increases in the system. For this process, ∆S > 0 and ∆U = 0.
Again ∆S = \(\frac { q_{ rev } }{ T } \) = \(\frac { \Delta H }{ T } \) = \(\frac { \Delta U+P\Delta V }{ T } \) = \(\frac { P\Delta V }{ T } \) [∴∆U = 0]
So, T∆S or ∆S > 0.

MP Board Solutions

Question 4.
On the basis of the following equations, write a note on thermodynamic stability of NO(g):
\(\frac{1}{2}\) N2(g) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) O2(g) → NO(g); ∆rH° = 90kJ mol-1
NO(g) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) O2(g) → NO2(g); ∆rH° = 94kJ mol-1
Answer:
NO(g) is unstable, as the preparation of NO is an endothermic reaction. But preparation of NO2(g) occurs because it is an exothermic reaction (energy evolved). So unstable NO(g) is converted into NO2(g).

Question 5.
At equilibrium state, whose value will be zero ArG or ArG°?
Answer:
rG = ∆rG° + RTlnK
At equilibrium, 0 = ∆rG° + RTlnK
or ∆rG° = – RTlnK
rG° = 0 (When K = 1)
For other values K, ∆rG° will be zero.

Question 6.
What is the meaning of calorific value of any fuel? Explain with example?
Answer:
The heat or energy evolved in joule or calorie by the (combustion) burning of 1 gram food or fuel is known as calorific value of fuel.
C2H12O6(s) + 6O2(g) → 6CO2(g) + 6H2(g); ∆H = -2840 kJ
In this process from 1 mole glucose or 180 gm = 2480 kJ energy obtained
So, energy obtained from 1 gm glucose = \(\frac{2480}{180}\) = 15.78 kJ/gm.
So, calorific value of glucose is 15.78 kJ/gm.

Question 7.
Explain heat of vapourization and heat of reaction?
Answer:
Heat or Enthalpy of vapourization : Enthalpy change taking place during the conversion of 1 mole of liquid into vapours at its boiling point and 1 atm pressure is called enthalpy of vapourization.
Example:
H2O ⇄ H2O(g); ∆H = +40.7 kJ

Heat of reaction:
Enthalpy change taking place when number of moles of reactants as represented by the chemical equation have completely reacted is known as enthalpy of reaction. It is denoted by ∆Hf.
Example: C(s) + O2(g) → CO2(g); ∆Hf = – 393.5 kJ/mol

MP Board Solutions

Question 8.
Explain enthalpy of fusion and enthalpy of sublimation with example?
Answer:
Enthalpy of fusion:
Enthalpy change taking place during the conversion of I mole of a solid substance into liquid at its melting point is known as enthalpy of fusion.
H2O(s) ⇄ H2O(l); ∆H = +6.01 kJ
Enthalpy of Sublimation:
Enthalpy change taking place when one mole of solid changes into vapours without passing into intermediate liquid state at a temperature below its melting point is known as enthalpy of sublimation.
I2(s) ⇄  I2(g). ∆H = +62.4 kJ

Question 9.
How the change in entropy takes place in vapourisation process?
Answer:
Entropy of vapourisation:
Change in entropy when one mole of a liquid at its boiling point changes to the vapour state at the same temperature.
∆Svapour = S(vapour) – ∆S(liquid) = \(\frac { \Delta H_{ vap } }{ T_{ b } } \)
Here, ∆vap H is the latent heat of vapourisation (enthalpy of vapourisation) and Tb is the boiling point when liquid is converted into vapour, entropy of the system increases. Thus, ∆Svap is +ve.

MP Board Solutions

Question 10.
What is Internal Energy? Is its absolute value can be determined?
Answer:
Physical and chemical process occurs by some energy change. This energy may appear in the form of light, heat and work. (MPBoardSolutions.com) This evolution and absorption of energy clearly shows that every’ substance or system is associated with some definite amount of inherent energy’. The actual value of this inherent energy depends upon:

  1. Chemical nature of substance
  2. Conditions, like temperature, pressure and volume, and
  3. Composition of the substance.

Thus, “The energy stored within a substance is called internal energy or intrinsic energy”.
Actually, internal energy is the sum of various forms of energy such as; electronic energy Ee, nuclear energy En, chemical bond energy Ec, potential energy Ep and kinetic energy Ek . Kinetic energy is the sum of translational energy (Et), vibrational energy (Ev) and rotational energy (Er).
It is represented by the symbol ‘U’,
U = Ee + En + Ec + Ep + Ek
It may be noted that, absolute value of internal energy cannot be determined, because it is not possible to determine the exact values for the constituent energies, such as: translational, vibrational, rotational energies etc.

Question 11.
Expansion of any gas in vacuum is called free expansion. 1 L of an ideal gas expands isothermally upto 5 L, then determine the change in internal energy and work done?
Solution:
Work done, W = – P(external) (V2 – V1)
When P(external) = 0,
So, W = – 0 (5 – 1) = 0
For isothermal expansion,
∆U = 0
So, ∆T = 0.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Thermodynamics img 2

Question 12.
An ideal gas filled in a cylinder (according to figure.) is compressed in a single step with external pressure P(external) Then what will be the work done on the gas? Explain with graph?
Solution:
Let the initial volume of the gas is Vi and pressure of cylinder is P. On compressing the gas by pressure P the final volume of gas is Vf.
So, change in volume ∆V = (Vf – Vi)
If W is the work done by the piston on the system
W = P(external) (- ∆V)
W = P(external) (Vf – Vi)
This can be shown in the figure by (P – V) graph, The work done is equal to ABVfVi. The positive sign shows that the work is done on the system.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Thermodynamics img 3

Thermodynamics Long Answer Type Questions – I

Question 1.
What is heat capacity? Deduce the expression Cp – Cv = R?
Answer:
Heat Capacity: It is equal to the amount of heat required to raise the temperature of the system through 1°C. Its unit is JK-1.
Relationship between Cp and Cv:
At constant volume: qv = Cv∆T = ∆U
At constant pressure: qp = Cp∆T = ∆H
∆H and ∆U are related to each other as
∆H = ∆U + ∆ngRT
or ∆H = ∆U + ∆ng(PV)
For 1 mole of ideal gas PV = RT
∴ ∆H = ∆U + ∆(RT)
or ∆H = ∆U + R∆T
on putting the value of ∆H and ∆U
Cp∆T = Cv∆T = Cv∆T + R∆T
Dividing whole equation by ∆T,
Cp = Cv + R
Cp – Cv = R
Thus, value of Cp is always more than Cv and the difference between them is about 2 calories or 8.314 joule.
This relationship is known as Meyer’s relationship.
The ratio Cp/Cv:
The ratio of molar heat capacities at constant pressure (Cp) to that at constant volume (Cv) is represented by γ. Value of γ gives information about the atomicity of the gas. Thus,
For monoatomic gases γ = 1.67
For diatomic gases γ = 1.40
For triatomic gases γ = 1.30

MP Board Solutions

Question 2.
Explain Enthalpy of combustion? Write its uses also?
Answer:
Enthalpy of combustion:
The enthalpy change taking place when one mole of substance is completely oxidised or burnt in presence of excess of oxygen is known as enthalpy of combustion. For example, the enthalpy of combustion of methane is 890.4 kJ.
CH4(g) + 2O2(g) → CO2(g) + 2H2O(g) ∆Hc = – 890.4 kJ

Carbon on the other hand is oxidised to carbon monoxide and carbon dioxide.
C(s) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) O2(g) → CO(g); ∆H = – 110.5kJ
and C(s) + O2(g) → CO2(g); ∆Hc = – 393.5 kJ

In this case enthalpy of combustion of carbon is – 393.5 kJ and not – 110.5 kJ as formation of CO is a result of incomplete combustion of carbon.
Uses of Enthalpy of combustion:

  1. To determine the calorific value of fuel.
  2. To determine the enthalpy of reaction of compounds.
  3. Determination of structure of compounds.
  4. To calculate the calorific value of food.

Question 3.
Prove that qr = ∆Hp?
Or, Prove that at constant pressure and constant temperature the heat of reaction is equal to the change in enthalpy of the system?
Answer:
Suppose enthalpy, internal energy and volume of a system in initial state are H1, U1 and V1 respectively and after gaining heat these values becomes H2, U2 and V2 respectively, then according to definition.
H1 = U1 + PV1, (in initial state) ……………… (1)
H2 = U2 + PV2, (in final state) …………….. (2)
Subtracting eqn. (1) from eqn eqn. (2),
H2 – H1 = U2 – U1 + P(V2 – V1)
or ∆H = ∆U + P∆V
Where ∆H is enthalpy change, ∆U is change in internal energy and ∆V is change in volume. Therefore at constant pressure enthalpy change is equal to sum of internal energy change and expansion type of mechanical work.
According to first law of thermodynamics,
∆U = q – P∆V
q = ∆U + P∆V
= (U2 – U1) + P(V2 – V1)
= (U2 + PV2) – (U1 + PV1)
= H2 – H1
= ∆H
∴ ∆H = qp
Thus, enthalpy change represents the heat change occurring at constant temperature and pressure. It is noteworthy that though q is path dependent, qp is not because ∆H is a state function.

MP Board Solutions

Question 4.
Differentiate between Reversible and Irreversible processes?
Answer:
Differences between Reversible and Irreversible process:
Reversible process:

  1. It is carried out infinitesimally slowly i.e., the difference between driving force and the opposing force is very very small.
  2. It is an ideal process requiring infinite time for completion.
  3. Equilibrium is not disturbed at any stage during the process.
  4. Work obtained is maximum.
  5. It is an imaginary process and cannot be realised in actual practice.

Irreversible process:

  1. This process is carried out rapidly /.e.,the difference between driving force and the opposing force and the opposing force is quite large.
  2. It is a spontaneous process requiring finite time for completion.
  3. Equilibrium may occur only after the completion of the process.
  4. Work obtained is not maximum.
  5. It is a natural process which occurs in
  6. particular direction under given set of conditions.

Question 5.
What are the factors affecting enthalpy of reaction?
Answer:
Factors on which enthalpy of a reaction (∆H) depends: Enthalpy of a reaction i.e., ∆H depends upon the following factors:
1. Physical state of reactants and products:
Enthalpy of reaction is affected by the physical state of reactants and products because latent heat of substance is also involved. For example, value of enthalpy of reaction for the formation of liquid water and water vapour is different.
H2(g) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) O2(g) → H2O(l); ∆H = – 286 kJ
H2(g) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) O2(g) → H2O(l); ∆H = – 249 kJ

2. Quantities of the reactants involved:
Enthalpy of reaction is affected by the physical state of reactants and products because latent heat of substance is also involved. For example, value of enthalpy of reaction for the formation of liquid water and water vapour is different.
H2(g) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) O2(g) → H2O(l); ∆H = – 286 kJ
H2(g) + \(\frac{1}{2}\) O2(g) → H2O(l); ∆H = – 249 kJ

3. Allotropic modifications:
Allotropes of an element may have different enthalpies. For example, enthalpy change during combustion of graphite and diamond is – 393.5 kJ/mol-1 and – 395.4 kJ/mol-1 respectively.
C(graphite) + O2(g) → CO2(g); ∆H = – 393.5 kJ
C(diamond) + O2(g) → CO2(g); ∆H = – 395.4 kJ

4. Temperature:
Value of enthalpy of reaction is dependent on the temperature at which the reaction is carried out. For example, at 25°C enthalpy of formation of HCl(g) is 184.6 kJ while at 75°C it is 184.4 kJ.
H2(g) + Cl2(g) → 2Hl(g); ∆H = 184.6 kJ at 25°C
H2(g) + Cl2(g) → 2HCl(g); ∆H = 184.4 kJ at 75°C

MP Board Solutions

Question 6.
Prove that at constant volume qv = ∆U?
Answer:
When a reaction occurs at constant volume, then no work is done by the system. So W = 0.
So, ∆U = q + W
On putting the value, ∆U = q
So, at constant volume the energy is absorbed which increases the internal energy of the system. So,
∆U = q + W = q + p∆V, (W = P∆V)
Since, the reaction occurs at constant volume. So, ∆V = 0.
On putting vallue, ∆U = qv

Question 7.
From following data determine the heat of reaction of CH4 or enthalpy, ∆H:
C(s) + O2(g) → CO2; ∆H = – 97k cal ………… (1)
2H2(g) + O2(g) → 2H2O(g) ∆H = – 136k cal …………. (2)
CH4 + 2O2(g) → CO2(g) + 2H2O(g); ∆H = – 212k cal ………………… (3)
Solution:
To determine
C(s) + 2H2(g) → cH4(g); ∆H = ?
On adding eqn.(1) and (2),
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Thermodynamics img 4

Thermodynamics Long Answer Type Questions – II

Question 1.
What is Hess’s Law of constant heat summation? Explain with an example?
Answer:
In 1840, G.H. Hess gave an important law of constant heat summation according to which, “The enthalpy change in a particular reaction is always constant and does not depend on the path in which reaction takes place”.
Or
“The enthalpy change in a physical or chemical process is the same whether the process is carried out in one or in several steps.”
This law is based on the law of conservation of energy. Suppose that the conversion of substance A to (MPBoardSolutions.com) substance Z takes place in a single step by first method and through several steps in second method. In single step by first method and through several steps in second method. In single step:
A → Z + Q1
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Thermodynamics img 5
Where, Q1 is the energy in several steps:
A → B + q1
B → C + q2
C → Z + q3
Total energy evolved in several steps = q1 + q2 + q3
= Q2 calories (suppose)
Acoording to Hess’s law,
Q1 = Q2
Suppose Hess’s law is incorrect and Q2 > Q1. In this stage if we convert A to Z by several steps and then Z directly to A, then heat equal to (Q2 – Q1) is produced. By repeating this cyclic process several times, an (MPBoardSolutions.com) unlimited amount of heat (energy) may be produced in an isolated system. But this is against the law of conservation of energy.
Practically also, Hess’s law is proved to be true.
Example: Carbon can be directly burnt to produce C02 or in the second method it is first converted to carbon monoxide and then oxidized to carbon dioxide.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Thermodynamics img 6
Energy evolved by both the methods is nearly same. Different of 0.3 kcal is due to experimental error.
∴ ∆H = ∆H1 + ∆H2

Question 2.
Prove that ∆H = ∆U + P∆V?
Or, Explain the relationship between ∆H and ∆U?
Answer:
Relation between AH and AU: In case of solids and liquids, the difference between ∆H and ∆U is not significant but in gases it is significant. Let us consider a reaction involving gases. Let the process be isothermal and carried out at constant pressure (P). If VA is the total volume of the gaseous reactants and VB be the total volume of gaseous products, also nA be the number of moles of gaseous reactants and nB be the number of moles of gaseous products. Then
PVA = nART ……………………. (1)
and PVB = nBRT ………………….. (2)
Substarcting eqn. (1) from eqn. (2) we get
PVB – PVA = (nB – nA)RT
or P(VB – VA) = (nB – nA)RT
P∆V = ∆nRT
For gaseous reactants PVR = nRRT …………………… (3)
and for gaseous products PVp = npRT …………………… (4)
Substracting eqn. (3) from eqn. (4), we get
P(Vp – VR) = (np – nR) RT
or P∆V = ∆ngRT ……………………. (5)
But enthalpy change ∆H = ∆U + P∆V …………………….. (6)
Substracting the value of P∆V from eqn. (5) into eqn. (6), we get
∆H = ∆U + ∆ngRT ………………. (7)
Thus, using above eqn. (7) ∆H can be converted into ∆U or vice – versa.eqn. (7) can be wriien as
qp = qv + ∆ngRT ………………….. (8)
Because ∆H = qp and ∆U = qv.
Conditions:

1. If the number of moles of products is greater than that of reactants than ∆n will be +ve and ∆H is greater than ∆U. So,
∆H = ∆U + ∆nRT

2. If the number of moles of reactants is greater than the number of moles of products then ∆n will be – ve and the value of ∆H is less than ∆U.
∆H = ∆U – ∆nRT

3. If the No. of moles of reactants is equal to No. of moles of products then ∆n = 0, then in this condition ∆H = ∆U.

MP Board Solutions

Question 3.
Deduce an expression for PV work done?
Answer:
Let us, consider a cylinder, fitted with a weightless, frictionless piston having a cross – sectional area A, filled with 1 mole of an ideal gas. The total volume of gas is Vi and pressure inside the cylinder is Pin.
Suppose, external pressure on the gas is Pex which is slightly greater than the internal pressure of the gas. (MPBoardSolutions.com) Due to this difference in pressure the gas is compressed till the pressure inside becomes equal to Pex Suppose, the change is achieved in one single step and the final volume of the gas is Vf The gas is compressed and suppose the piston moves a distance l. Work done during compression is
W = Force × Displacement = F × l
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Thermodynamics img 8
or F = P × ABV
∴W = P × A × large
or W = – P∆V, [∴ A × l = ∆V]
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Thermodynamics img 7
The negative sign in the expression is required to obtain conventional sign W. In compression, Vf < Vi and therefore, (Vf – Vi) or ∆V is – ve.
Hence, W will come out to be +ve from the above expression. In expansion type work Vf > Vi and value of ∆V is positive, therefore, work done will be negative.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Thermodynamics img 9
This expression is useful for all types of PVwork and for irreversible flow.
Now, we will calculate, the work done during expansion of ideal gas in a reversible manner and in isothermal condition.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Thermodynamics img 10

Question 4.
What is free energy? Derive its mathematical form and write Gibbs – Helmholtz equation?
Answer:
The free energy of a system is defined as the maximum amount of energy of the system which can be converted into useful work.
Free energy is related to enthalpy (H), entropy (S) and absolute temperature (T) as,
G = H – TS
Since, we know H = E + PV
∴ G = E + PV – TS
Change in free energy may be given as,
∆G = ∆E + ∆(PV) – ∆(TS)
If the process is carried out at constant temperature and pressure, then
∆(TS) = T∆S and ∆(PV) = P∆V
∆GTp = ∆E + P∆V – T∆S or
∆G = ∆H – T∆S
The above equation is called Gibbs – Helmholtz equation and it helps to predict the spontaneity of a process.
Free energy change and spontaneity:
For a system which is not isolated with surroundings
∆Stotal = ∆Ssystem + ∆Ssurrounding …………………… (1)
when reaction takes place at constant temperature and constant pressure, heat is supplied to surrounding.
∆Ssurrounding = \(\frac { -q_{ p } }{ T } \) = \(\frac { -\Delta H }{ T } \), (qp = ∆H at constant pressure) ………………………. (2)
From eqns. (1) and (2),
∆Stotal = ∆Ssystem – \(\frac { -\Delta H }{ T } \) …………….. (3)
Since, all the quantities on the right – hand side are system properties, the subscript ‘system’ is not used in equations.
Multiplying both sides by T, we get
T∆Stotal = T∆S – ∆H, (Where, ∆S = ∆Ssystem)
or -T∆Sc = ∆H – T∆S …………………… (4)
For Gibbs free energy (G),
G = H – TS
∆G = ∆H – T∆S – S∆T ………………… (5)
or ∆G = ∆H – T∆Stotal
For the process taking place at constant temperature and constant pressure, eqn. (5) will be
So that, ∆G = ∆H – T∆S ……………………… (6)
Comparing eqns. (4) and (6),
∆G = – T∆Stotal ………………….. (7)
So that, ∆G = – ve(for sontaneous chnages)
We know that, for spontaneous chemical change ∆Stotal is positive. Eqn. (7) shows that the spontaneity of a change can be predicted on the basis of the value of ∆G.
Three special cases may be considered according to eqn. (7):

  1. If AG is negative, the change is spontaneous.
  2. If AG is zero, the system is in equilibrium.
  3. If AG is positive, the change is non – spontaneous.

Conditions for spontaneity of a process (conditions for ∆G to be – ve):

  1. If AH is negative and AS is positive, AG would certainly be negative and the process will be spontaneous.
  2. If AH is negative and AS is also negative, then AG would be negative if AH is greater than TAS in magnitude.

MP Board Solutions

Question 5.
Explain the determination of internal energy ∆U by Bomb calorimeter under the following heads:

  1. Labelled diagram of the apparatus,
  2. Explanation of the process
  3. Calculations.

Answer:
Experimental determination of change in internal energy:
The change in internal energy in a chemical reaction is determined with the help of an apparatus called bomb calorimeter. (MPBoardSolutions.com) It is made up of steel so that it can bear high pressure developed during the chemical reaction taking place in the calorimeter. The inner side of the steel vessel is coated with some non – oxidizable metal like Pt or Au. It is also fitted with a pressure tight screw – cap. The two electrodes are connected to each other through a platinum wire dipped in a platinum cup.

A small known mass of the substance under investigation is taken in the platinum cup. The bomb is filled with excess of oxygen under a pressure of 20 – 25 atm and sealed. Now it is kept in an insulated water – bath which contains a known amount of water. The water – bath is also provided with a thermometer and mechanical stirrer.

The initial temperature of water is noted and the reaction (i.e., combustion of the sample) is started by passing an electric current through the Pt wire. (MPBoardSolutions.com) The heat evolved during the chemical reaction raises the temperature of water which is recorded by the thermometer. When rise in temperature and the heat capacity of the calorimeter are known, the amount of heat evolved in the chemical reaction can be calculated. This will be equal to the change in internal energy (∆E) of the reaction.

MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 6 Thermodynamics img 11

Calculation: Let W = Mass of calorimeter in gm, w = Water equivalent of calorimeter, bomb stirrer, etc. t°C = Rise in temperature, x = Mass of compound ignited in gm and m = Molecular mass of the compound.
Heat produced by x gm compound = (W + w) t calories
∴ Heat of combustion of the compound at constant volume,
∆U or ∆E = \(-\frac { m }{ x } \) (W + w) t calorie/mol.
Heat is evolved so negative sign is used.
Using the equation ∆H = ∆U + ∆ng RT heat of combustion ∆H at constant pressure can be caluculated.

MP Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions

MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions States of Matter

MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 States of Matter

States of Matter Important Questions

States of Matter Objective Type Questions

Question 1.
Choose the correct answer:

Question 1.
At the time of opening the bottle of ammonia, it can be recognized from a distance because:
(a) It is very reactive
(b) It diffuses very fast
(c) It possess a pungent smell
(d) It is lighter than air
Answer:
(b) It diffuses very fast

Question 2.
Who established the relationship between density and rate of diffusion of a gas:
(a) Boyle
(b) Charles
(c) Graham
(d) Avogadro
Answer:
(c) Graham

Question 3.
The value of in Calorie (approx):
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 4
Answer:
(b) 2

MP Board Solutions

Question 4.
Value of gas constant R is:
(a) 8314 × 107 ergs/degree/mol
(b) 83.14 × 106 ergs/degree/mol
(c) 83.14 × 105 ergs/degree/mol
(d) 8.314 × 107 ergs/degree/mol
Answer:
(d) 8.314 × 107 ergs/degree/mol

Question 5.
Absolute temperature is:
(a) 0° C
(b) – 100° C
(c) – 273° C
(d) – 373°C
Answer:
(c) – 273° C

Question 6.
To get general gas equation which two laws are combined:
(a) Charle’s law and Dalton’s law
(b) Graham’s law and Dalton’s law
(c) Boyle’s law and Charle’s law
(d) Avogadro’s law and Dalton’s law
Answer:
(c) Boyle’s law and Charle’s law

Question 7.
Which is correct in the following:
(a) r.m.s. velocity = 0.9212 × average velocity
(b) average velocity = 0.9212 × r.m.s. velocity
(c) r.m.s. velocity = 0.9013 × average velocity
(d) average velocity = 0.9013 × r.m.s. velocity
Answer:
(b) average velocity = 0.9212 × r.m.s. velocity

Question 8.
At constant volume the pressure of monoatomic gas depends on:
(a) Thickness of the wall of the vessel
(b) Absolute temperature
(c) Atomic number of the element
(d) Number of valence electron.
Answer:
(b) Absolute temperature

MP Board Solutions

Question 9.
Behaviour of real gases near to that of ideal gases if:
(a) Temperature is low
(b) Pressure is high
(c) Low pressure and high temperature
(d) Gas is monoatomic
Answer:
(c) Low pressure and high temperature

Question 10.
At mountains of high altitude, water boils at lower temperature because of:
(a) Low atmospheric pressure
(b) High atmospheric pressure
(c) Hydrogen bonding in water is more strong at height
(d) Water vapour is lighter than liquid
Answer:
(a) Low atmospheric pressure

Question 11.
If molecular masses of two gases A and B are 16 and 64 respectively ratio of rates of diffusion A and B will be:
(a) 1:4
(b) 4:1
(c) 2:1
(d) 1:2
Answer:
(c) 2:1

Question 12.
Gases deviate from ideal behavior at high pressure because:
(a) At pressure number of colloision of molecule increases
(b) Attraction between molecules increases at high pressure
(c) Size of molecule decreases at high pressure.
(d) Molecule become steady at high pressure.
Answer:
(b) Attraction between molecules increases at high pressure

MP Board Solutions

Question 13.
Distance on which magnitude of energy is minimum is called:
(a) Atomic radius
(b) Lattice radius
(c) Critical distance
(d) Molecular distance
Answer:
(a) Atomic radius

Question 14.
Diffusion rate of methane is twice than that of gas x, molecular mass of gas x will be:
(a) 64
(b) 32
(c) 40
(d) 8.0
Answer:
(a) 64

Question 15.
Part of van der Waals’ equation which illustrate the inter molecule force of real gases:
(a) (V – b)
(b) RT
(c) [P+\(\frac{a}{VL}\)]
(d) (RT)-1
Answer:
(c) [P+\(\frac{a}{VL}\)]

Question 16.
Temperature which is same in both Celsius scale and Fahrenheit scale:
(a) 0°C
(b) 32°F
(c) – 40°C
(d) 40°C
Answer:
(c) – 40°C

MP Board Solutions

Question 2.
Fill in the blanks:

  1. With increase in temperature viscocity ………………………..
  2. S.I. unit of surface tension is ………………………….
  3. ………………………… is more heavy among dry air and moist air
  4. AT N.T.P., volume of gas equal to Avogrado’s numbers ………………………….
  5. Unit of vander Waals’ constant ‘b’ is ………………………..
  6. …………………………. has minimum value among average velocity, root mean square velocity and most probable velocity
  7. Process of diffusion of air from the puncture of an autommobile tube is known as ……………………….
  8. …………………………… is obtained if a graph is plotted between volume and absolute temperature
  9. Apparatus used for measuring gas pressure is …………………………
  10. S.I. unit of viscosity is ………………………….
  11. Absolute temperature of ideal gas is ………………………… to the average kinetic theory of the molecule.
  12. A liquid which is permanently super cooled is called ………………………..
  13. According to kinetic theory, the average kinetic energy of a gas is directly proportional to its …………………………. temperature.
  14. The kinetic energy of one mole of a gas is equal to …………………………..
  15. Root mean square velocity is …………………………..

Answer:

  1. Decreases
  2. Nm-1
  3. Dry air
  4. 22.41
  5. Litre/mol
  6. Most probable velocity
  7. Effiission
  8. Straight line
  9. Monometer
  10. Nm-2S
  11. Proportional
  12. Glass
  13. Absolute
  14. \(\frac{3}{2}\) RT
  15. \(\sqrt { \frac { 3PV }{ M } } \) or \(\sqrt { \frac { 3RT }{ M } } \)

MP Board Solutions

Question 3.
Answer in one word/sentence:

  1. Vaporization of ethanol is faster as compared to water?
  2. The resistance produced in the flow of a liquid is called?
  3. Unit of surface tension is?
  4. Molecular mass of two gases A and B are 36 and 64 respectively. What will be the ratio of diffusion of the two gases?
  5. Write S.I. unit of pressure?
  6. If rate of diffusion of oxygen is r, then tell the rate of diffusion of hydrogen?
  7. Compressibility factor of ideal gases is?
  8. Vander Waals’ equation is?
  9. Adiabatic expression of ideal gas is?
  10. Number of electron in outer most orbit of crypton is?

Answer:

  1. Value of molar vaporization enthalpy of water is high
  2. Viscosity
  3. Dyne per cm
  4. 4:3
  5. pascal
  6. r1 = 4r [\(\frac { r_{ 1 } }{ r_{ 2 } } \) = \(\sqrt { \frac { m_{ 2 } }{ m_{ 1 } } } \)]
  7. 1.0
  8. [P + \(\frac { an^{ 2 } }{ V^{ 2 } } \)] [V – nb] = nRT
  9. q = 0
  10. 8 electron

Question 4.
Match the following:
[I]
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 States of Matter img 1
Answer:

  1. (f)
  2. (a)
  3. (b)
  4. (a)
  5. (d)
  6. (c)

[II]
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 States of Matter img 2
Answer:

  1. (d)
  2. (c)
  3. (e)
  4. (a)
  5. (b)

States of Matter Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
The resistance produced in the flow of a liquid is called?
Answer:
Viscosity.

Question 2.
Unit of surface tension is?
Answer:
Dyne per cm.

Question 3.
Write S.I. unit of pressure?
Answer:
Pascal.

MP Board Solutions

Question 4.
Name the scientist who developed relation between density and rate of diffusion of gas?
Answer:
Graham’s.

Question 5.
What is the Value of gas constant in S.I. unit?
Answer:
8.314 JK-1 mol-1

Question 6.
1 Pascal is equal to?
Answer:
1 Nm2.

Question 7.
Who established the relationship between density and rate of diffusion of gas?
Answer:
Graham’s.

Question 8.
Absolute temperature is?
Answer:
~273°C.

Question 9.
The value of R in calorie (approx)?
Answer:
2.

MP Board Solutions

Question 10.
Behaviour of real gases is near to that of ideal gases of?
Answer:
Low pressure and high temperature.

Question 11.
At mountains or high altitude, water boils at lower temperature because of?
Answer:
Low atmospheric pressure.

Question 12.
To get general gas equation. Which two laws are combined?
Answer:
Boyle’s law and Charle’s law.

Question 13.
At constant volume the pressure of gas depends upon?
Answer:
On absolute temperature.

Question 14.
Part of van der Waals’ equation which illustrate the inter – molecular forces of real gases?
Answer:
P + \(\frac { a }{ V^{ 2 } } \).

Question 15.
Temperature which is same in both Celsius scale and fahrenheit scale?
Answer:
– 40°C.

MP Board Solutions

Question 16.
What is the formula for kinetic theory of gases?
Answer:
PV = \(\frac{1}{3}\) mnv2.

Question 17.
The average kinetic energy of gases is proportional to?
Answer:
Absolute temperature.

Question 18.
What is the kinetic energy of 1 mole of gas?
Answer:
\(\frac{3}{2}\) RT.

Question 19.
What is the formula of Root mean square velocity?
Answer:
\(\sqrt { \frac { 3PV }{ M } } \) or \(\sqrt { \frac { 3RT }{ M } } \).

Question 20.
Which type of Crystals are diamond and ice?
Answer:
Diamond – Covalent crystal
Ice – Ionic crystal.

MP Board Solutions

Question 21.
What is Critical temperature?
Answer:
The temperature above which the gas cannot be liquefied.

Question 22.
Poise is the unit of which basic property?
Answer:
Viscosity (1 poise = dynes/cm2s).

Question 23.
What is the unit of a (volume correction), b (pressure correction) in van der Waals’ equation?
Answer:
a (Volume correction) = atm L2 mol-2
b (Pressure correction) = L mol-1

States of Matter Short Answer Type Question – I

Question 1.
Explain Anisotropic and Isotropic?
Answer:
Anisotropic:
The crystalline solid exhibits different physical properties in the , three direction. In this way, crystalline solids are called anisotropic.

Isotropic:
The amorphous solid exhibits same physical properties in all directions. Due to this property they are called isotropic.

Question 2.
Define the term absolute zero? Write its value in centigrade scale?
Answer:
The lowest possible temperature at which all the gases are supposed to occupy zero volume is called absolute zero. The actual value of absolute zero is – 273.15°C. It is , related to temperature in centigrade scale by this relation.
t°C = t + 273 K.

Question 3.
What is unit cell?
Answer:
Smallest unit is a crystal which is formed by systematic arrangements of constituent particles as atom, molecule or ions, is called unit cell. The unit cell generates the whole lattice translation.

MP Board Solutions

Question 4.
What is crystal lattice?
Answer:
Geometry or shape of any crystal in which unit cells are arranged systematically and three dimensionally is called crystal lattice.

Question 5.
How does volume of balloon used for weather study, change with height?
Answer:
At height, atmospheric pressure decreases. The volume of gas inside the balloon increases with decrease in pressure. A stage comes when due to decrease in atmospheric pressure in larger extent, volume increases and balloon bursts.

Question 6.
In winter season, a layer of ice is formed in the lake but the fishes and other organisms present in the lake remain alive. Why?
Answer:
The maximum density of water is at 4°C but below 4°C temperature the density decreases. When the temperature of lake decreases then the water present on the surface become denser and goes downward. This occurs upto the level when the temperature rises to t 4°C. (MPBoardSolutions.com) If the temperature of the upper layer is less than 4°C, the water remains on the upper surface and converts into ice slowly and the water below the surface remains as such due to high density and remains as liquid. That is why, the fishes and micro – organisms remains alive.

MP Board Solutions

Question 7.
Why is the density of hot gas is less in comparison to cold gas?
Answer:
According to Charle’s law, volume of any gas of definite mass is directly proportional to absolute temperature. On increasing the temperature volume of gas also increases, but increase in volume results decrease in density.

Question 8.
Why one feel sluggish, breathlessness and headache at high altitude?
Answer:
At high altitude, the pressure is less and the corresponding volume of air is more, Thus, air becomes less dense at high altitude and the oxygen in air becomes insufficient for normal breathing. This causes what is known as altitude sickness.

Question 9.
What is Critical temperature?
Answer:
The temperature to which gas must be cooled before it can be liquefied by com-pression is known as critical temperature and is represented by Tc.
Example: Critical temperature of CO2 gas is 31.1°C or 304.1K.

Question 10.
What is critical pressure and critical volume?
Answer:
Critical pressure:
The minimum pressure required to liquefy the gas at its critical temperature is known as critical pressure and denoted by Pc.
Example: Critical pressure of CO2 is 72.8 atm.
Critical Volume: The volume occupied by 1 mole of gas at the critical temperature and critical pressure is known as critical volume and denoted by Vc.
Example: Critical volume of C02 gas is 94 cm3/mol.

MP Board Solutions

Question 11.
Why are tyres of automobile inflated to lesser pressure in summer than in winter?
Answer:
As the automobiles move the temp, of tyre increases due to friction against the road. Consequently the air inside the tyre expand thereby the pressure exerted by air against the wall of tyre also increases. (MPBoardSolutions.com) In summer, there is increase in temperature hence increase in pressure is much more. This may leads bursting at tyre. In order to check bursting of tyre, the tyre are inflated with looser amount of air than in winter.

Question 12.
What would be the S.I. unit for the quantity PV2T2/n?
Answer:
\(\frac { PV^{ 2 }T^{ 2 } }{ n } \) = \(\frac { (Nm^{ -2 })(m^{ 3 })^{ 2 }(K)^{ 2 } }{ mol } \) = Nm4K2mol-1.

Question 13.
Explain on the basis of Charle’s law that minimum possible temperature is – 273°C
Answer:
According to Charle’s law:
Vt = V0 [1 + \(\frac { t }{ 273 } \)]
At t = – 273°C Vt = V0 [ 1 – \(\frac { 273}{ 273 } \)] = 0
Therefore at – 273°C, the volume of gas becomes 0 and below this temperature the volume becomes – ve which is meaningless.

Question 14.
Why are liquid drops spherical?
Answer:
Small drops are spherical in shape:
Surface tension tries to decrease the surface area of a given liquid for a given volume. Therefore, drops of liquid are spherical because for a given volume sphere has minimum volume.

MP Board Solutions

Question 15.
What is Root Mean Square velocity and Average velocity?
Answer:
1. Root Mean Square velocity:
It is defined as root of, mean of, square of, velocity of large no. of molecules of same gas. It is denoted by V.
V = \(\sqrt { \frac { v_{ 1 }^{ 2 }+v_{ 2 }^{ 2 }+v_{ 3 }^{ 2 }…..v_{ n }^{ 2 } }{ n } } \)
2. Average velocity:
It is defined as average of, velocity of all the molecules present in gas. It is denoted by Va.
Va = \(\frac { v_{ 1 }+v_{ 2 }+v_{ 3 }…..v_{ n } }{ n } \)

Question 16.
Explain the difference between Evaporation and Boiling?
Answer:
Differences between Evaporation and Boiling:
Evaporation:

  1. Evaporation decreases spontaneously and occur at all temperatures.
  2. Evaporation is a process of the liquid surface.
  3. Evaporation is a slow process.

Boiling:

  1. Boling takes place only when the vapour pressure of this liquid becomes equal to atmospheric pressure.
  2. Boling is a process of the entire liquid and occurs in the form of bubbles inside the liquid.
  3. Boling is a fast process.

Question 17.
What do you mean by compressibility factor of gases?
Answer:
The ratio of observed volume and caluculated volume of a gas at a given temperature and pressure is known as compressibility factor. It is denoted by Z.
Thus,
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 States of Matter img 3
or Z = \(\frac { PV }{ nRT } \)
For ideal gases, PV = nRrt
∴For ideal gas, Z = 1.

Question 18.
What is the effect of pressure on melting of ice?
Answer:
By increasing pressure there occur tremendous increase in kinetic energy of molecules, due to this at low temperature, the molecules move freely, hence on increasing pressure the ice below its melting point converted into liquid.

Question 19.
Mountaineers carry oxygen cylinders with them at the lance of climbing mountains. Why?
Answer:
Atmospheric pressure is relatively low at heights. Quantity of oxygen is low in mountain and climbers feel difficulties in breathing. Therefore, they carry oxygen cylinders along with them.

MP Board Solutions

Question 20.
Define viscosity of liquid. Explain the effect of temperature on viscosity?
Answer:
Resistance in flow of any liquid is called viscosity. Such resistance is produced due to internal friction of different layers of liquid. (MPBoardSolutions.com) When temperature is increased, the cohesive force, which opposes liquid flow, decreases and molecular velocity increases. Due to this, viscosity decreases.

Question 21.
On same temperature when ether and water pour on different hands, then ether seems to be more colder than water. Why?
Answer:
In ether the intermolecular attractive forces between the molecules is less in comparison to water, so ether evaporates more quickly than water and the energy required for evaporation is absorbed from hand, that is why ether seems to be colder.

Question 22.
What is surface tension? Write its S.L unit?
Answer:
It is an important property of a liquid which is related with interatomic attraction force. The molecules present inside the liquid is attracted equally by molecules present in all direction. (MPBoardSolutions.com)
But molecule present on the surface of liquid is attracted by molecules at bottom and in sides, as a result the molecules at surface are pulled downward and nature of surface is to lessen the area. Due to compactness, the surface of liquid behaves as a stretched membrane. This effect is called surface tension.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 States of Matter img 4
“Surface tension is a measure of work which is necessary to increase the unit cross-section of liquid.”
Its S.I. unit is Joule/metre2 or Newton metre.

Question 23.
The compressibility factor Z of a gas is as follows:

  1. What will be the value of Z for an ideal gas?
  2. What will be the effect on Z above Boyle’s temperature for real gas?

Answer:

  1. For ideal gas, compressibility factor Z = 1.
  2. Above Boyle’s temperature, real gases show positive deviation. So, Z > 1.

Question 24.
What is Ideal gas? Write its characteristics?
Answer:
Ideal Gas:
The gases which obey Ideal gas equation under all conditions of temperature and pressure is called ideal gas.
Characteristics:

  1. At constant temperature, product of pressure and volume of ideal gas are always constant. Therefore, horizontal line should be obtained in a graph. If graph is plotted between PV and P.
  2. If an ideal gas is called at constant pressure, then its volume requestly decreased and become at – 273°C.
  3. There is no force of attraction between gas molecules.
  4. The compressibility factor of ideal gas is equal to one.

MP Board Solutions

Question 25.
What is Real gas? What are its properties?
Answer:
Gas which does not obey Boyle’s law, Charle’s law and Ideal gas equation strictly is called Real gas.
The gases which does not follow ideal gas equation behaviour under all condtions of temperature and pressure called real gas.
Properties:

  1. They do not follow gas law at low temperature and high pressure.
  2. At – 273°C their volume is not zero because most of the gases converted into liquid on cooling.
  3. The attractive force between gas molecule is negligible.
  4. The compressibility factor of real gas is not equal to zero.

States of Matter Short Answer Type Questions – II

Question 1.
State and explain Boyle’s Law?
Answer:
According to this law: “At constant temperature, the volume of a known amount of gas is inversely proportional to the pressure.”
P ∝ \(\frac{1}{V}\) (at constant temperature)
⇒P = Constant × \(\frac{1}{V}\)
⇒ PV = Constant.
Thus, “at constant temperature, product of volume of a given mass of gas and pressure remain constant.”
At initial condition, P1V1 = K …………….. (1)
At final condition, P2V2 = K ………………. (2)
From eqn. (1) and eqn. (2).
P1V1 = P2V2

Question 2.
What is the nature of gas constant R?
Answer:
We know that,
PV = nRT
R = \(\frac{PV}{nT}\)
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 States of Matter img 5

Question 3.
Explain concept of absolute zero from Charle’s law?
Answer:
Charle’s law: According to this law “At a constant pressure the volume of certain mass of a gas increases or decreases by of its previous volume for every 1°C changes in temperature (increases or decreases).”
Suppose V0 is the volume of certain mass of gas at 0°C then,
Volume of the gas at 1°C temperature = V0 [1 + \(\frac{1}{273}\)]
Volume of the gas at t°C temperature = V0 [1 + \(\frac{t}{273}\)]
Volume of the gas at – 1°C temperature = V0 [1 – \(\frac{t}{273}\)]
Volume of gas at – 273°C = V0 [1 – \(\frac{273}{273}\)] = 0
Thus decrease of temperature results in the decrease in volume of the gas and ultimately the volume should become zero at – 273°C. (MPBoardSolutions.com) This lowest possible temperature at which all the gases are suppossed to occupy zero volume is called absolute zero.

MP Board Solutions

Question 4.
What is Gay Lussac’s law?
Answer:
Gay Lussac law:
According to this law, “At constant volume the pressure of a given mass of gas is directly proportional to its absolute temperature.”
P ∝ T (Mass and volume are constant)
⇒ P = K × T
⇒ \(\frac{P}{T}\) = K
Suppose at initial condition,
\(\frac { P_{ 1 } }{ T_{ 1 } } \) = K
At final condition,
\(\frac { P_{ 2 } }{ T_{ 2 } } \) = K
From eqn. (1) and (2),
\(\frac { P_{ 1 } }{ T_{ 1 } } \) = \(\frac { P_{ 2 } }{ T_{ 2 } } \)

Question 5.
State and explain Avogadro’s law?
Answer:
According to this law, “Equal volume of all gases under identical conditions of temperature and pressure contain equal number of molecules”.
V ∝N (at constant temperature and pressure) …………. (1)
At constant temperature and pressure number of moles of a gas n is directly proportional to number of molecules N.
Hence, N ∝n
⇒\(\frac{V}{n}\) = Constant
Suppose at initial condition volume of gas is V1 and no. of mole of gas is n1 hence
\(\frac { V_{ 1 } }{ n_{ 1 } } \) = Constant …………… (2)
Similarly at final condition no. of moles and volume of gas is n2 and V2, hence
\(\frac { V_{ 2 } }{ n_{ 2 } } \) = Constant …………… (3)
From eqns. (2) and (3)
\(\frac { V_{ 1 } }{ n_{ 1 } } \) = \(\frac { V_{ 2 } }{ n_{ 2 } } \)

Question 6.
Write the applications of Graham’s law of diffusion?
Answer:
1. To determine the density and molecular weight of a gas:
If the time of diffusion and density of a gas is known and the time of diffusion of other gas is known, then the density and molecular weight of other gas can be calculated.

2. Marsh gas indicator:
The persons working in the mines get aware by the leakage of the poisonous gases by this indicator.

3. In separation of gases:
The gases can be separated easily due to difference in the rate of diffusion of gases.

4. Smell:
Bad smell and poisonous gases get separated due to diffusion in air.

MP Board Solutions

Question 7.
Derive Charle’s law on the basis of Kinetic gas theory?
Answer:
According to Kinetic gas theory, kinetic energy of gases is directly proportional to absolute temperature.
K.E ∝T
\(\frac{1}{2}\) mnv2 ∝ T
⇒\(\frac{1}{2}\) mnv2 = KT
⇒\(\frac{3}{2}\) × \(\frac{1}{3}\) mnv2 = KT
⇒\(\frac{1}{3}\) mnv2 = \(\frac{2}{3}\) KT
⇒PV = \(\frac{2}{3}\) KT,
⇒V = \(\frac{2}{3}\) \(\frac{K}{P}\).T
At constant pressure \(\frac{2}{3}\) \(\frac{K}{P}\) = constant
V = constant ∝ T
V ∝ T

Question 8.
How are rates of diffusion of different gases compared?
Answer:
Let two gases are A and B, equal volume V of both gases diffuse in times tA and tB respectively.
Rate of diffusion of gas A,
r A = \(\frac { V }{ t_{ A } } \)
Rate of diffusion of gas B,
r B = \(\frac { V }{ t_{ B } } \)
∴\(\frac { r_{ A } }{ r_{ B } } \) = \(\sqrt { \frac { d_{ B } }{ d_{ A } } } \)
From equation (3) and equation (4),
\(\frac { t_{ B } }{ t_{ A } } \) = \(\sqrt { \frac { d_{ B } }{ d_{ A } } } \).

MP Board Solutions

Question 9.
The ratio between the rate of diffusion of an unknown gas (x) s&d CO2 Is 40:45 Find out the molecular mass of unknown gas (x).
Solution:
According to Graham’s law of diffusion,
\(\frac { r_{ 1 } }{ r_{ 2 } } \) = \(\sqrt { \frac { M_{ 2 } }{ M_{ 1 } } } \)
Given, r1:r2 = 40:45 M2(CO2) = 44, M1 = ?
⇒\(\frac{40}{45}\) = \(\sqrt { \frac { 44 }{ M_{ 1 } } } \)
⇒ \(\frac { (40)^{ 2 } }{ (45)^{ 2 } } \) = \(\sqrt { \frac { 44 }{ M_{ 1 } } } \)
M1 = \(\frac { 44\times 45\times 45 }{ 40\times 40 } \) = 55.68.

Question 10.
If relative density of chlorine is 36, diffusion of 25 volume of hydrogen takes 40 sec. under the condition how much time will be taken for the diffusion of 30 volume of chlorine?
Solution:
Hydrogen d1 = 1, r1 = \(\frac{25}{40}\), Chlorine d2 = 36, r2 = \(\frac{30}{t}\)
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 States of Matter img 6

States of Matter Long Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
State and explain Graham’s law of diffusion?
Answer:
Graham’s Law of Diffusion:
The rate of diffusion of gas under similar condition of temperature and pressure is inversely proportional to the square roots of their density.”
Thus, Rate of diffusion ∝\(\frac { 1 }{ \sqrt { density } } \)
⇒r ∝\(\frac { 1 }{ \sqrt { d } } \)
If the rate of diffusion of two gases are r1 and r2 and their density are d1 and d2 respectively.
r1 = K \(\frac { 1 }{ \sqrt { d_{ 1 } } } \)
r1 = K \(\frac { 1 }{ \sqrt { d_{ 2 } } } \)
\(\frac { r_{ 1 } }{ r_{ 2 } } \) = \(\sqrt { \frac { d_{ 2 } }{ d_{ 1 } } } \)
∵ M. Mass = 2 × Vapour density = \(\frac { Molecular\quad mass }{ 2 } \) = Vapour density
\(\frac { r_{ 1 } }{ r_{ 2 } } \) = \(\sqrt { \frac { d_{ 2 } }{ d_{ 1 } } } \) = \(\sqrt { \frac { M_{ 2 } }{ M_{ 1 } } } \).

MP Board Solutions

Question 2.
Write difference between Real and Ideal gas?
Answer:
Differences between Ideal gas and Real gas:
Ideal gas:

  1. Ideal gas obeys die equation, PV = RT at all temperature and pressure.
  2. There is no ideal gas, they are hypothetical.
  3. Total volume of gas molecules is supposed to be negligible in comparison to total volume.
  4. There is no attraction force between gas molecules.

Real gas:

  1. Real gas obeys PV = RT only at low pressure and high temperature.
  2. All existing gases are real gases and show deviation from ideal gas behaviour, positive or negative.
  3. Volume of gas molecules are not negligible in comparison to total volume.
  4. Gas molecules attract each other.Therefore, total pressure is less than ideal gas.

Question 3.
What are the main differences between Crystalline and Amorphous solids?
Answer:
Differences between Crystalline and Amorphous solids:
Crystalline:

  1. In it the constituent particles are arranged in regular manner.
  2. Melting point of crystalline solid is fixed.
  3. They are an anisotropic i.e. some of their physical properties are different in different directions.
  4. They are rigid and their shape is not distorted by mild distorting tone.
  5. They have a definite heat of fusion.
  6. They are true solid in real meaning.

Amorphous solids:

  1. In it the constituent particles are arranged in irregular manner.
  2. Melting point of amorphous solid is not fixed.
  3. They are Isotropic i.e. their physical properties are same in all directions.
  4. They are not very rigid, they can be distorted easily.
  5. They do not have definite heat of fusion.
  6. They are super cooled liquid.

MP Board Solutions

Question 4.
Using state equation clarify that the density of a gas at given temperature is proportional to pressure of gas?
Answer:
PV = nRT
PV = \(\frac{m}{M}\) RT,
Or P = \(\frac{mRT}{VM}\),
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 5 States of Matter img 7
Or P = \(\frac{dRT}{M}\)
Or d = \(\frac{PM}{RT}\)
if T = known constant
∴d ∝P

Question 5.
Derive Ideal gas equation on the basis of kinetic gas equation?
Answer:
According to Kinetic gas theory, “ The average kinetic energy of gas molecules is directly proportional to absolute temperature.”
Average Kinetic energy = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mnv2
\(\frac{1}{2}\) mnv2 ∝ T
⇒\(\frac{1}{2}\) mnv2 = KT
⇒\(\frac{3}{2}\) × \(\frac{1}{3}\) mnv2 = KT
⇒\(\frac{1}{3}\) mnv2 = \(\frac{2}{3}\) KT,
⇒\(\frac{PV}{T}\) = R
⇒ PV = RT.

MP Board Solutions

Question 6.
Explanation of Dalton’s law on the basis of Kinetic gas theory?
Answer:
If the volume of container V litre and no. of moles of gas A is n1 ar.d mass of each particles in m1 R.M.S. velocity is V1 then,
PA = \(\frac{1}{3}\) \(\frac { m_{ 1 }n_{ 1 }v_{ 1 }^{ 2 } }{ V } \)
Kinetic gas equation PV = \(\frac{1}{3}\) mnv2
For B gas number of moles = n2
Mass = m2
R.M.S. Velocity = v2
PB = \(\frac{1}{3}\) \(\frac { m_{ 2 }n_{ 2 }v_{ 2 }^{ 2 } }{ V } \)
If both the gases are kept in same container total pressure of mixture
P = \(\frac{1}{3}\) \(\frac { m_{ 1 }n_{ 1 }v_{ 1 }^{ 2 } }{ V } \) + \(\frac{1}{3}\) \(\frac { m_{ 2 }n_{ 2 }v_{ 2 }^{ 2 } }{ V } \)
⇒ P = PA + PB
so in general, for more than two gases
P = PA + PB + PC + …………………..
It is Daltons law of partial pressure.

MP Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions

MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure

MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure

Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure Important Questions

Chemical Bonding And Molecular Structure Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
What type of bond is present generally in same atoms?
Answer:
Covalent bond.

Question 2.
Which hybridization is present in ammonia (NH3)?
Answer:
sp3.

Question 3.
What is the reason for high boiling point of water?
Answer:
Presence of H – bond between molecules of water.

Question 4.
What is the dipole moment of C02?
Answer:
Zero.

MP Board Solutions

Question 5.
What type of bonds are directional?
Answer:
Covalent bonds.

Question 6.
What is the bond angle in water?
Answer:
104°5′.

Question 7.
What is the structure of [Ni(CN)4]2-?
Answer:
Square planner.

Question 8.
Which bond is present in s – s overlapping?
Answer:
cr (Sigma) bond.

Question 9.
What is the structure of diamond?
Answer:
Crystal lattice (Tetrahedral).

Question 10.
Which bond is present in sidewise overlapping of p – p orbitals?
Answer:
n – bond.

MP Board Solutions

Question 11.
Which type of hybridization found in PCl5?
Answer:
sjy’d hybridization.

Question 12.
What is full form of LCAO?
Answer:
Linear Combination of Atomic Orbitals.

Question 13.
What is the structure of NH3?
Answer:
Trigonal bipyramidal.

Question 14.
What is dipole moment (µ) of a linear covalent molecule?
Answer:
Zero.

Question 15.
What is the unit of electron gain enthalpy?
Answer:
eV per atom or kJ per mole.

Question 16.
What is the formula of bond order?
Answer:
Bond order = \(\frac{1}{2}\) (Nb – Na).

Question 17.
What is the symbol of superoxide and peroxide?
Answer:
Superoxide – O2 and peroxide – O2-2.

Question 18.
What do you mean by bond order?
Answer:
The number of electrons present between two atoms of molecules or ions.

Question 19.
More polarizing power and more polarisability increases which property of molecule?
Answer:
Covalent property.

MP Board Solutions

Question 20.
What is determined by Born – Haber cycle?
Answer:
Lattice energy.

Question 21.
What is full form of VSEPR?
Answer:
Valence Shell Electron Pair Repulsion.

Chemical Bonding And Molecular Structure Short Answer Type Questions – I

Question 1.
What is the electronic theory of covalency? Write its main postulates?
Answer:
The electronic theory of valency and its main postulates are as follows:

  1. The covalency of any element depends upon the no.of electrons present in its valence shell.
  2. All the elements have the tendency to acquire the nobel gas configuration.
  3. The electrons present in valence shell are called valence electrons and when the electron comes out than the vacant space is called kernel.
  4. If an element is unstable, than it works for its stability for this it gives and takes the electron. On this basis the bonds are of three types:
    1. Ionic bond
    2. Covalent bond and
    3. Co – ordinate bond.

Question 2.
What do you mean by lone pair of electron?
Answer:
The electron pair which present in the valence orbital of the element and does not take part bond formation is called lone pair electron.
Example: In the H2O atom the lone pairs of electrons on an atom:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure img 1
Bond pairs = 2, Lone pair electrons = 2.

Question 3.
What do you mean by dipole moment?
Answer:
Dipole moment is defined as, the product ofthe magnitude of charge on any one of the atoms and distance between them. It is represented by Greek letter µ(mu).
Mathematically, dipole moment is expressed as µ = e × d
Where, e is charge on any one of the atoms and d is distance between the atoms.
As e is of the order of 10-10 esu while d is of the order of 10-8 cm µ is of the order 1018 esu cm and this unit of p is known as Debye (D). Thus,
1D = 1 × 10-18esu cm

Question 4.
Is He2 molecule is possible? Clearify it.
Answer:
He2 molecule is not possible.
2He → 1s2
Two electrons are present in Is orbital of He atom. It is complete and stable orbital and so it cannot accept an extra electron. The bond order is zero. So the formation of He2 molecule is impossible.

Question 5.
What is the total number of σ (sigma) and π (pi) bond are present in following molecules:

  1. C2H2
  2. C2H4

Answer:

  1. C2H2
  2. C2H4

MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure img 2

Question 6.
What do you mean by hydrogen bond?
Answer:
Hydrogen bond is defined as the electrostatic force of attraction which exists between the covalently bonded hydrogen atom of one molecule and the electronegative atom of the other molecule. Hydrogen bond is of two types:

  1. Intermolecular hydrogen bonding
  2. Intra – molecular hydrogen bonding.

Question 7.
At normal temperature H20 is in liquid state but H2S is in gaseous state. Why?
Answer:
Hydrogen bonding affects the physical state of the molecule. For example, H20 and H2S are the hydrides of group 16 elements, but H2O is liquid whereas H2S is gas at room temperature. Actually, H2O fulfils the (MPBoardSolutions.com) condition of hydrogen bonding therefore, in H2O hydrogen bonding is found and they get associated, grow in molecular size and exist in liquid state. The H2S molecule, the magnitude of hydrogen bonding is negligible, therefore, molecules remains separated from each other and acquires gaseous state at room temperature.

MP Board Solutions

Question 8.
Why, viscosity of glycerol is more than ethanol?
Answer:
In ethanol molecule, one hydroxyl gap is present whereas in every glycerol, three OH – groups are present which form hydrogen bond. Therefore, in glycerol hydrogen bond formation is more in comparison to ethanol. That is why, the viscosity of glycerol is more than ethanol.

Question 9.
Why σ – bond is stronger than π – bond?
Answer:
The strength of any bond depends upon the overlapping limit, σ – bonds are formed by axial overlapping whereas σ – bonds are formed by sidewise overlapping. So, the extent of overlapping in σ – bond is more than π – bond. So σ – bond is more stronger than π – bond.

Question 10.
Why HF molecule is more polar than HI?
Answer:
The electronegativity of F is more than I. So, the displacement of electron in covalency in HF is more than HI, resultant the deviation of charges in HF is greater than HI. So, HF is more polar than HI.

Question 11.
C – Cl bond is polar but CCl4 is non – polar, why? Give the reason?
Answer:
In C – Cl bond the electronegativity of Cl is more than C, due to this the electrons in covalent bond shifts towards Cl, due to which partial +ve charge appears on C and partial -ve charge develops once and this bond become polar in nature. Whereas the structure of CCl4 is symmetric, due to which the dipole moment of C – Cl bond cancelled each other. So, CCl4 molecule is non – polar.

Question 12.
What do you mean by resonance?
Answer:
Some compounds cannot be represented by a single definite structure, rather more than one structure is required by none of them is able to explain all the known properties of the compound alone. Thus, the various structures written for a compound to explain the known properties of it completely are called resonating structure. This phenomenon is called resonance.

Question 13.
What are the conditions for resonance?
Answer:
The conditions are as follows:

  1. The heat of formation of each resonating structure should be same.
  2. The arrangement of atoms in each formula should be same.
  3. The number of unpaired electron in each structures should be same.

Question 14.
What is resonance energy ?
Answer:
The difference between the actual energy of the resonance hybrid and the most stable one of the resonating structures is called resonance energy.

MP Board Solutions

Question 15.
Determine the bond order in N2?
Answer:
N2 (14 electrons): The electronic configuration
σ1s2, σ*1s2, σ2s2, σ*2s2, (π2px2 = π2py2), σ2pz2
Bond order = \(\frac{1}{2}\) (Nb – Na) = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × (10 – 4) = 3.

Question 16.
On the basis of molecular orbital theory explain that the Be2 atom is not formed?
Answer:
4Be: Electronic configuration = 1s2 2s2
Be2 (molecule) (4 + 4 = 8e)
Electronic configuration = σ1s2, σ*1s2, σ2s2, σ*2s2
Bond order = \(\frac{1}{2}\) (Nb – Na) = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × (4 – 4) = 0.
So, the Be2 molecule does not formed.

Question 17.
Write the definition of hybridization?
Answer:
The process of intermixing of atomic orbitals of nearly equal energy and proper symmetry giving rise to equal number of new orbitals of same energy is called hybridization and the orbitals so formed hybridized orbital.

Question 18.
What do you understand by lattice energy and solvation energy?
Answer:
Lattice energy:
Once the gaseous ions are formed, the ions of opposite charges come close together and pack up three – dimensionally in a definite geometric pattern to form ionic crystal (Crystal lattice). Since, the packing of ions of opposite charges takes place as a result of attractive force between them, the process is accompanied (MPBoardSolutions.com) with the release of energy referred to as lattice enthalpy. Lattice enthalpy may be defined as; the amount of energy released when one mole of ionic solid is formed by the close packing of its constituents. It is denoted by ∆LH and negative in nature.

Solvation energy:
The energy released when an ion get soluble in water is called solvation energy.

MP Board Solutions

Question 19.
Whose boiling points are high electrovalent compounds or covalent compounds, why?
Answer:
High boiling points: The boiling points of ionic solids are very high. This is due to strong electrostatic force of attraction between the oppositely charged ions. To change the physical state of ionic compounds, high temperature is required.

Question 20.
Why BaS04 is insoluble in water?
Answer:
The solubility of any ionic compound depends upon the lattice energy and solvation energy. If the lattice energy of any compound is more than solvation energy, than ionic compound is insoluble in water. The solvation energy of BaS04 is less than lattice energy. So it is insoluble in water.

Question 21.
If Be – H bond is polar, the dipole moment of Be – H2 is zero. Why?
Answer:
BeH2 is linear. The bond moment present in opposite direction cancelled each other. That is why Be the dipole moment of BeH2 is zero.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure img 3

Chemical Bonding And Molecular Structure Short Answer Type Questions – II

Question 1.
Why ice is lighter than water? Explain?
Or, Density of ice is less than water. Why?
Answer:
Density of ice is less than water:
In ice each oxygen atom is tetrahedrally surrounded by four hydrogen atoms in which two hydrogen atoms are linked to oxgyen atom by covalent bond and other two hydrogen atoms are linked by hydrogen bond.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure img 4

The molecules of H2O are not packed closely. This H gives rise to open cage like structure for ice having a larger volume for the given mass of water. Thus, density of ice is less than water. Ice is actually hydrogen bonded crystal. (MPBoardSolutions.com) Three dimensional structure of protein and nucleic acids like biologically important substances is due to hydrogen bond. Energy of hydrogen bond is between 3.5 kJmol-1 and 8 kJmol-1. Thus, hydrogen bond is stronger than van der Waals force and weaker than covalent bond.

Question 2.
Write the rules of hybridization?
Answer:
Conditions for hybridization: Following are the conditions for hybridization:

  1. The orbitals of one and same atom participate in hybridization. Only the orbitals and not electrons get hybridized.
  2. The energy difference between the hybridizing orbitals should be small.
  3. Promotion of electron is not essential prior to hybridization.
  4. It is not necessary that only the half-filled orbitals may participate in hybridiza¬tion. In some cases, even the filled orbitals may participate in hybridization.

MP Board Solutions

Question 3.
Explain covalent bond with example?
Answer:
Lewis – Langmuir theory:
Lewis and Langmuir suggested that, atoms may combine by sharing of electrons in their outermost shell to complete their respective octet. The shared electrons becomes the property of both the atoms. This types of linkage is known as covalent linkage or covalent bond. Thus,

1. The force which binds atoms of same or different elements by mutual sharing of electrons is called a covalent bond.

2. This type of bond is formed between two similar non-metalic elements (A, A) or (B, B) or dissimilar atoms (A and B).
Example:
Chlorine molecule:
Both the chlorine atoms (Z = 17) contain 7 electrons in their valence shells and short in one electron each. They share one electron pair in which an electron is contributed by both as shown below:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure img 5

Question 4.
Differentiate between atom and ion?
Answer:
Differences between Atom and Ion:
Atom:

  1. Atoms are electroneutral.
  2. Not present in free state.
  3. Takes part in chemical reaction.
  4. No. of e and proton is same.

Ion:

  1. Ions are charged.
  2. Ions present in free state.
  3. Not take part in chemical reaction.
  4. No. of e is more than proton.

Question 5.
Differentiate between Sigma (σ) and Pi (π) bond?
Answer:
Differences between Sigma (σ) and Pi (π) bond:
Sigma (σ) bond:

  1. This bond is formed by end to end or head on overlapping of orbitals along the inter nuclear axis.
  2. This is formed by overlapping of s – s, s – p or p – p orbitals.
  3. Overlapping is large, hence it is strong bond.
  4. Free rotation about σ – bond is possible.
  5. Electron cloud is symmetrical about inter nuclear axis.

Pi (π) bond:

  1. This bond is formed by the sidewise overlapping of orbitals.
  2. This is formed by overlapping of p – p orbitals only.
  3. Overlapping is small, hence it is weak bond.
  4. Free rotation about a π – bond is not possible.
  5. Electron cloud of π – bond is unsymmetrical.

MP Board Solutions

Question 6.
Write difference between s – and p – orbitals?
Answer:
Differences between s – and p – orbitals:
s – orbital:

  1. They are oval – symmetrical.
  2. Non – directional
  3. 1 = 0 and m = 0

p – orbitals:

  1. They are dumbelled shape and lines symmetry of axis.
  2. Directional
  3. l = 1 and m = -1, 0, +1

Question 7.
Explain inter molecular and intramolecular hydrogen bonds with example?
Answer:
Types of hydrogen bond:
1. Intermolecular hydrogen bonding:
When these atoms (hydrogen and electronegative atom) are of different molecules, it is called intermolecular hydrogen bonding as in H2O, HF, C2H5OH etc.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure img 6
Hydrogen bond is represented by dotted lines. Many molecules of HF associates and form (HF)n. On the same way molecules of water and alcohols are linked with hydrogen bonds.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure img 7

2. Intramolecular hydrogen bonding:
If these atoms (hydrogen and electronegative atoms) are present in same molecule, this type of hydrogen bonding is called intramolecular hydrogen bonding.
e.g., o – nitrophenol
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure img 8

Question 8.
Among NH3 and NF3 whose dipole moment is high. Why?
Answer:
Both these molecules have pyramidal shape with one lone pair of electron on nitrogen atom. As fluorine is more electronegative than hydrogen therefore N – F bond should be more polar than N – H bonds. Consequently, the resultant dipole moment of NF3 should be much larger than that of NH3. However, the dipole moment of NH3 (µ = 1.47D) is larger than that of NF3 (µ = 0.24D).

The anomalous behaviour can be explained due to the presence of lone pair on nitrogen. In case of NH3, the orbital dipole due to lone pair of electron and the bond moments of three N – H bonds are in same direction. Therefore, it adds on the resultant dipole moment of the N – H bonds. On the other hand in case of NF3, the orbital dipole moment is in the opposite direction to resultant dipole moment of three N – F bonds. Thus, the lone pair moment cancels the resultant N – F bond moments as shown in figure. Consequently, the dipole moment of NF3 is low.

Question 9.
Is according to following equation, is the hybridization changes in B and N:
BF3 + NH3 → F3B.NH3.
Answer:
In BF3 three bonded pair and zero lone pair electrons are present. Due to this B is sp2 hybridized and in NH3 three bonded pair and one lone pair of electron is present. So, N is sp3 hybridized. After reaction the hybridization of B becomes sp3 but the hybridization of N remains same as N gives its lone pair to B atom.

Question 10.
Explain the change in hybridization in A1 atom in following reaction:
AlCl3 + cl → AlCl4
Answer:
The electronic configuration of Al is:
At ground state = 13Al = ls2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3px1
At excited state = 1s2, 2s2, 2p6 3s2 3px1 y1
In the formation of AlCl3, Al is sp2 hybridized and its geometry is trigonal bipyramidal. Whereas in the formation of AlCl4, due to inclusion of 3pz orbital. Al is sp3 hybridized and its geometry is tetrahedral.

MP Board Solutions

Question 11.
What are the postulates of orbital overlap concept of covalent bond?
Answer:
According to this concept:
1. The covalent bond is formed due to partial overlap of the two half-filled atomic orbitals of the valence shells of the combining atoms. Partial overlap means that a part of the electron cloud of each of the two half – filled domic orbitals becomes common. As a result the probability of finding electrons in the region of overlap is much more at the other places. This reduces the intemuclear repulsion and hence decreases the energy.

2. The orbitals undergoing overlap must have electrons with opposite spins.

3. Greater the extent of overlapping, stronger is the bond formed.

4. Larger the size of the orbitals, less effective is the overlapping and thus weaker is the bond formed.

Question 12.
Explain that the geometry of PCl5 is trigonal bipyramidal and that of IF5 is pyramidal?
Answer:
PCl5: P is central metal atom.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure img 9
As P in PCl5 in sp3d hybridized so its geometry is square pyramidal.
IF5: Central Metal atom is I (Z = 53)
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure img 10
In IF7 , I is sp3d2

Question 13.
What are σ bond and π bond? Explain with example?
Answer:
Hybridization is defined as, “The process of intermixing of atomic orbitals of nearly equal energy and proper symmetry giving rise to equal number of new orbitals of same energy is called hybridization and the orbitals so formed hybridized orbitals.”

Sigma bond:
The bond formed by overlapping of two orbitals along their axis is called a sigma (σ) bond. The line joining the two nuclei of the combining atoms is called the intemuclear axis or bond axis.
Example: This type of overlapping takes place between s – s orbital, s – p orbital and pz – pz orbitals.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure img 11

Pi – bond:
The bond formed by the lateral overlapping of two p – orbitals (px – px) (py – py) is called π – bond.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure img 12
It is important to note that overlapping at both the lobes of the p – orbital occurs in Pi – bond whereas in case of sigma bond the overlap occurs in a single region.

Question 14.
Give the reason for the difference in properties of two allotropes diamond and graphite of carbon?
Answer:
Diamond and graphite are two allotropes of carbon. But due to difference in C arrangement their properties are different. In diamond the C atom is sp3 hybridized. Every C atom attached with four cations form tetrahedral geometry. So it forms a lattice structure and so hard and have high melting point.

In graphite every C atom is sp2 hybridized, i.e. each C is surrounded by three cations and fourth valency of C is unstable. In graphite different layers are present which are joined together with weak vander Waals’ forces. That is why graphite is soft and due to presence of free electron it conducts electricity.

MP Board Solutions

Question 15.
Explain the hybridized structure of acetylene by diagram?
Answer:
Formation of ethyne or acetylene (HC = CH): In the formation of acetylene molecule, each carbon atom undergoes ip – hybridization leaving two 2p – orbitals in the original unhybridized state. The two sp – hybrid orbitals of carbon atom are linear and are directed at an angle of 180°. Whereas the two unhybridized p – orbitals remain perpendicular to ip – hybrid orbital and also perpendicular to each other.

In the formation of acetylene, ip – hybrid orbital of One C – atom overlap with ip – hybrid orbital of another C – atom along the intemuclear axis forming a σ – bond. The second sp – hybrid orbital of each C – atom overlaps with the half – filled 1s – orbital of H – atom again along intemuclear axis thus forming a-bonds. (MPBoardSolutions.com) Each of the two unhybridized orbitals of both the carbon atoms overlap. Sidewise to form two π – bonds. Thus, all the carbon and hydrogen atoms are linear and there is electron cloud above and below, in the front and at the back of the C – C axis. In other words, there is electron cloud all around the intemuclear axis thus giving a cylindrical shape as represented in fig.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure img 13
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure img 14

Question 16.
With tetrahedral geometry CH4 molecule have a possible geometry of square plannar. In which the H atoms are present at the four corners of the square. Explain that the CH4 molecule is not have square plannar geometry?
Answer:
The electronic configuration of C is:
In ground state 6C = 1s2 2s2 2px12py1
In excited state 6C = 1s2 2s12px1 2py12pz1
sp3 hybridisation.
In CH4 molecule carbon is sp3 hybridized. So its geometry is tetrahedral. For square plannar geometry dsp2 hybridization is necessary. But due to absence of d – orbital in C atom. This geometry is impossible. With this according to VSEPR concept the bonded electrons in C atom is present at four comers of tetrahedron. The bond angle in tetrahedron is 109°28′ and in square plannar 90°. So in case of tetrahedral geometry the repulsion of electrons is less than in square plannar geometry.

Question 17.
On the basis of hybridization explain that the structure of BeCl2 is linear?
Answer:
Formation of BeCl2:
In the compound (BeF2, BeCl2, etc.), beryllium shows a covalency of two. In order to explain the formation of two equivalent bonds with beryllium its 25 – electron from the ground state (4Be, Is2 2s2) is excited to 2p – orbital (1s22s1 2p1]) 2s and 2p – orbitals get mixed up to two equivalent sp – hybrid orbitals which make an angle of 180° with each other and oriented linearly. Each sp – orbitals overlap with half – filled p – orbital of chlorine (1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3px2 3py2 3pz1) atoms to form two sigma bonds. Thus, the shape of BeCl2 is linear.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure img 15

Question 18.
Explain the formation of N2 molecule on the basis of orbital theory as overlapping?
Answer:
π – bond formation of N2 molecules:
Nitrogen molecule has a triple – bond consiting of one σ and two π – bonds (\(N\overset { \pi }{ \underset { \pi }{ \equiv N } } \)). Nitorgem atom has three half – filled p – orbitals.
7N : 1s2 2s2 2px12py1 2pz1

When 2px orbital of each nitrogen atom overlaps co – axially, a σ – bond is formed. The 2py and 2pz orbitals of one N atom overlap N atom to overlap laterally to form two π – bonds.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure img 16

Chemical Bonding And Molecular Structure Long Answer Type Questions – I

Question 1.
Write the postulates of Valence bond theory? Write its limitation also?
Answer:
Valence bond theory was given by Heitler and London which is modified by Pauling and Slater. The postulates of the theory are:

  1. The covalent bonds are formed by the partial overlapping of atomic orbitals (half filled).
  2. In the orbitals taking part in overlapping electrons with opposite spin are present.
  3. Strength of bond depends upon the extent of overlapping.
  4. Strong directional bonds are formed between the orbitals of same stability, same energy and same symmetry.

Limitations of Valence Bond Theory:

  1. According to this theory, no unpaired e is present in O2 molecules. So the nature of O2 is paramagnetic but O2 is diamagnetic.
  2. Not explain about the formation of coordinate bonds.
  3. This theory is failed to explain the formation of H2+ molecules.
  4. Doesn’t give any information about resonance.

MP Board Solutions

Question 2.
Write the condition for the formation of molecular orbitals by linear combination of atomic orbitals?
Answer:
Conditions for the combination of Atomic Orbitals:
Molecular orbital is formed by the linear combination of atomic orbitals. There are certain conditions for the effective linear combination of atomic orbitals. These conditions are:

1. The combining atomic orbitals should have same or nearly same energy: This means that in the formation of a homonuclear diatomic molecule Is atomic orbital of one atom will undergo linear combination with 1s atomic orbital of the other atom, but not with the 2s atomic orbital because the energy of the 2s orbital is appreciably higher than that of 1s atomic orbital. Similarly, because of the energy difference between 2s and 2p atomic orbitals, they will also not combine to form molecular orbitals.

2. There should be maximum overlap of atomic orbitals:
Greater the overlap, greater will be the charge density between the nuclei of a molecular orbital. This condition is often referred to as the principle of maximum overlap.

3. The atomic orbitals should have the same symmetry about the molecular axis:
This condition is known as symmetry condition for the combination of atomic orbitals. Taking the Z – axis as the molecular axis, the following pairs of atomic orbitals will not combine to form any molecular orbital, because of their different symmetries.

  1. s – px pair
  2. s – py pair
  3. px – py pair and
  4. ↔py – pz pair.

This means that, s – s, px- px, py -py and Pz~Pz combinations are allowed because combining atomic orbitals have the same symmetry. A ,pz orbital, however, is able to combine with an s-orbital since, they have the same symmetry.

MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure img 17

Question 3.
Differentiate between Ionic compounds and Covalent compounds?
Answer:
Differences between Ionic and Covalent compounds:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure img 18

Question 4.
On what factors the formation of ionic bond depends?
Answer:
Factors influencing Ionic Bond formation:
The formation of ionic bond (Electrostatic force of attraction) depends upon the following factors:
1. Ionisation enthalpy:
One of the combining atoms (metal) must have low ionisa-tion enthalpy. So that, cation formation becomes easy. For example, alkali and alkaline earth metals of periodic table has tendency to form positive ion because they have comparatively low ionisation energy.

2. Electron gain enthalpy:
The electrons released in the formation of cation are to be accepted by the other atom taking part in the ionic bond formation. The electron accepting tendencies of an atom depends upon the electron gain enthalpy. (MPBoardSolutions.com) It may be defined as: Energy released when an isolated gaseous atom takes up an electron to form an anion. Greater the negative electron gain enthalpy, easier will be the formation of anion or negative ion. The halogen present in group 17 have the maximum tendency to form anions as they have very high negative electron gain enthalpy.

3. Lattice energy:
The amount of energy released when one mole of ionic solid is formed by the close packing of its constituents. It is denoted by ∆LH and negative in nature.
A(g)+ + B(g) → A+B(s) + Lattice enthalpy (∆LH)
Thus, greater the magnitude of -ve lattice energy, more will be the stability of the ionic bond or ionic compound.

MP Board Solutions

Question 5.
Explain the main points of Molecular orbital theory?
Answer:
The main points of Molecular orbital theory are:
1. In a molecule, electrons are present in new orbitals called molecular orbitals. These molecular orbitals are characterised by a set of quantum numbers just like atomic orbitals.

2. Molecular orbitals are formed by combination of atomic orbitals of equal energies (in case of homonuclear molecules) or of comparable energies (in case of heteronuclear molecules).

3. The number of molecular orbitals formed is equal to the number of atomic orbitals undergoing combination.

4. Two molecular orbitals are formed by combination of two atomic orbitals one of these two molecular orbitals has a lower energy and the other has a higher energy than either of the combining atomic orbitals. The molecular orbital with lower energy is called bonding molecular orbital and the other is called antibonding molecular orbital.

Question 6.
What is resonance? Explain with example?
Answer:
When properties of a molecule are not explained by one structure and two or more than two structures are assigned to express its characteristics, it is said that molecule is resonance hybrid of these structures and this property is known as resonance. Different resonating structures are exhibited by using sign (↔) in between these structures.
Example: Carbon dioxide (CO2) is represented by following three structures:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure img 19

Chemical Bonding And Molecular Structure Long Answer Type Questions – II

Question 1.
Show the molecular orbital energy levels of N2 by diagram?
Answer:
N2 molecule: Each nitrogen atom contains seven electron. Thus total 14 electrons are filled in seven orbitals of increasing energy.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure img 20
Molecular orbital structure of N2 molecule will be as follows:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure img 21
Where KK represents closed shell structure (σ 1s)2(\(({ \sigma _{ 1s } })^{ 2 }\))(\(({ \sigma ^{ * }_{ 1s } })^{ 2 }\)
This structure shows that it contains 10 bonding and 4 antibonding electrons.
Bond order = \(\frac{1}{2}\) [Nb – Na] = \(\frac{1}{2}\) [10 – 4] = 3.
Value of bond order is more. Hence value of bond energy should also be high. Experimental value of bond energy is 945 kJ mol-1 which proves the presence of paired electrons in nitrogen molecule. Thus, it is a diamagnetic molecule.

Question 2.
Give the important applications of dipole moment?
Answer:
Applications of Dipole moment:
1. Comparison of relative polarity:
It is possible by comparing the value of dipole moment e.g., HF (1.98 D) is more polar than HCl (1.03D).

2. Predicting the nature of molecules:
Molecules with specific dipole moments are polar in nature while those with zero value are non – polar. Thus, BeF2 (µ – 0D) is non – polar while H2O (µ = 1.84D) is polar.

3. Calculation of percentage ionic character:
% ionic character = \(\frac{Observed dipole moment}{Caluculated dipole moment}\) × 100 (100% ionic character)
or % I.C. = \(\frac { \mu _{ obs } }{ \mu _{ cal } } \) × 100
For example, the observed dipole moment of HCl molecule is 1.03D. For 100% ionic character i.e., complete transfer of electron charge on H+ and Cl ions would be equal to one unit (4.8 × 10-10e.s.u.)× (1.275 × 10-8 each. The bond length of H – Cl bond is 1.275 × 10-8cm. Therefore, dipole moment for complete electron transfer
µ = q × d = (4.8 × 10-10 e.s.u) × (1.275 × 10-8cm)
= 6.12 × 10-18 e.s.u cm = 6.12D
Observed dipole moment, µ(obs) = 1.03D
% ionic character = \(\frac { 1.03 }{ 6.12 } \) × 100 = 16.83 %

4. Dipole moment of symmetric molecules is zero, but they have two or more than two polar bonds. It is applied for the measurement of symmetry.

5. Distinction between ortho, meta and para isomers of aromatic compounds:
In general, the dipole moments follow the order: ortho > meta > para e.g., In dichlorobenzene, the dipole moments of o, m and p isomers are: 2.54 D, 1.48 D and 0 respectively.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure img 22

Question 3.
What is valence shell electron pair repulsion theory? Write its limitations? Or, Explain valence shell electron pair repulsion theory with example?
Answer:
VSEPR theory:
On the basis of this theory, “When central atom is surrounded by only bonded electron pairs, in that case the geometry of the molecule will be ordinary, but if the central atom is surrounded by bonded electron pairs as well as lone pairs or non – bonded pairs, then the geometry of die molecule will become abnormal.” This (MPBoardSolutions.com) means that the repulsion between the non – bonded or lone pair of electrons and bonded electron pairs become greater than that of repulsion between only bonded electron pairs. Repulsion

Between the electron pairs is in the following order:
lone pair – lone pair > lone pair – bonded pair > bonded pair – bonded pair

Shapes of some molecules accroding to VSEPR theory:
1. Shape of CH4:
In methane, central atom carbon is surrounded by four electron pairs and four C – H bonds. This molecule has tetrahedral geometry. Shared electrons are at the comers of tetrahedron for maximum separation. Bond angle is 109°28′.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure img 23

2. Shape of H2O:
In water molecule central oxygen atom is surrounded by four electron pairs, two of which are lone pair of electrons. Thus, Ip – lp and lp – bp repulsion exist. Due to this, bond angle reduces to 104.5° in place of 109°28′ and shape becomes V shaped.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure img 24

3. Shape of NH3:
In ammonia, central N atom is surrounded by four electron pairs, so shape of molecule is tetrahedral. According to VSEPR theory, the four groups around the central atom of ammonia should be tetrahedrally arranged at bond angle of 109°28’.

But, the measured bond angle is 107°. This is explained on the basis of repulsive effect of the lone pair of electrons on bonding electrons. In ammonia molecule there is a lone pair of electrons on the N atom. Thus, the shape of NH3 molecule is distorted and it looks like pyramidal and it is polar in nature.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure img 25
Example:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure img 26
Limitations of VSEPR theory:
VSEPR theory no doubt, theoretically gives the shapes of simple molecules but could not explain them and also has limited application. To overcome these limitations, two important theories based on quantum mechanical principles are commonly used. These are:

  1. Valence bond theory (VBT) and
  2. Molecular orbital theory (MOt).

Question 4.
Structure of two molecules are given:

  1. Among these which contain intermolecular hydrogen bond and intramolecular hydrogen bond?
  2. The melting point of any compound depends upon hydrogen bonding also, on the basis of this explain which one have high M.P.
  3. The solubility of any compound depends upon its tendency to formed H – bonding with water among these who will form H – bond with water easily.

MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure img 26a

Answer:
1. Compound (a) forms intramolecular H – bond. When H – bond is present between the atoms of same molecule than it is called intramolecular H – bond.
In ortho nitrophenol [(a)] H – bond is present between two O – atoms.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure img 28
In compound (b) inter molecular H – bond forms.
In p – nitrophenol [(b)] between – N02 and – OH vacant space is present. So among H – atom of one molecule and O – atom of another molecule, H – bond is formed.

2. The melting point of compound (b) is high because many molecules are forming H – bond.

3. Due to intramolecular H – bonding, compound (a) will not form H – bond with water so it is less soluble in water. Whereas compound (b) forms H – bond easily with water so soluble in water.

MP Board Solutions

Question 5.
Draw molecular orbital diagram for 02 molecule?
Answer:
Oxygen molecule, (02): Each oxygen atom has eight electrons. When two oxygen atom combine, molecular orbitals are formed. These molecular orbitals have following configuration:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure img 29
Its molecular orbital diagram is:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 4 Chemical Bonding and Molecular Structure img 30
From the above configuration we have,
Nb = 10, Na = 6
∴ Bond order = \(\frac{1}{2}\) [Nb – Na] = \(\frac{1}{2}\) [10 – 6] = 2
Hence, there is a double bond in oxygen molecule. Due to the presence of two unpaired electrons it is paramagnetic.

MP Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions

MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties

MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties

 Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Important Questions

Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Objective Type Questions

Question 1.
Choose the correct answer:

Question 1.
Variable valency is represented by:
(a) Metallic elements
(b) Normal elements
(c) Transitional elements
(d) Non – metallic elements.
Answer:
(c) Transitional elements

Question 2.
Of the following, whose size is the largest:
(a) Al
(b) Al+
(c) Al2+
(d) Al3+
Answer:
(a) Al

Question 3.
Electronic structure of the last shell of highly electronegative element is:
(a) ns2p3
(b) ns2 np4
(c) ns2p5
(d) ns2 np6
Answer:
(c) ns2p5

MP Board Solutions

Question 4.
Electron affinity enthalpy depends on:
(a) On atomic size
(b) On nuclear charge
(c) On atomic number
(d) On both atomic size and nuclear charge
Answer:
(d) On both atomic size and nuclear charge

Question 5.
Electron gain enthalpy of noble gases is:
(a) Less
(b) Nearly zero
(c) High
(d) Very high.
Answer:
(b) Nearly zero

Question 6.
Alkali metals behave:
(a) As a good oxidising agent
(b) As a good reducing agent
(c) As a good hydrolyser
(d) None of these.
Answer:
(b) As a good reducing agent

Question 2.
Fill in the blanks:

  1. Electron affinity of noble gases is …………………..
  2. Electron affinity of Be and Mg of second group is …………………….
  3. In a period, on moving from left to right, ionisation energy …………………………
  4. Periodic law made by taking atomic mass as the basis is called …………………………….
  5. …………………. is called Eka Boran
  6. Na+ is …………………….. than Na.
  7. Li shows diagonal relationship with ………………………..

Answer:

  1. Zero
  2. Zero
  3. Increases
  4. Mendeleev’s periodic law
  5. Aluminium
  6. Smaller
  7. Mg.

MP Board Solutions

Question 3.
Answer in one word/sentence:

  1. Which scientist gives Modem periodic law?
  2. Which element have highest electronegativity?
  3. An element having atomic number 20, will be kept in which group in periodic table?
  4. What is electron affinity of Noble gases?
  5. What is the change in ionization energy on moving left to right in periodic table?
  6. How many periods and groups in modem periodic table?
  7. What is the other name of Eka – silicon?
  8. How many elements are their in first period of modem periodic table?
  9. What is the reason for the similarity in properties of Li and Mg?
  10. Which oxidation state of A1 is most stable?

Answer:

  1. Mosle (1913)
  2. Fluorine
  3. In second group
  4. 0 (Zero)
  5. Increases
  6. Period = 7 and Group = 18,
  7. Germanium
  8. 2 (Two)
  9. Diagonal relationship
  10. +3.

Question 4.
Match the following:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Classification of Elements and Periodicity in 1
Answer:

  1. (c)
  2. (a)
  3. (b)
  4. (e)
  5. (d)

Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Short Answer Type Questions – I

Question 1.
What is Mendeleev’s periodic law?
Answer:
Mendeleev’s periodic law:
“The physical and chemical properties of the elements are a function of their atomic masses”. This means that the physical and chemical properties of the elements get repeated after a fixed interval.

Question 2.
What is Modern periodic law?
Answer:
Modern periodic law: “Physical and chemical properties of elements are periodic functions of their atomic number”. This means when the elements are arranged in their increasing atomic numbers then after a fixed interval the elements having similar properties are repeated.

MP Board Solutions

Question 3.
What is Doebereiner’s triad?
Answer:
This law was given by Doebereiner. According to this law atomic mass of the middle element was an arithmetic mean of the atomic masses of the other two.
Li7 Na23 K39
That is \(\frac{39 + 7}{2}\) = 23.

Question 4.
Prove on the basis of quantum numbers that the 6th period of periodic table should have 32 elements?
Answer:
The sixth period begins with the filling of principal quantum number n = 6. In this period, the electrons enters in 6s, Af 5 d and 6p. In this sub – shells total 16 (1 + 7 + 5 + 3) orbitals are present. According to Pauli’s exclusion principle every’ orbital have maximum two electrons. So 16 orbitals should have only 32 electrons. So, in 6th period 32 elements are present.

Question 5.
How many periods and groups were present in Mendeleev’s periodic table? What are the number of elements in each period?
Answer:
In Mendeleev’s periodic table 7 periods and 9 groups are present. In first period 2 elements, in second and third period 8 – 8 elements, fourth and fifth period, 18 – 18 elements, in sixth period 32 elements and seventh period is incomplete. In this period elements of atomic number 90 to 103, including actinides were present.

Question 6.
What change takes place on moving from left to right in period?
Answer:
On moving from left to right in period, ionization energy and electron affinity increases, but metallic property, basicity of oxides and atomic radii decreases.

MP Board Solutions

Question 7.
What change occur on moving from top to bottom in a group?
Answer:
On moving top to bottom in a group atomic radii and ionic radii increases but ionization potential, electron affinity and melting point decreases.

Question 8.
What is diagonal relationship? Explain giving example?
Answer:
Diagonal relationship:
It has been observed that some of the elements of second period show similarities with the elements of third period present diagonally to each other, though belonging to different groups. For example, lithium resembles with magnesium of (group 2) and beryllium resembles with aluminium (of group 3) and so on. This similarity in properties of elements present diagonal is called diagonally relationship.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Classification of Elements and Periodicity 2

Question 9.
What is the difference between electron gain enthalpy and electro negativity?
Answer:
Electron gain enthalpy is the amount of energy released when an electron is added to the neutral gaseous atom. But electronegativity is the power of an element to attract covalent electron towards it.

Question 10.
Tell in the form of periods and group that Z = 114 will be placed?
Answer:
By writing the electronic configuration the maximum value of n will show the period.
114Z = 86[Rn]7s2, 5f14, 6d10, 7p2.
(∵ n = 7) period = 7
Group = 14(10 + 2 + 2).

Question 11.
Why the ionization potential of noble gases are high?
Answer:
Due to fully filled orbitals and complete octet, the electronic configuration of noble gases are stable. So to remove an electron from outer orbit high energy is required.

Question 12.
Why the electron affinity of halogen elements are high?
Answer:
Halogens have the large (-ve) value of (∆egH) electron affinity because of their largest effective nuclear charge (Zeff) and smallest size in their respective period. Also they have strong tendency to gain one electron to attain the stable noble gas configuration i.e., from ns2, np5 to ns2, np6 configuration. Thus, the electron gain process is highly exothermic for halogens. However, as we move from Cl to I, the electron enthalpies becomes less and less negative due to corresponding increase in their atomic size.

MP Board Solutions

Question 13.
Whose electron affinity is more among F and Cl and why?
Answer:
Electron affinity of F is less than Cl because of small size of F, there is more repulsion among the electrons of 2p orbitals. So additive electron does not stabilize the atom.

Question 14.
Why the electron affinity of noble gases is zero?
Answer:
Noble gases have zero electron gain enthalpy. All noble gases have fully – filled valence shells (ns2, np6). Due to their highly stable (ns2, np6). Configurations, noble gases have absolutely no tendency to take an additional electron. Hence, noble gases have zero electron gain enthalpy.

Question 15.
Differentiate between Atomic radii and Ionic radii?
Answer:
Differences between Atomic radii and Ionic radii:
Atomic radii:

  1. Atomic radius gives us idea about size of the atom. Atomic radius may be taken as the distance between the centre of the nucleus and the outermost shell of the atom. It can be measured either by X – ray or by spectroscopic methods.
  2. Atomic radii of atom is more than ionic radii.

Ionic radii:

  1. Ionic radius tells us about size of the ion. It is defined as the distance between centre of the nucleus and the point upto which the ion has influence in the ionic bond.
  2. Ionic radii of anion is more than atomic radii.

Question 16.
Why the value of second IE2 is more than IE1 for any element?
Answer:
IE1 value is the energy needed to remove first electron from the gaseous atom. With the loss of the electron. Therefore, Z eff increases for the remaining electron. Therefore, greater energy is needed to remove the second electron from the gaseous atom. Therefore, IE2 value of an element is always more than its IE1 value.

MP Board Solutions

Question 17.
Ionic radii of cation is less than atomic radii. Why?
Or, Size of cation is smaller than the related atom. Why?
Answer:
Cations are positively charged ions and are formed when a neutral atom loses ‘ one or more valency electrons. Thus a cation possesses the same nuclear charge but less number of electrons as compared to the parent atom. Therefore effective nuclear charge on remaining electrons increases. This causes the decrease in size. Hence, the radius of a cation is always smaller than the radius of the atom from which it is formed.

Question 18.
Ionic radii of anion is less than atomic radii. Why?
Answer:
Radii of anion:
Anions are negatively charged ions and are formed when one or more electrons are added to the valence shell of a neutral atom. Thus, an anion contains the same nuclear charge but more electrons as compared to its parent atom. This decreases the effective nuclear charge i.e., nucleus exert less influence on the valence electrons. The valence electrons move away from the nucleus and the size increases due to expansion of electron cloud. Hence, the radius of an anion is always larger than that of parent atom.

Question 19.
Why the value of electron affinity of N and Be is near zero?
Answer:
The 2s orbital of Be is complete so it is stable, so it does not allow the entry of any electron. Similarly the p orbitals of N is half filled and so stable and does not accept any electron. That is why the value of electron affinity for Be and N is near zero.

Question 20.
The size of Mg+2 ion less than O-2 ion whereas the electron configuration of both is same. Explain?
Answer:
The electronic configuration of Mg+2 ion and O2- ion is same. Both have eight electrons in valence shell but the nuclear charge of Mg+22 ion is +12 whereas that of O2- ion is +8. That is why the nuclear charge for outer electron in Mg+2 is more than O2-, so the size of Mg+2 ion is less than O2- ion.

Question 21.
The value of electron affinity increases on moving left to right in a period. Why?
Answer:
On moving across a period, the size of the atom decreases and nuclear charge 1 increases. Due to this the attraction for incoming electron increases. That is why the value of electron affinity increases in a period.

MP Board Solutions

Question 22.
Explain the trend of metallic character of elements in periodic table?
Answer:
Metallic and non – metallic character:
Metallic character of an element is measured in terms of tendency of that element to lose electron i.e., electropositivity. Similarly, non – metallic character of an element is measured in terms of tendency of that element to gain electron i.e., electronegativity.

We know that ionisation enthalpies as well as electronegativities of the element increases along a period from left to right. This implies that the metallic character is maximum on extreme left (alkali metals) while the non – metallic character is the maximum on extreme right (halogens).

Question 23.
Among the O and N whose electron gain enthalpy is more?
Answer:
Among O and N, the electron gain enthalpy of O is more than N, because in N the valence orbital 2s22p3 is half filled and so stable. So the tendency to accept the incoming electron is more in O than in N. Other than this the size of O atom is smaller than N atom so due to high nuclear charge the incoming electron added fastly.

Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Short Answer Type Questions – II

Question 1.
The first IE1 of Al is less than Mg, Why?
Answer:
The electronic configuration of A1 and Mg is:
Al13 – 1s2, 2s2, 2p6, 3s2, 3p1
Mg12 – 1s2, 2s2, 2p6, 3s2
The atom will be stable if it have full – filled or half – filled orbitals. In Al the p – orbital is vacant whereas in Mg the s orbital is fully filled. That is the orbital of Al is less stable than Mg. So, the energy required to remove an electron from Al atom is less in compare on to Mg atom, that is why the IE1 of Al is less than Mg.

MP Board Solutions

Question 2.
What do you mean by Shielding effect?
Answer:
Electrons have negative charge and they repel each other and this force of repulsion decreases the attractive force from nucleus to outer shell, due to this the electrons present in valency shell bounded loosely with the nucleus. In this way, the electrons present between nucleus and outer electrons causes shield and this effect is called Shielding effect.

Question 3.
Discuss the trend in ionization potential from moving left to right in a periodic table?
Answer:
On moving left to right in a periodic table the nuclear charge increases and atomic radius decreases, due to this the outer electrons are attracted more towards the nucleus and to remove an electron from outer shell more energy is required. So the ionization energy increases on moving left to right.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Classification of Elements and Periodicity 3

Question 4.
What do you think that the second electron gain enthalpy of O will be positive, more negative or less negative than first electron gain enthalpy? Give reason for your answer:
Answer:
O(g) + eg → Og; ∆egH = – 141 kJ mol-1
O(g) + eg → O2-g; ∆eg H = + 780 kJ mol-1
When, on gaining one electron O atom forms O ion than energy is released. So first electron gain enthalpy is negative. But when an electron added in O ion than O2- ion forms and it feels a strong repulsive force and so energy is required for addition of electron. Due to this the second electron gain enthalpy of O is positive.

Question 5.
The electron gain enthalpy of F is less negative than Cl, Why?
Answer:
Electron gain enthalpy of F is less – ve than that of Cl because when an electron is added to F, the added electron goes to the smaller n = 2 quantum level and suffers repulsion from other electrons present in this level. In case of Cl, the added electron goes to the larger n = 3 quantum level and suffer much less repulsion from other electrons.

Question 6.
Why the long form of periodic table is better than Mendeleev’s periodic table?
Answer:
The long form of periodic table is better than Mendeleev’s becasuse it has several advantages over Mendeleev’s table. The important advantages are:
1. The arrangement of elements is easy to remember and reproduce.

2. The elements have been classified on the basis of atomic number which is more fundamental than atomic weight of the elements.

3. This periodic table is closely connected to the electronic configuration of ele-ments. Therefore, the position of an element in the periodic table can easily be justified. The electronic configuration of an element can be predicted if its position in the periodic table is known.

4. The resemblances and differences of the properties of elements in periods and groups are explained on the basis of electronic arrangement in various shell i.e., electronic configuration. Thus it reflects trends in physical and chemical properties of the elements.

MP Board Solutions

Question 7.
Write the characteristics of Modern periodic table?
Answer:
Characteristics of modern periodic table:

  1. This periodic table is based on the electronic configuration of elements.
  2. It reflects the sequence of filling the electrons in order of sub – energy levels s, p, d an Af
  3. It gives clear division of elements, transitional elements and inner transition elements.
  4. Attempt has been made to separate metals from non – metals. The elements on the left – hand side of the periodic table are metals and more non – metallic elements have been placed on right side.

Question 8.
Explain, why all transition elements are d-block elements but all d – block elements are not transition elements?
Answer:
Those elements whose outer electron goes in d – orbital are known as J – block elements or transition elements. The general outer electronic configuration of these elements is
(n – 1)d1-10ns0-2. The electronic configuration of Zn, Cd and Hg is (n – 1 )d10nsd2, but they do not show the properties of transition elements. In ground state and in general oxidation state the d – orbitals of these elements are completely filled, therefore they will not be considered as transition elements. So on the basis of properties all transition elements are d – block elements, but on the basis of electronic configuration all d – block elements are not transition elements.

Question 9.
Among the pairs whose ionization energy is less. Why?

  1. Cl or F
  2. Cl or S
  3. K or Ar
  4. Kr or Xe.

Answer:

  1. Among Cl and F ionization energy of Cl is less than F because size of F is small.
  2. Among Cl and S, the ionization energy of S is less as the size of S is bigger than Cl.
  3. Among K and Ar the ionization energy of K is less as in the valence shell of K only one electron is present which can be easily donated and K+ is formed but Ar has complete octet and so stable and so more energy is required for removal of electron.
  4. Among Kr and Xe, the ionization energy of Xe is less because the size of Xe is bigger than Kr.

Question 10.
What are s – block elements? Write their main properties?
Answer:
Elements in which the last electron enters into s – orbital are known as s – block elements. It includes Alkali metals of group – I and Alkaline earth metals of group – II.
General properties of s – block elements:

  1. In outermost orbit the electronic configuration is ns1 or ns2.
  2. These elements have definite positive oxidation number which is +1 and +2 in group 1 and group 2.
  3. Except hydrogen, all are metals, ionization potentials are low. Thus, these are strong electropositive, strong reducing agent and strongly metallic in nature.
  4. Elements of 1st group are alkali metals and elements of 2nd group are called alkaline earth metals.
  5. Oxides of these elements are basic in nature. Oxides of 1st group dissolve in water to give alkalis.
  6. These elements form electrovalent compounds.
  7. These elements provide colour on heating with flame.
    MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Classification of Elements and Periodicity 4
  8. These elements are very reactive. Reacts with water and acids displacing their hydrogen as H2 gas.

Question 11.
What are p – block elements? Write their main properties?
Answer:
The elements in which the last electron outers in p – block are called p – block. General characteristic of p – block elements:

  1. These elements have 2 electrons in 5 sub – shell and 1 to 6 electrons in p sub-shell in outermost orbit. Only in zero group elements, outer shell is completed.
  2. Definite positive or negative oxidation numbers are represented by the elements. Some of the elements show variable valencies.
  3. These elements form simple ions as well as complex ions of CO32-, NO3.
  4. These are generally non – metals and metalloids. Some of the elements are heavy elements. e,g., Pb, Bi, etc.
  5. Oxides are acidic in nature. Some oxides are amphoteric, e.g., PbO, SnO etc.
  6. These elements form covalent compounds with each other but with the elements of s – block form electrovalent compounds.

MP Board Solutions

Question 12.
Which elements are called transition elements? Throw light on their properties?
Answer:
Transition elements:
The elements which are in between s – block and p – block are called as transition elements or elements in which d – orbitals are partially filled are called transition elements. In this, last electron goes to d – orbital of orbit inner to outer so called d – block elements. Boiling point, melting point and densities of these elements are high.
Example: Cr, Mn, Fe, Cu, etc.
Properties:

  1. In this two outer orbits are incomplete
  2. Electronic configuration is (n – 1) d1 to 10 ns1 to 2
  3. It has metallic properties
  4. These elements show variable oxidation state
  5. These form coloured ions
  6. These form complex salt
  7. These are good catalysts
  8. These form complex compounds
  9. These are generally diamagnetic and
  10. These also form with non-metal compounds.

Question 13.
What are inner transition elements? Write their general properties?
Answer:
In these elements three outer orbitals are incomplete. In all these elements, the s – orbital of the last shell (n) is completely filled, the d – orbitals the the penultimate (n – 1) shell invariably contains zero or one electron but the f – orbital of the antipenultimate (n – 2) shell (being lower in energy than d – orbitals of the penultimate shell) gets progressively filled. Hence the general configuration of f – block elements is (n – 2) f1-14 (n – 1) d0 – 1ns2
Lanthanides: The last electron enters in 4f subshell.
Actinides: The last electron enters in 5f subshell.

Question 14.
Explain ionization energy and electron affinity?
Answer:
Ionization Energy:
The minimum amount of energy which is needed to remove the most loosely bound electron from a neutral isolated gaseous atom in its ground state to form a gaseous cation.
Mg + Energy → M+g + eg
Electron Affinity:
It is equal to the change in enthalpy when an isolated gaseous atom accepts an electron to form a monovalent anion. It is denoted by ∆egH.
In this way, if energy is released by addition of an electron than electron affinity is positive. But if energy is required to add an electron to a negative ion than electron affinity will be negative.

MP Board Solutions

Question 15.
Explain atomic radii and ionic radii?
Answer:
Atomic radius:
The size of an atom is usually expressed in terms of its radius called atomic radius. It is very important property because several physical and chemical Cation properties are related to it. If the atom is assumed to be spherical than the term atomic radius means the distance from the centre of the nucleus to the outermost shell of electrons. According to quantum mechanical model, the atomic radius is defined as, the distance from the centre of the nucleus to the point up to which the density of electron cloud (i. e., probability of finding the electron) is maximum.

Ionic radius:
The ionic radius of an ion may be defined as the distance, from its nucleus to the point up to which the nucleus has influence on the electron cloud of the ion.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Classification of Elements and Periodicity 5

Question 16.
In a periodic table how the size of the atom changes? Explain?
Answer:
The distance from the centre of the nucleus to the outermost electron is called atomic radius.
In a period:
As we move left to right in a period atomic number increases by one unit in each successive element. As the addition of electron takes place in the same principal shell, they do not screen each other from the nucleus. It means the increased nuclear charge is not neutralize by the extra valency electron, cause a decrease in the size of atom.

In a group:
In moving down the group, nuclear charge is increasing with the increase in atomic number and we expect that the size of atom should decrease. But at the same time while going from one atom to another, there is increase in the number of electron shells. The effect of increased nuclear charge is reduced by shielding effect (screening effect) of the electrons present in the inner shells. Therefore, the effect of increase in the electron shell is more pronounced than the effect of increase in nuclear charge. Consequently, the atomic size or atomic radius increases down the group.

Question 17.
What is the change in reduction and oxidation properties of elements in periodic table?
Answer:
Reducing agents:
Those elements which form positive ion by removal of electron, are called reducing agents. The reducing power of any element depends upon the tendency of it to donate electron. The ionization potential of alkali elements are less due to their large size. Therefore they can easily donate electrons, so alkali elements are strong reducing agents. On moving from left to right in a periodic table in a period the reducing power decreases and on moving top to bottom in a group reducing power increases.

Oxidizing agents:
Those elements which accept electrons will work as oxidizing agents. The oxidizing power of any element depends upon its electron accepting property. Halogen easily accept electron so they are strong oxidizing agent. On moving left to right in a period the oxidizing power increases and on moving top to bottom the oxidizing power decreases.

MP Board Solutions

Question 18.
Differenctiate the Modern periodic table and Mendeleev’s periodic table?
Answer:
Differences between Modem periodic table and Mendeleev’s periodic table:
Modem Periodic Table:

  1. In Modem periodic table the elements are arranged in increasing order of atomic number.
  2. The elements are kept in 18 groups.
  3. The metals and non – metals are separately kept.

Mendeleev’s Periodic Table:

  1. In Mendeleev’s periodic table the elements are arranged in increasing order of atomic mass.
  2. The elements are kept in 9 groups and 7 sub – groups.
  3. The metals and non-metals are not separated.

Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Long Answer Type Questions – I

Question 1.
How many types of elements are there on the basis of electronic configuration? Give example of each?
Or Describe the different types of element on the basis of electronic arrangement?
Answer:
The elements have been divided into four main classes as follows:

1. Inert gases or Noble gases or Aerogens:
The elements which belongs to the group 18 of the periodic table are known as noble gases or inert gases. They have 8 electrons in their outermost shell (ns2 np6). Therefore their combining capacity or valence is zero. Hence they are inert in nature. All the members are gaseous in nature.

2. Representative elements:
All the elements of s and p – block with exception of noble gases are called representative elements or normal elements. Representative elements includes
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 3 Classification of Elements and Periodicity 6
These elements have the outer electronic configuration from ns1 to ns2np5. Elements of this type use only thier outer shell electrons in the bonding with the other atom.

3. Transition elements (d – block elements):
These are the elements in which the last shell is not completely filled. These elements have configuration (n – 1)d1-10ns1-2 i.e., these elements contain 1 – 9 electrons in the penultimate shell and 1 – 2 electrons in the valence shell. The elements having partially filled d – orbitals are named transition elements because these represent a transition (change) from the most electropositive elements to the most electronegative elements. Strictly speaking, elements of group 12 (Zn, Cd, Hg) cannot be included in transition elements, although these elements chemically resemble the transition elements in many respects. All these elements closely resemble each other due to the presence of the same number of electrons in the outermost shell.

4. Inner transition elements (f – block elements):
Lanthanides (58Ce – 71Lu) and actinides (90Th – 103Lw) are collectively known as inner transition elements. In these elements, three outermost shells are not completely filled. The last electron in those enters in the (n – 2) subshell. These elements generally have the same number of electrons in the last two shells, (n -1) and n – orbital. The properties of these elements are so close to each other that it is not easy to separate lanthanides from one another.

MP Board Solutions

Question 2.
Write the applications of Mendeleev’s periodic table?
Answer:
The important contributions of Mendeleev’s periodic table to chemistry are as follows:
1. Systematic study of chemistry:
The Mendeleev’s periodic table categorised the elements for the first time in a systematic way. This helped immensely in the study of the chemistry of elements and their compounds and made the study much easier. If the properties of a group are known, one can easily guess the properties of all the elements (and their compounds) placed in that group.

2. Prediction of new elements:
At the time of Mendeleev’s 56 elements were known. While arranging these elements, he left some gaps. These gaps represented the undiscovered elements. Further Mendeleev predicted the properties of these undiscovered elements f on the basis of their positions. For example, both gallium (Ga) and germanium (Ge) were not known when Mendeleev gave the periodic table. On the basis of their expected positions, he named these elements as Eka – aluminium and Eka – silicon (from the Sanskrit word eka meaning next) because he believed that these would be similar to aluminium and silicon respectively. When these elements were actually found, their properties were the same as predicted by him.

3. Correction of atomic masses:
Mendeleev also corrected the atomic masses of certain elements with the help of their expected positions and properties. For example, be – ryllium was assigned an atomic weight of 13 – 5 on the basis of its equivalent weight (4 – 5) and valency (wrongly calculated as 3). As such, it should have been placed between carbon (atomic mass 12) and nitrogen (atomic mass 14).

But no vacant place was available in between C and N and further more properties of beryllium did not justify such a position. Therefore valency 2 was assigned to beryllium which gave it an atomic weight of 4.5 × 2 = 9, as atomic weight = equivalent weight × valency and it was placed in proper position between lithium (atomic weight 7) and boron (atomic weight 11). In a similar way atomic masses of many other elements were corrected.

4. Useful in research:
Mendeleev’s periodic table is very useful to further research and study of properties of different elements.

MP Board Solutions

Question 3.
What do you mean by electronegativity of an element? How it is different from electron affinity? How electronegativity changes in periodic table?
Answer:
1. Electronegativity:
It is defined as the relactive tendency of an element to attract the shared pair of electrons in a covalent bond towards itself.

2. Electron affinity:
Electron affinity is equal to the change in enthalpy when an isolated gaseous atom accepts an electron to form a monovalent anion.
The value of first electron affinity is negative as the process is exothermic but in second electron affinity energy is absorbed because the negative ion repels the upcoming electron.

3. Difference:
Electron affinity is the property to bind extra electron whereas electro negativity is the ability of an atom of a molecule to attract electron.
Trend of Electronegativity:

4. In a period:
As we move left to right in a period electronegativity increases due to decrease in size and a corresponding increase in effective nuclear charge.

5. In a group:
While moving down a group the increased nuclear charge is neutralized by screening effect. In general, the electronegativity decreases down the group due to in-creasing size.

Question 4.
The atomic number of an element is 17. By giving the electronic configuration give its place in periodic table?
Answer:
The electronic configuration of atom having atomic number 17 = Is2, 2s2 2p6, 3s2, 3p5 = 2, 8, 7.
1. Its outer configuration is 3s23p5, so it is a p – block elements.

2. Group:
If one orbital is vacant, than their present in outer shell show the group i.e., the element is 7th group.

3. Sub – group:
If the last electron enter in s or p-sub-shell than the element is of a sub – group.

4. Period:
No. of shells show the no. of periods. This element is member of third period. group – 7, sub – group – A, period – 3.

MP Board Solutions

Question 5.
What do you mean by isoelectronic species? Write the name of any one species which is isoelectronic with following atoms and ions:

  1. F
  2. Ar
  3. Mg2+
  4. Rb+

Answer:
In isoelectronic species the number of electrons are same but the nuclear charge is different. In such species by increasing nuclear charge, the size of the atom increases.

  1. Number of e in F = 9 + 1 = 10
  2. Number of e in Ar = 18
  3. Number of e in Mg+2 = 12 – 2 = 10
  4. Number of e in Rb+ = 37 – 1 = 36

N3-, O2-, Ne, Na+ and Al+3 species, F and Mg2+ are isoelectronic species. P3-, S2-, Cl, K+ and Ca2+ species, Ar is isoelectronic species.
Similarly Br, Kr and Sr2+ species and Rb+ is isoelectronic species.

Classification of Elements and Periodicity in Properties Long Answer Type Questions – II

Question 1.
What is Modern Periodic law? Give the description of periodic table based on this law?
Answer:
Modern Periodic Law:
“The physical and chemical properties of elements are the periodic functions of their atomic numbers”.

Description of Periodic table:
Characteristics of Modern Periodic table:

1. Metals and non – metals are kept separate.

2. Strongly electropositive elements (s – block elements) are kept on the left side of transitional element (d – block elements) in groups 1 and 2, transitional elements are kept in the middle in groups 3 to 12 and non-metallic elements (p – block elements) are kept on the right side of transitional element (d – block elements) in groups 13 to 17.
Thus, s – block
1 – 2 groups
d – block
3 – 12 groups
p – block
13 – 17 groups

3. On the basis of filling of electrons, elements are classified into s – block, p – block, d – block and f – block elements.

4. Transitional elements are kept apart from normal elements. These elements lie in between s – and p – block. In them the last electron enters into (n – 1) d orbital therefore, these elements show similarly in properties rather than gradation.

5. Rare earth elements (Lanthanides and Actinides) are kept away from the main table in a suitable place.

6. Sub – groups of a group are eliminated.

7. Fe, Co and Ni are kept with transitional elements which is the suitable place.

8. Hydrogen is kept in group 1.

9. This classification relates the atomic configuration of elements with their position in the periodic table due to which their study is very easy.

MP Board Solutions

Question 2.
What are the defects of Mendeleev’s periodic table ? How they can be remove by Modern Periodic Law?
Answer:
Defects of Mendeleev’s Periodic table:
Inspite of remarkable contribution made to chemistry, Mendeleev’s periodic table had certain defects. These defects are as follows:

1. Position of Hydrogen:
Hydrogen is a unique element and resembles with the elements of group IA (alkali metals) as well as with those of VII A group (Halogens) in its properties. Therefore, it should have been placed in both IA and VII A groups in Mendeleev’s periodic table. Therefore, the position of hydrogen in the periodic table is anomalous or controversial.

2. Position of Isotopes:
Isotopes are the atoms of same element having same atomic number but different atomic masses. Therefore, according to Mendeleev’s classification, these should be placed at different places depending upon their atomic masses. However, isotopes have not been given separate places in the periodic table.

3. Position of Lanthanides and Actinides:
Position of lanthanides (14 elements following lanthanum, atomic number 58 – 71) and actinides (14 elements following actinium, 1 atomic number 90 – 103) is also anomalous in Mendeleev’s periodic table. In this periodic table, all these elements are supposed to be placed together in III group which is not in accordance to the periodic law.

4. Similar elements placed in different group:
The elements like silver and thallium, barium and lead, copper and mercury show similar properties, yet they are placed in . different groups in Mendeleev’s periodic table.

5. Eighth group:
This group is full of anomalies. Except osmium, no other elements of this group shows the group valency i.e., no other element is octavalent. Further they all are arranged in three triads without any justification.

6. Cause of periodicity:
Mendeleev could not explain the cause of periodicity among the elements.

Modern periodic table removes a lot of defects of Mendeleev’s periodic table like:

1. Since, this table is based on electronic configuration therefore hydrogen is placed in group 1.

2. To put element of high atomic mass before the element of low atomic mass:
In Mendeleev’s periodic table, elements of higher atomic mass precedes elements of lower atomic mass. But their position is justified in Modem periodic table because element with higher atomic mass has lower atomic number, e.g., cobalt (atomic mass 58.93, atomic number 28).

3. Position of Isotopes:
Isotopes of an element possess same atomic number, therefore, there is no necessity of giving them separate positions in the periodic table.

4. To place elements with different properties at the same place: In Mendeleev’s periodic table, elements of different properties are placed at same place. For example, elements of sub – group IA and IB. But in Modem periodic table, this defect is removed by separating the sub – groups.

5. Position of Noble gas:
Noble gases have been placed between VIIIB electromotive elements and IA electropositive elements.

6. Diagonal relationship:
It can be explained on the basis of electronic configuration and atomic radius.

MP Board Solutions

Question 3.
Compare the Mendeleev’s periodic table and Modern periodic table?
Answer:
Comparison between Mendeleev’s periodic table and Modem periodic table:
Mendeleev’s periodic table:

  1. Elements are arranged in order of their increasing atomic weight.
  2. There are 9 horizontal blocks known as groups.
  3. Zero group is added later on.
  4. Elements of different properties kept in same group.
  5. Every isotope don’t have different place.

Modem periodic table:

  1. Elements are arranged in order of their increasing atomic number.
  2. There are 18 horizontal blocks called groups.
  3. Nobel gases are at the end of each period.
  4. Elements of different properties kept in different groups.
  5. There is no need to give different place to isotopes.

Question 4.
What is ionisation energy? Explain the factors affecting ionisation energy?
Answer:
Ionization energy:
The amount of energy which is required to separate the outermost electron from atom is called ionic energy or ionic potential i.e., to convert atom into positive ion the necessary energy required is called as ionic energy. Its unit is kJ mole-1.
So, M(g) + Energy → M+(g) + e
M(g) – Electron → M+(g) + Ionisation energy.
Factors affecting ionization energy:
1. Size of atom or ion:
Greater the size of atom or ion, weaker are the forces of attra-ction and lower is the value of ionization energy.

2. Nuclear charge:
Greater the nuclear charge, more is the attraction for electrons and hence, greater is the value of ionization energy.

3. Shielding effect:
In multielectron atom with increase in atomic number, shielding effect increases due to which valence shell electron feels lesser attraction and hence, value of ionization energy is lower.

4. Penetration effect:
Simple the shape of orbitals, more is the penetration of it for the nucleus. That is it experience greater attraction. Thus, value of ionization energy is higher. It follows the order s > p > d > f

5. Electronic configuration:
Completely filled and half-filled orbitals are more stable than any other arrangement. Thus, value of ionization energy is higher for it.

6. Trend in periodic table:

(a) In period:
Ionisation energy generally increases from left to right in a period. This is due to gradual increase in nuclear charge and decrease in atomic size of the elements.

(b) In a group:
There is a gradual decrease in ionisation energy moving top to bottom. This is due to increase in the number of the main energy shell i.e., size of the atom increases.

MP Board Solutions

Question 5.
What do you mean by Electron affinity? Explain the factors affecting it?
Answer:
Electron affinity:
The electron affinity of an atom is the energy released, when an electron is added to a neutral atom. It is expressed in kcal/mol. Electronegativity is a relative number on an arbitrary scale while electron affinity is expressed in the units of energy (kcal/mol).
Ag + e → Ag + E1 (Exothermic)
Ag + e → A2- – E2 (Endothermic)
A2-g + e → A3-g – E3 (Endothermics)
This way in the addition of an electron to neutral isolated atom energy is released and electron affinity is positive, but in an anion energy is required to add an electron because the anion opposes the intrance of an electron. Thus, electron affinity for charged ions is negative.

Factors affecting electron gain enthalpy: Some important factors affecting electron gain enthalpy are:

  1. Atomic size
  2. Nuclear charge
  3. Electronic configuration.

1. Atomic size:
As the atomic size increases, the distance between the nucleus and the incoming electron increases. This results in lesser attraction. Consequently, electron gain enthalpy becomes less negative.

2. Nuclear charge:
Greater the nuclear charge, greater will be attraction for the incoming electron and as a result, AH becomes more negative.

3. Electronic configuration:
Atoms having stable electronic configuration have lesser tendency to accept the electron. Due to this the value of electron gain enthalpy becomes less negative.

4. Half – filled and ful – filled orbitals:
Half – filled and ful – filled orbitals are stable and in this condition they cannot easily accept the electron. So the value of electron affinity for such elements are zero.

5. Periodicity:

  1. In periods: On moving left to right in a period the electron affinity increases as the nuclear charge increases.
  2. In group: On moving down the group the electron affinity decreases due to increase in size of atom.

MP Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions

MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन

MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन

हाइड्रोकार्बन NCERT अभ्यास प्रश्न

प्रश्न 1.
मेथेन के क्लोरीनीकरण के दौरान ऐथेन कैसे बनती है ? आप इसे कैसे समझाएँगे?
उत्तर:
मेथेन का क्लोरीनीकरण मुक्त मूलक क्रियाविधि द्वारा होता है। मेथिल मुक्त मूलक (CH3 ) श्रृंखला समापन पद के दौरान ऐथेन में रूपान्तरित हो जाते हैं।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 6

प्रश्न 2.
निम्नलिखित यौगिकों के IUPAC नाम लिखिए –
(i) CH3 CH = C(CH3)2
(ii) CH3 = CH – C ≡ C – CH3
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 7
उत्तर:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 8

प्रश्न 3.
निम्नलिखित यौगिकों, जिनमें द्विआबन्ध तथा त्रिआबन्ध की संख्या दर्शायी गई है, के सभी सम्भावित स्थिति समावयवों के संरचना-सूत्र एवं IUPAC नाम दीजिए –
(a) C4H8 (एक द्विआबन्ध)
(b) C5H8 (एक त्रिआबन्ध)।
उत्तर:
(a) C4H8 के समावयवी जो द्विआबंध रखते हैं –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 139
(b) C5H8 के समावयवी जो त्रिआबंध रखते हैं –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 140

प्रश्न 4.
निम्नलिखित यौगिकों के ओजोनी-अपघटन के पश्चात् बनने वाले उत्पादों के नाम लिखिए –
(1) पेन्ट-2-ईन
(ii) 3, 4-डाइमेथिलहेप्ट-3-ईन
(iii) 2- एथिलब्यूट-1-ईन
(iv) 1-फेनिलब्यूट-1-ईन।
उत्तर:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 9

प्रश्न 5.
एक ऐल्कीन ‘A’ के ओजोनी अपघटन से पेन्टेन-3-ओन तथा ऐथेनल का मिश्रण प्राप्त होता है। A का IUPAC नाम तथा संरचना दीजिए।
उत्तर:
ओजोनी अपघटन के फलस्वरूप बने उत्पादों की संरचना इस प्रकार लिखते हैं जिससे उनके ऑक्सीजन परमाणु एक दूसरे की ओर इंगित रहे। दोनों ऑक्सीजन परमाणु को निकालने के पश्चात् दोनों सिरों की द्विआबंध से जोड़कर, एल्कीन ‘A’ की संरचना प्राप्त करते है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 11

प्रश्न 6.
एक ऐल्कीन A में तीन C – C, आठ C – H सिग्मा आबन्ध तथा एक C – C पाई आबन्ध है। A ओजोनी अपघटन से दो अणु ऐल्डिहाइड, जिनका मोलर द्रव्यमान 44 है, देता है। A का आई.यू.मी.ए.सी. नाम लिखिए।
उत्तर:
मोलर द्रव्यमान 44u वाला ऐल्डिहाइड, ऐथेनल (CH3CHO) है। अतः इसके दो अणु की संरचनाओं से –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 12
अत: एल्कीन ‘A’ अर्थात् ब्यूट-2-ईन में तीन C-C, आठ C- HO – आबंध तथा एक C – C  2-आबंध उपस्थित है। जो संख्या प्रश्नों में दी गई है।

प्रश्न 7.
एक एल्कीन, जिसके ओजोनी अपघटन से प्रोपेनल (Propanal) तथा पेन्टेन-3-ओन प्राप्त होते हैं, का संरचनात्मक सूत्र क्या है ?
उत्तर:
प्रोपेनल तथा पेन्टेन-3-ओन में से ऑक्सीजन अलग होकर ये द्वि-बंध द्वारा जुड़ जाते हैं।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 13

प्रश्न 8.
निम्नलिखित हाइड्रोकार्बनों के दहन की रासायनिक अभिक्रिया लिखिए –
(i) ब्यूटेन
(ii) पेन्टीन
(iii) हेक्साइन
(iv) टॉलुईन।
उत्तर:
सभी हाइड्रोकार्बन पूर्ण दहन पर CO2 और H2O देते है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 14

प्रश्न 9.
हेक्स-2-ईन की समपक्ष (सिस) तथा विपक्ष (ट्रान्स ) संरचनायें बनाइए। इनमें से कौनसे समावयव का क्वथनांक उच्च होता है और क्यों ?
उत्तर:
हेक्स-2-ईन (CH3CH2CH2CH = CHCH3) की समपक्ष तथा विपक्ष समावयव की संरचनाएँ निम्न हैं –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 15
सिस समावयवी में क्वथनांक अपेक्षाकृत उच्च होगा क्योंकि इसके द्विध्रुव-द्विध्रुव अन्योन्य क्रिया का परिणाम, ट्रान्स समावयवी की अपेक्षा अधिक होता है।

प्रश्न 10.
बेंजीन में तीन द्वि-आबन्ध होते हैं, फिर भी यह अत्यधिक स्थायी है, क्यों?
उत्तर:
अनुनाद तथा इलेक्ट्रॉनों के विस्थानीकरण के कारण बेन्जीन अणु अत्यधिक स्थायी होता है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 16
संकरित संरचना संकरित संरचना में बिन्दु वृत्त, बेन्जीन वलय के छ: कार्बन परमाणु पर विस्थानीकृत छ: इलेक्ट्रॉनों को दर्शाता है। अतः विस्थानीकृत छः इलेक्ट्रॉनों की उपस्थिति के कारण बेन्जीन अत्यधिक स्थायी होता है।

प्रश्न 11.
किसी निकाय द्वारा ऐरोमैटिकता प्रदर्शित करने के लिए आवश्यक शर्ते क्या हैं ?
उत्तर:
किसी निकाय का ऐरोमैटिक गुण प्रदर्शित निम्न शर्तों पर निर्भर करता है –

  • यौगिक संरचना समतलीय होनी चाहिये।
  • यौगिक अनुनादी संरचनायें प्रदर्शित करें।
  • यौगिक हकल नियम का पालन करें।
  • यौगिक इलेक्ट्रॉन स्नेही अभिक्रियाएँ प्रदर्शित करें

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 12.
इनमें से कौन-से निकाय ऐरोमैटिक नहीं है ? कारण स्पष्ट कीजिए –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 17
उत्तर:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 18
(a) यह संरचना समतलीय नहीं है क्योंकि इसमें एक C परमाणु sp’ संकरित अवस्था में उपस्थित है।
(b) यह संरचना इलेक्ट्रॉन स्नेही प्रतिस्थापी अभिक्रियाएँ प्रदर्शित नहीं करती।

(ii) MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 19
यह संरचना ऐरोमैटिक गुण प्रदर्शित नहीं करता क्योंकि
(a) इसकी संरचना समतलीय नहीं है (इसमें एक C परमाणु का संकरण अवस्था sp’ है।)
(b) यह हकल नियम का पालन नहीं करता।
(c) यह अनुनादी संरचनायें भी प्रदर्शित नहीं करता।
(d) यह इलेक्ट्रॉन स्नेही प्रतिस्थापी अभिक्रियाएँ नहीं देती।

(ii)MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 20
यह संरचना ऐरोमैटिक गुण प्रदर्शित नहीं करता क्योंकि
(a) इसकी संरचना समतलीय नहीं है।
(b) यह संरचना हकल नियम का पालन नहीं करती।।
(c) यह इलेक्ट्रॉन स्नेही प्रतिस्थापी अभिक्रियाएँ प्रदर्शित नहीं करती।

प्रश्न 13.
बेंजीन को निम्नलिखित में कैसे परिवर्तित करेंगे –

  1. p – नाइट्रोब्रोमोबेंजीन
  2. m – नाइट्रोक्लोरोबेंजीन
  3. p – नाइट्रोटॉलुईन
  4. ऐसीटोफिनोन।

उत्तर:
ये रूपान्तरण इस तथ्य पर आधारित होते हैं कि –

  • क्लोरीन की प्रकृति ऑर्थों और पैरा निर्देशी होती है।
  • नाइट्रो समूह की प्रकृति मेटा निर्देशी होती है।

1. बेंजीन से p – नाइट्रोनोमोबेंजीन –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 21
2. बेंजीन से m – क्लोरोनाइट्रोबेंजीन –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 22
3. बेंजीन से p – नाइट्रोटॉलुईन –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 23
4. बेंजीन से p – एसीटोफिनोन –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 24

प्रश्न 14.
ऐल्केन H3C – CH2 – C(CH3)2 – CH2– CH(CH3)2 में 1,2° तथा 3° कार्बन परमाणुओं की पहचान कीजिए तथा प्रत्येक कार्बन से आबन्धित कुल हाइड्रोजन परमाणुओं की संख्या भी बताइए।
उत्तर:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 25

प्रश्न 15.
क्वथनांक पर ऐल्केन की श्रृंखला के शाखन (Branch) का क्या प्रभाव पड़ता है ?
उत्तर:
श्रृंखला में शाखन में वृद्धि के फलस्वरूप पृष्ठ सतह घटता है। अतः एल्केन की श्रृंखला के शाखन में वृद्धि के फलस्वरूप वाण्डर वाल्स आकर्षण बलों में कमी के कारण, क्वथनांक घटता है।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 16.
प्रोपीन पर HBr के संकलन से 2-ब्रोमोप्रोपेन बनता है, जबकि बेन्जॉयल परॉक्साइड की उपस्थिति में यह अभिक्रिया 1-ब्रोमोप्रोपेन देती है। क्रियाविधि की सहायता से इसका कारण स्पष्ट कीजिए।
उत्तर:
प्रोपीन (असममित ऐल्कीन) पर HBr योग मार्कोनीकॉफ नियम के अनुसार धनायनिक क्रियाविधि से संपादित होती है। HBr इलेक्ट्रॉन स्नेही, H’ उत्पन्न करता है जो कार्बधनायन से द्विबंध पर आक्रमण करता है।
(i) H – Br → H+ + Br
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 26
इस -2° कार्बधनायन पर Br आयन आक्रमण करके उत्पाद बनाता है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 27
ब्रोमो प्रोपेन (मुख्य उत्पाद) बेन्जॉयल परॉक्साइड की उपस्थिति में प्रोपीन पर HBr का योग मार्कोनीकॉफ नियम के विपरीत होता है। यह मुक्त मूलक की क्रिया से संपादित होता है। इस अभिक्रिया को प्रति मार्कोनीकॉफ योग या परॉक्साइड प्रभाव या खराश प्रभाव कहते हैं। यह केवल HBr के साथ होता है, HCl तथा HI के साथ नहीं। क्रियाविधि निम्न हैं –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 28

प्रश्न 17.
1, 2-डाइमेथिलबेंजीन (o – जाइलीन) के ओजोनी अपघटन के फलस्वरूप निर्मित उत्पादों को लिखिए। यह परिणाम बेंजीन की केकुले संरचना की पुष्टि किस प्रकार करता है ?
उत्तर:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 29
इसी प्रकार,
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 30
ये तीनों उत्पाद दोनों कैकुले संरचनाओं में से किसी एक द्वारा ही नहीं प्राप्त किए जा सकते है। इससे प्रदर्शित होता है कि o-जाइलीन, वास्तव में दो कैकुले संरचनाओं ग्लाइऑक्सल (I तथा II) का अनुनादी रूप है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 31

प्रश्न 18.
बेंजीन, n – हेक्सेन तथा एथाइन को घटते हुए अम्लीय व्यवहार के क्रम में व्यवस्थित कीजिए और इस व्यवहार का कारण बताइए।
उत्तर:
अम्लीय सामर्थ्य का घटता हुआ क्रम है –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 32
अम्लीय अभिलक्षण S-अभिलक्षण की प्रतिशतता से सम्बन्धित होता है। 5-अभिलक्षण जितना अधिक होता है, कार्बन परमाणु की वैद्युत ऋणात्मकता उतनी ही अधिक होती है तथा उसका अम्लीय अभिलक्षण भी उतना ही अधिक होगा।

प्रश्न 19.
बेंजीन इलेक्ट्रॉनस्नेही प्रतिस्थापन अभिक्रियाएँ सरलतापूर्वक क्यों प्रदर्शित करती है, जबकि उसमें नाभिकस्नेही प्रतिस्थापन कठिन होता है ?
उत्तर:
बेंजीन में द्विआबन्धों को प्रदर्शित करने वाले तीन T – इलेक्ट्रॉनों युग्मों के कारण इलेक्ट्रॉन घनत्व उच्च होता है। यद्यपि इलेक्ट्रॉन आवेश अनुनाद के कारण बहुत अधिक विस्थानीकृत हो जाता है, तथापि इसमें इलेक्ट्रॉनस्नेही प्रतिस्थापन कराने वाला इलेक्ट्रॉन-स्नेही आक्रमण सम्भव होता है। किन्तु, बेंजीन नाभिकस्नेही प्रतिस्थापन के प्रति अनुक्रियाशील नहीं होता है क्योंकि नाभिकस्नेही प्राथमिकता के तौर पर कम इलेक्ट्रॉन घनत्व के केन्द्र पर आक्रमण करता है।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 20.
आप निम्नलिखित यौगिकों को बेंजीन में कैसे परिवर्तित करेंगे –

  1. एथाइन
  2. एथीन
  3. हेक्सेन।

उत्तर:
1. एथाइन से बेंजीन –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 33

2. एथीन से बेंजीन –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 34

3. हेक्सेन से बेंजीन –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 35

प्रश्न 21.
उन सभी एल्कीनों की संरचनाएँ लिखिए, जो हाइड्रोजनीकरण करने पर 2-मेथिलब्यूटेन देती हैं।
उत्तर:
उपर्युक्त प्रश्न को हम निम्न प्रकार से मालूम करेंगे –
2-मेथिलब्यूटेन प्राप्त करने के लिये कौन-सी एल्कीन लेनी होगी –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 36
उपर्युक्त संरचना को हमें एल्कीन से प्राप्त करनी है। उपर्युक्त संरचना में पास-पास वाले C परमाणुओं से H परमाणु हटा कर द्विबन्ध जोड़ दें।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 37

प्रश्न 22.
निम्नलिखित यौगिकों को उनकी इलेक्ट्रॉनस्नेही (E’) के प्रति घटती सापेक्षिक अभिक्रियाशीलता के क्रम में व्यवस्थित कीजिए –
1. क्लोरोबेंजीन, 2-4-डाइनाइट्रोक्लोरोबेंजीन, p-नाइट्रो-क्लोरोबेंजीन
2. टॉलुईन, P – H3C – C6H4 – NO2, P – O2N – C6H4 – NO2
उत्तर:
1. इलेक्ट्रॉनस्नेही प्रतिस्थापन के प्रति अभिक्रियाशीलता का घटता हुआ सही क्रम है –
क्लोरोबेंजीन >p-नाइट्रोक्लोरोबेंजीन >2,4-डाईनाइट्रोक्लोरोबेंजीन
नाइट्रो समूह (NO2) एक विसक्रियकारी समूह है। बेंजीन वलय पर इसकी उपस्थिति इसे इलेक्ट्रॉनस्नेही आक्रमण के प्रति विसक्रियित करेगी, क्योंकि इलेक्ट्रॉनस्नेही उच्च इलेक्ट्रॉन घनत्व के केन्द्र की खोज करता है। अतः नाइट्रो समूहों की संख्या जितनी ही अधिक होगी, इलेक्ट्रॉनस्नेही प्रतिस्थापन के प्रति यौगिकों की अभिक्रियाशीलता उतनी ही कम होगी।

2. घटती हुई अभिक्रियाशीलता का सही क्रम है – .
टॉलुईन > p – नाइट्रोटॉलुईन > p – डाईनाइट्रोबेंजीन
मेथिल समूह एक सक्रियकारी समूह है, जबकि नाइट्रो समूह की प्रकृति विसक्रियकारी होती है। इस तथ्य के प्रकाश में इलेक्ट्रॉनस्नेही आक्रमण के प्रति अभिक्रियाशीलता का घटता हुआ यह क्रम तर्कसंगत सिद्ध होता है –
टॉलुईन > बेंजीन > m-डाईनाइट्रोबेंजीन

प्रश्न 23.
बेंजीन, m – डाइनाइट्रोबेंजीन और टॉलुईन में से किसका नाइट्रीकरण आसानी से होता है। और क्यों ?
उत्तर:
बेंजीन के नाइट्रीकरण में वलय पर \(\mathrm{NO}_{2}^{\ominus}\) (नाइट्रोनियम आयन) का इलेक्ट्रॉनस्नेही आक्रमण होता है। चूंकि CH3 समूह में +I प्रभाव होता है, इसलिए यह वलय को सक्रिय कर देता है और इसका इलेक्ट्रॉनस्नेही प्रतिस्थापन आसानी से होता है। दूसरी ओर, नाइट्रो समूह की विसक्रियकारी प्रकृति के कारण यह m-डाइनाइट्रोबेंजीन में सबसे कठिनाई से होता है। इस प्रकार टॉलुईन का नाइट्रीकरण सबसे आसानी से होगा। टॉलुईन > बेंजीन > m – डाईनाइट्रोबेंजीन

प्रश्न 24.
बेंजीन के एथिलीकरण में निर्जल ऐल्युमिनियम क्लोराइड के स्थान पर कोई दूसरा लुईस अम्ल सुझाइए।
उत्तर;
निर्जल फेरिक क्लोराइड (FeCl5) वह अन्य लुईस अम्ल है जिसे प्रयुक्त कर सकते हैं। यह इलेक्ट्रॉनस्नेही (C2H5ई) पैदा करने में सहायक होता है। स्टेनिक क्लोराइड (SnCl4) एवं बोरॉन ट्राइफ्लुओराइड (BF3) . का भी प्रयोग किया जा सकता है।

प्रश्न 25.
क्या कारण है कि वुर्ट्ज अभिक्रिया से विषम संख्या कार्बन परमाणु वाले विशुद्ध ऐल्केन बनाने के लिए प्रयुक्त नहीं की जाती? एक उदाहरण देकर स्पष्ट कीजिए।
उत्तर:
कार्बन परमाणुओं की विषम संख्या वाले ऐल्केन के निर्माण में दो भिन्न-भिन्न हैलोऐल्केन आवश्यक होते हैं, जिनमें से एक में कार्बन परमाणुओं की विषम संख्या हो और दूसरे में सम संख्या हो। उदाहरण के लिए ब्रोमोएथेन और 1-ब्रोमोप्रोपेन इस अभिक्रिया के फलस्वरूप पेन्टेन देंगे।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 38
परन्तु जब इस अभिक्रिया में भाग लेने वाले सदस्य अलग-अलग अभिक्रिया करेंगे तो पार्श्व उत्पाद भी बनेंगे। उदाहरण के लिए, ब्रोमोएथेन, ब्यूटेन देता है और 1- ब्रोमोप्रोपेन, हेक्सेन देता हैं।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 39
इस प्रकार ब्यूटेन, पेन्टेन और हेक्सेन का मिश्रण बनेगा। इस मिश्रण से इनके घटकों को पृथक् करना काफी कठिन होगा।

हाइड्रोकार्बन अन्य महत्वपूर्ण प्रश्न

हाइड्रोकार्बन वस्तुनिष्ठ प्रश्न

प्रश्न 1.
सही विकल्प चुनकर लिखिए –

प्रश्न 1.
मेथेन में H – C – H बन्ध कोण है –
(a) 100°5′
(b) 109°
(c) 109°28′
(d) 180°
उत्तर:
(c) 109°28′

प्रश्न 2.
C = C में है –
(a) 30 बन्ध
(b) एक सिग्मा और तीन पाई बन्ध
(c) 37 बन्ध
(d) एक सिग्मा और दो पाई बन्ध
उत्तर:
(d) एक सिग्मा और दो पाई बन्ध

प्रश्न 3.
एथीन में है –
(a) पाँच सिग्मा और एक पाई बन्ध
(b) छ: सिग्मा बन्ध
(c) चार सिग्मा और दो पाई बन्ध
(d) पाँच सिग्मा बन्ध।
उत्तर:
(a) पाँच सिग्मा और एक पाई बन्ध

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 4.
किसकी क्रियाशीलता सर्वाधिक है –
(a) C2H2
(b) CH4
(c) C2H4
(d) C2H6.
उत्तर:
(a) C2H2

प्रश्न 5.
ज्यामितीय समावयवता प्रदर्शित करता है –
(a) ब्यूट-2-ईन
(b) ब्यूट-2-आइन
(c) ब्यूटेन-2-ऑल
(d) ब्यूटेनल।
उत्तर:
(a) ब्यूट-2-ईन

प्रश्न 6.
बेंजीन में कार्बन द्वारा उपयोग में लाई गई प्रसंकरित ऑर्बिटल (कक्षक) होती है –
(a) sp3
(b) sp2
(c) sp
(d) dsp3
उत्तर:
(b) sp2

प्रश्न 7.
HC ≡ C – CH = CH, के C – C एक आबन्ध के कार्बन परमाणुओं का संकरण है –
(a) sp3 – sp3
(b) sp2 – sp3
(c) sp3 – sp
(d) sp – sp2
उत्तर:
(d) sp – sp2

प्रश्न 8.
ब्यूट-1-इन में सिग्मा बन्धों की संख्या है –
(a) 8
(b) 10
(c) 11
(d) 12.
उत्तर:
(c) 11

प्रश्न 9.
एथिलीन में उपस्थित दो परमाणुओं के मध्य विद्यमान द्विबन्ध होता है –
(a) लम्बवत् दो सिग्मा-बन्ध
(b) एक सिग्मा (σ) तथा एक पाई (π) बन्ध
(c) लम्बवत् दो पाई-बन्ध
(d) 60 अंश का कोण बनाते हुए दो पाई-बन्ध।
उत्तर:
(b) एक सिग्मा (σ) तथा एक पाई (π) बन्ध

प्रश्न 10.
निम्न में से कौन-सा अभिकर्मक एथिलीन और ऐसीटिलीन में विभेद करता है –
(a) जलीय क्षारीय KMnO4
(b) CCl4 में Cl2 विलेय
(c) अमोनियामय Cu2 Cl2
(d) सान्द्र H2SO4
उत्तर:
(c) अमोनियामय Cu2Cl2

प्रश्न 11.
इंजन में अपस्फोटी ध्वनि उत्पन्न होती है, जब ईंधन –
(a) धीरे जलता है
(b) तेजी से जलता है
(c) पानी होता है
(d) मशीन तेल मिश्रित होता है।
उत्तर:
(b) तेजी से जलता है

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 12.
ईंधन का अपस्फोटक गुण बढ़ाने के लिये मिलाया जाता है –
(a) PbBr2
(b) ZnBr2
(c) Pbo
(d) TEL (Tetraethyl lead).
उत्तर:
(d) TEL (Tetraethyl lead).

प्रश्न 13.
मेथेन बनाने के लिए निम्न में से किस विधि का उपयोग किया जा सकता है –
(a) वु अभिक्रिया
(b) कोल्बे अभिक्रिया
(c) ऐल्किल हैलाइड का अपचयन
(d) ऐल्कीन का हाइड्रोजनीकरण।
उत्तर:
(c) ऐल्किल हैलाइड का अपचयन

प्रश्न 14.
जब ऐसीटिलीन HCl की उपस्थिति में HgCl2 से अभिक्रिया करती है, तो बनता है
(a) मेथिल क्लोराइड
(b) ऐसीटैल्डिहाइड
(c) वाइनिल क्लोराइड
(d) फॉर्मेल्डिहाइड।
उत्तर:
(b) ऐसीटैल्डिहाइड

प्रश्न 15.
जब प्रोपाइन को HgSO4 की उपस्थिति में जलीय H2 SO4 से प्रतिकृत किया जाता है, तो मुख्य उत्पाद बनता है –
(a) प्रोपेनल
(b) प्रोपिल हाइड्रोजन सल्फेट
(c) ऐसीटोन
(d) प्रोपेनॉल।
उत्तर:
(c) ऐसीटोन

प्रश्न 16.
प्रोपीन तथा प्रोपाइन में विभेद करने के लिए प्रयुक्त अभिकर्मक है –
(a) ब्रोमीन
(b) क्षारीय KMnO4
(c) अमोनियामय AgNO3
(d) ओजोन।
उत्तर:
(b) क्षारीय KMnO4

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 17.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 1
(a) वुज अभिक्रिया
(b) कोल्बे अभिक्रिया
(c) साबात्ये सेण्डेरेन्स अभिक्रिया
(d) कार्बिल-ऐमीन अभिक्रिया
उत्तर:
(c) साबात्ये सेण्डेरेन्स अभिक्रिया

प्रश्न 18.
अमोनियाकृत सिल्वर नाइट्रेट विलयन से अभिक्रिया करके C2 H2 बनाता है –
(a) सिल्वर दर्पण
(b) सिल्वर ऑक्साइड
(c) सिल्वर फॉर्मेट
(d) सिल्वर ऐसीटिलाइड।
उत्तर:
(d) सिल्वर ऐसीटिलाइड।

प्रश्न 19.
एक अज्ञात यौगिक A का अणु सूत्र C4 H6 है । जब Aकी ब्रोमीन की अधिक मात्रा से अभि क्रिया करायी जाती है, एक नया पदार्थ B बनता है जिसका अणुसूत्र C4 H6 Br4 है। A अमोनिया युक्त AgNO3 के साथ सफेद अवक्षेप देता है। A हो सकता है –
(a) ब्यूट-1-आइन
(b) ब्यूट-2-आइन
(c) ब्यूट-1-ईन
(d) ब्यूट-2-ईन।
उत्तर:
(b) ब्यूट-2-आइन

प्रश्न 20.
क्रियाशीलता बढ़ाने वाले समूह होते हैं –
(a) o-,p-निर्देशकारी समूह
(b) m-निर्देशकारी समूह
(0) NO2
(d) इनमें से कोई नहीं।
उत्तर:
(a) o-,p-निर्देशकारी समूह

प्रश्न 21.
निम्नलिखित में से कौन-सा एल्केन, वु अभिक्रिया द्वारा प्राप्त नहीं होता है –
(a) CH4
(b) C2H6
(c) C3H8
(d) C4H10
उत्तर:
(a) CH4

प्रश्न 22.
निम्न में प्रति ऐरोमैटिक है –
(a) बेंजीन
(b) साइक्लोऑक्टाडाईन
(c) ट्रोपोलियम धनायन
(d) साइक्लोपेन्टाडाइनील धनायन।
उत्तर:
(d) साइक्लोपेन्टाडाइनील धनायन।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 2.
रिक्त स्थानों की पूर्ति कीजिये –

  1. कैरोसीन तेल …………. का मिश्रण है।
  2. ………… में कार्बन-कार्बन बन्ध लम्बाई न्यूनतम होती है।
  3. प्रोपीन तथा प्रोपाइन में विभेद करने के लिए ………… अभिकर्मक प्रयुक्त किया जाता है।
  4. टेफ्लॉन …………. का बहुलक है।
  5. एथेनॉल के निर्जलीकरण से ………… बनता है।
  6. बेंजीन H2 से योग करके …………. बनाता है।
  7. ज्यामितीय समावयवता ……………… में पायी जाती है।
  8. सर्वाधिक स्थायी संरूपी …………… रूप होता है।
  9. विपक्ष समावयवी, समरूप समावयवी से …………. स्थायी होता है।
  10. ऐल्युमीनियम कार्बाइड की जल से अभिक्रिया कराने पर …………. प्राप्त होता है।

उत्तर:

  1. एल्केन
  2. एथाइन
  3. बेयर अभिकर्मक (क्षारीय KMnO4)
  4. टेट्रा फ्लोरो एथिलीन
  5. एथीन
  6. साइक्लोहेक्सेन
  7. ऐल्कीन
  8. सांतरित
  9. अधिक
  10. CH4

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 3.
उचित संबंध जोडिए –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 2
उत्तर:

  1. (b) कोल्बे अभिक्रिया
  2. (d) वु अभिक्रिया से
  3. (e) मेथेन।
  4. (a) इलेक्ट्रॉन स्नेही प्रतिस्थापन अभिक्रिया
  5. (c) sp – संकरण

MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 3

उत्तर:

  1. (e) पार्श्व अतिव्यापन
  2. (a) इलेक्ट्रॉन स्नेही प्रतिस्थापन
  3. (1) 0, p समूह
  4. (b) असंतृप्त हाइड्रोकार्बन
  5. (c) द्रवीभूत पेट्रोलियम गैस
  6. (g) कम्प्रेस्ड नेचुरल गैस
  7. (d) समपक्ष-विपक्ष समावयवी

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 4.
एक शब्द / वाक्य में उत्तर दीजिए –
1. T.E.L. का पूरा नाम है।
2. एथिलीन डाइ ब्रोमाइड को Zn चूर्ण के साथ गर्म करने पर क्या बनता है?
3. L.P.G. में दुर्गन्ध पैदा करने वाले पदार्थ का नाम बताइये।
4. पोटैशियम एसीटेट के जलीय विलयन के विद्युत् अपघटन से एथेन बनता है, इस विधि का नाम बताइए।
5. MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 4
6. MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 5

प्रश्न 7.
एल्किल हैलाइड व सोडियम से ऐल्केन बनाने के लिए प्रयुक्त अभिक्रिया का नाम लिखिए।
उत्तर:
1. टेट्रा एथिल लेड
2. एथिलीन
3. एथिल मर्केप्टेन
4. कोल्बे अभिक्रिया
5. साबात्ये सेण्डरेन्स अपचयन अभिक्रिया
6. (A) CH = CH, (B) CH3 – CHO, (C) CH3– CH2– OH
7. वु फिटिग अभिक्रिया।

हाइड्रोकार्बन अति लघु उत्तरीय प्रश्न

प्रश्न 1.
ऐल्काइन के द्रव अमोनिया में सोडियम द्वारा अपचयन के फलस्वरूप विपक्ष ऐल्कीन बनती है। क्या 2-ब्यूटाइन के इस प्रकार हुए अपचयन के फलस्वरूप ब्यूटीन ज्यामितीय समावयवता प्रदर्शित करेगी?
उत्तर:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 40
2-ब्यूटाइन के अपचयन से प्राप्त विपक्ष-2-ब्यूटीन ज्यामितीय समावयवता प्रदर्शित करती है।

प्रश्न 2.
-1 प्रभाव के बावजूद, हैलोजन, हैलोएरीन यौगिकों में 0 – (ऑर्थो) तथा p – (पैरा) निर्देशी होती है। कारण स्पष्ट कीजिए।
उत्तर:
हैलोजन अत्यधिक निष्क्रिय समूह है। इनके प्रबल – I प्रभाव के कारण बेन्जीन वलय पर इलेक्ट्रॉन घनत्व घटता है। परन्तु अनुनाद के कारण o – तथा p – स्थानों पर इलेक्ट्रॉन घनत्व m – स्थान की अपेक्षा अधिक होता है। जिसके कारण ये o – तथा p – निर्देशी समूह होते हैं।

प्रश्न 3.
एल्केनों से एल्कीन की अधिक क्रियाशीलता का क्या कारण है ?
उत्तर:
एल्केनों में C – C के मध्य केवल आबन्ध होता है। जबकि एल्कीन में C = C के मध्य एक – आबन्ध और एक आबंध होता है। पार्वीय अतिव्यापन के कारण π बंध, σ बंध से दुर्बल होता है। इस कारण ऐल्कीन, ऐल्केनों से अधिक क्रियाशील है। 1 आबंध की आबन्ध ऊर्जा (251 kJ/mol) σ आबंध की आबंध ऊर्जा (347kJ/mol) से कम होने के कारण भी इनकी क्रियाशीलता ऐल्केन से अधिक होती है।

प्रश्न 4.
असममित कार्बन किसे कहते हैं ?
उत्तर:
वह कार्बन परमाणु जिससे चार भिन्न समूह या परमाणु जुड़े रहते हैं। असममित कार्बन परमाणु कहलाता है। इस असममित कार्बन की उपस्थिति के कारण यौगिक असममिति दर्शाता है तथा प्रकाश घूर्णकता का गुण दर्शाता है।

प्रश्न 5.
ब्यूटेन के ग्रसित तथा सांतरित संरूपों का न्यूमैन प्रक्षेप आरेख दीजिए।
उत्तर:
ब्यूटेन का संरचना सूत्र –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 41

प्रश्न 6.
किरेलता से क्या समझते हो?
उत्तर:
वे अणु जो अपने दर्पण प्रतिबिम्ब पर अध्यारोपित नहीं होते हैं किरेल अणु कहलाते हैं तथा इस गुण को किरेलता कहते हैं। किरेल अणु ध्रुवण घूर्णक होते हैं। अणु में उपस्थित किरेलता असममित कार्बन परमाणु की उपस्थिति के कारण होती है। जिन अणुओं में किरेलता होती है वे ध्रुवण घूर्णक होते हैं लेकिन असममित कार्बन परमाणु युक्त अणु में ध्रुवण घूर्णकता हो यह जरूरी नहीं है। वे ध्रुवण घूर्णक हो भी सकते हैं और नहीं भी।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 7.
ऐल्केन किसे कहते हैं ? तथा इनमें किस प्रकार के बंध होते हैं ?
उत्तर:
ऐल्केन संतृप्त हाइड्रोकार्बन हैं। इन्हें पैराफिन भी कहते हैं। ये अत्यन्त कम क्रियाशील होते हैं तथा अधिक स्थायी होते हैं। इनका सामान्य सूत्र – CnH2n+2होता है। ऐल्केन में कार्बन – कार्बन के मध्य एकल बंध व 6 बंध होता है तथा कार्बन-हाइड्रोजन बंध भी बंध होता है। ऐल्केन में प्रत्येक कार्बन sp3 संकरित अवस्था में होता है।
उदाहरण – मेथेन CH4एथेन C2H6

प्रश्न 8.
ऐल्कीन किसे कहते हैं ? इनमें कार्बन किस संकरित अवस्था में होता है ?
उत्तर:
ऐल्कीन असंतृप्त हाइड्रोकार्बन होते हैं। इन्हें ओलीफिन भी कहते हैं। ये ऐल्केन की तुलना में अधिक क्रियाशील होते हैं तथा इनका स्थायित्व ऐल्केन की तुलना में कम होता है। ये सरलता से योगात्मक अभिक्रिया देते हैं। इनका सामान्य सूत्र CnH2n – 2 होता है। ऐल्कीन में कार्बन-कार्बन के बीच द्विबंध होता है तथा कार्बन sp संकरित अवस्था में होता है। उदाहरण – एथिलीन CH2 = CH2 प्रोपीलीन CH3 – CH = CH2

प्रश्न 9.
ऐल्काइन किसे कहते हैं ? तथा इनमें किस प्रकार के बंध होते हैं
उत्तर:
ऐल्काइन असंतृप्त हाइड्रोकार्बन होते हैं। ये अत्यधिक क्रियाशील होते हैं तथा अत्यधिक अस्थायी होते हैं। इनका सामान्य सूत्र CnH2n+1 होता है।
कार्बन – कार्बन के मध्य त्रिबंध होता है। जिसमें एक बंध व दो 7 बंध होते हैं तथा दोनों कार्बन sp संकरित अवस्था में होते हैं।
उदाहरण – एसीटिलीन CH = CH, प्रोपाईन CH3 – C ≡ CH2

प्रश्न 10.
समपक्ष-विपक्ष समावयवता क्या होती है ? उदाहरण सहित समझाइये।
उत्तर:
समपक्ष-विपक्ष समावयवता को ज्यामितीय समावयवता भी कहते हैं, जो युग्म बंध युक्त ऐसे यौगिकों के द्वारा दर्शायी जाती है, जिनमें युग्म बन्धित कार्बन परमाणु दो भिन्न परमाणुओं या समूहों द्वारा जुड़े रहते हैं। जब समान समूह या हाइड्रोजन परमाणु द्विबंध के एक ही ओर स्थित होते हैं तो प्राप्त यौगिक समपक्ष समावयवयी तथा जब विपरीत ओर स्थित होते हैं, तो प्राप्त यौगिक विपक्ष समावयवयी कहलाता है।
उदाहरण – CH3 CH = CH – CH3
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 42
प्रश्न 11.
ऐसीटिलीन से नाइट्रोबेन्जीन आप किस प्रकार प्राप्त करोगे?
उत्तर:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 43
प्रश्न 12.
इलेक्ट्रॉन स्नेही तथा नाभिक स्नेही क्रमशः इलेक्ट्रॉन न्यून तथा इलेक्ट्रॉन समृद्ध अभिक्रिया मध्यवर्ती है। अतः इनकी प्रवृत्ति क्रमशः इलेक्ट्रॉन समृद्ध तथा इलेक्ट्रॉन न्यून नाभिकों पर आक्रमण करने की होती है। निम्नलिखित स्पीशीज को इलेक्ट्रॉन स्नेही तथा नाभिक स्नेही के रूप में वर्गीकृत कीजिए –
(i) H3CO
(iii) Cl
(iv) Cl2C:
(v) (CH3)3C+
(vi) Br
(vii) CH3OH,
(viii) R – NH – R
उत्तर:
इलेक्ट्रॉन स्नेही, इलेक्ट्रॉन न्यून स्पीशीज होते हैं। ये उदासीन या धनावेशित हो सकते हैं।
(iii) Cl,
(iv) Cl2C:
(v) (CH3)3C
नाभिक स्नेही, इलेक्ट्रॉन समृद्ध स्पीशीज होते है। ये उदासीन या ऋणावेशित हो सकते हैं।
(i) CH3O
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 45
प्रश्न 13.
साइक्लोहेक्सेन की तुलना में साइक्लोप्रोपेन अधिक क्रियाशील होता है, क्यों ?
उत्तर:
साइक्लोप्रोपेन में C – C – C बंध कोण 60° का होता है, जिसके कारण वलय तनाव में होता है इसलिये इसका स्थायित्व कम तथा क्रियाशीलता अधिक होती है। जबकि साइक्लोहेक्सेन में C – C – C बंध कोण 109°28 के पास होता है, जिसके कारण वलय का तनाव कम होता है, जिसके कारण इसका स्थायित्व अधिक और क्रियाशीलता कम होती है।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 14.
क्रियात्मक समावयवता को उदाहरण सहित समझाइये।
उत्तर:
जब दो या दो से अधिक यौगिकों में अलग-अलग क्रियात्मक समूह उपस्थित हों पर उनका अणुसूत्र एक ही हो तो इस प्रकार उत्पन्न समावयवता को क्रियात्मक समावयवता कहते हैं।
उदाहरण – C2H6O
CH3 – O – CH2 ⇔ C2H5 – OH.

प्रश्न 15.
वियोजन क्या है ?
उत्तर:
उपयुक्त विधियों द्वारा रेसेमिक मिश्रण को d या ! प्रतिबिम्ब समावयवयी में पृथक् करने की विधि को वियोजन कहते हैं। इसके लिये यौगिक, जीव रासायनिक एवं रासायनिक विधियों द्वारा वियोजन किया जा सकता है।

प्रश्न 16.
एरीन में कौन-सी समावयवता पायी जाती है ? उदाहरण सहित स्पष्ट कीजिए।
उत्तर:
एरीन में स्थिति समावयवता पायी जाती है। टॉलुईन के अतिरिक्त सभी बेंजीन के यौगिकों में स्थिति समावयवता होती है।
उदाहरण – C8H10 चार समावयवयी रूपों में मिलता है
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 46

प्रश्न 17.
ऐल्काइन की अम्लीय प्रकृति को दर्शाने के लिये एक अभिक्रिया लिखिए।
उत्तर:
वे ऐल्काइन जिनके अणु के अंतिम छोर में त्रिबंध होता है, वे दुर्बल अम्ल की तरह कार्य करते हैं । ऐसे ऐल्काइन की अभिक्रिया Na, Ca जैसी क्रियाशील धातुओं से कराने पर ये हाइड्रोजन मुक्त करते हैं तथा इनके व्युत्पन्न प्राप्त होते हैं, जिन्हें एसीटिलाइड कहते हैं।

प्रश्न 18.
बेयर अभिकर्मक क्या है, तथा इससे असंतृप्तता का परीक्षण कैसे करते हैं ?
उत्तर:
क्षारीय KMnO4 को बेयर अभिकर्मक कहते हैं। असंतृप्त हाइड्रोकार्बन की अभिक्रिया बेयर अभिकर्मक से कराने पर क्षारीय KMnO4 का रंग उड़ जाता है। इसलिये इसका उपयोग यौगिक की असंतृप्तता के परीक्षण के लिये करते हैं।

प्रश्न 19.
ऐल्कीन पर बेयर अभिकर्मक की अभिक्रिया को समीकरण सहित स्पष्ट कीजिए।
उत्तर:
एथिलीन कमरे के ताप पर 1% क्षारीय KMnO4 अर्थात् बेयर अभिकर्मक के साथ अभिक्रिया कराने पर एथिलीन ग्लाइकॉल बनाता है तथा इस योगात्मक अभिक्रिया के कारण KMnO4 का गुलाबी रंग उड़ जाता है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 47

प्रश्न 20.
परॉक्साइड प्रभाव क्या है ? एक उदाहरण दीजिए।
उत्तर:
यदि कार्बनिक परॉक्साइड जैसे बेंजॉयल परॉक्साइड की उपस्थिति में असममित एल्कीन या एल्काइन पर असममित अभिकर्मक का योग कराया जाता है तो अभिक्रिया मार्कोनीकॉफ नियम के विपरीत होती है। इस अभिक्रिया को प्रति मार्कोनीकॉफ नियम या परॉक्साइड प्रभाव या खराश प्रभाव कहते हैं।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 48

प्रश्न 21.
एथेन, एथिलीन तथा एसीटिलीन में विभेद कैसे करते हैं ? परीक्षण सहित समझाइए।
उत्तर:
एथेन, एथिलीन तथा एसीटिलीन में विभेद –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 49

प्रश्न 22.
बर्थलोट संश्लेषण क्या है ?
उत्तर:
दो कार्बन इलेक्ट्रोड के बीच विद्युत् आर्क में से हाइड्रोजन गैस की धारा प्रवाहित करने पर एसीटिलीन प्राप्त होता है। इसे बर्थलोट संश्लेषण कहते हैं।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 50

प्रश्न 23.
वेस्ट्रॉन तथा वेस्ट्रॉसोल क्या है ?
उत्तर:
(1) ऐसीटिलीन पर CCl4, विलायक की उपस्थिति में हैलोजन की योगात्मक अभिक्रिया से बना .. यौगिक वेस्ट्रॉन कहलाता है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 51
(2) वेस्ट्रॉन को ऐल्कोहॉलिक KOH के साथ गर्म किया जाता है तो विहाइड्रो – हैलोजनीकरण के कारण वेस्ट्रॉसोल प्राप्त होता है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 52
प्रश्न 24.
प्रोटोट्रॉफी किसे कहते हैं ?
उत्तर:
प्रोपाइन पर जलयोजन होने पर इनॉल व कीटो रूप प्राप्त होते हैं। यह चलावयवता समावयवता को प्रदर्शित करते हैं तथा इस प्रकार की समावयवता उन यौगिकों में होती है, जिनमें कम-से-कम एक हाइड्रोजन होता है तथा एक स्थिति से दूसरे तक प्रोटॉन के स्थानांतरण के कारण उत्पन्न होती है इसे प्रोटोट्रॉफी कहते हैं।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 53
प्रश्न 25.
संरूपण समावयवता किसे कहते हैं ?
उत्तर:
कार्बन-कार्बन एकल बंध के मध्य घूर्णन के कारण जो विभिन्न आकाशीय व्यवस्थाएँ उत्पन्न होती हैं वे संरूपी कहलाती हैं तथा संरूपियों से सम्बन्धित आण्विक ज्यामिति को संरूपण समावयवता कहते हैं।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 26.
बहुलीकरण अभिक्रिया को उदाहरण सहित समझाइये।
उत्तर:
वह रासायनिक अभिक्रिया जिसमें दो या दो से अधिक सरल इकाई जिन्हें एकलक कहते हैं। परस्पर संयोजन कर एक जटिल अणु का निर्माण करते हैं बहुलक कहलाते हैं तथा इस अभिक्रिया को बहुलीकरण कहते हैं।
उदाहरण – एथिलीन अणुओं के बहुलीकरण से पॉलीएथिलीन बनता है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 54
प्रश्न 27.
एल्कीन इलेक्ट्रॉन स्नेही योगात्मक अभिक्रियाएँ प्रदर्शित करती है, जबकि ऐरीन इलेक्ट्रॉनस्नेही प्रतिस्थापन अभिक्रियाएँ प्रदर्शित करती है। कारण स्पष्ट कीजिए।
उत्तर:
एल्कीन ढीले बँधे π – इलेक्ट्रॉनों के धनी स्रोत होते है, जिसके कारण ये इलेक्ट्रॉनस्नेही योगात्मक अभिक्रियाएँ प्रदर्शित करता है। ऐल्कीनों की इलेक्ट्रॉन स्नेही योगात्मक अभिक्रियाओं में ऊर्जा में अत्यधिक बदलाव आता है। जिसके कारण ये इलेक्ट्रॉन स्नेही प्रतिस्थापन अभिक्रियाओं की अपेक्षा ऊर्जात्मक रूप से अधिक प्रभावी होती है। एरीन में इलेक्ट्रॉन स्नेही योगात्मक अभिक्रिया के दौरान बेंजीन वलय की ऐरोमैटिक प्रकृति नष्ट हो जाती है जबकि इलेक्ट्रॉन स्नेही प्रतिस्थापन अभिक्रिया में यह स्थिर रहती है। ऐरीन की इलेक्ट्रॉन स्नेही प्रतिस्थापन अभिक्रियाएँ ऊर्जात्मक रूप से इलेक्ट्रॉन स्नेही योगात्मक अभिक्रियाओं की अपेक्षा अधिक प्रभावी होती है।

प्रश्न 28.
ज्यामितीय समावयवता की आवश्यक शर्ते क्या हैं ?
उत्तर:
ज्यामितीय समावयवता के लिये निम्नलिखित शर्ते आवश्यक हैं –

  • इसमें कम-से-कम एक कार्बन-कार्बन द्विबंध होना चाहिए।
  • द्विबंधित कार्बन परमाणु से जुड़े परमाणु या समूह भिन्न-भिन्न होने चाहिए।

प्रश्न 29.
सेटजेफ नियम क्या है ? उदाहरण सहित समझाइये।
उत्तर:
यदि ऐल्किल हैलाइड में से हाइड्रोजन हैलाइड का विलोपन किया जाता है तो यह भिन्न-भिन्न प्रकार से हो सकता है तथा ऐल्कीन प्राप्त होता है। इस नियम के अनुसार उस ऐल्कीन के बनने की संभावना अधिक होगी, जिसमें द्विबंध से जुड़े कार्बन परमाणु अधिक ऐल्किलीकृत होते हैं। अर्थात् हाइड्रोजन का विलोपन उस कार्बन से होता है जहाँ हाइड्रोजन की संख्या कम होती है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 55
प्रश्न 30.
ऑक्टेन संख्या से आप क्या समझते हैं ?
उत्तर:
विभिन्न ईंधनों के तुलनात्मक अपस्फोटरोधी गुण को व्यक्त करने के लिए एडगर ने सन् 1927 में ऑक्टेन अंक शब्द प्रयुक्त किया, जिसके अनुसार किसी ईंधन की ऑक्टेन संख्या आवश्यकतानुसार आइसो ऑक्टेन के मिश्रण में उपस्थित होती है, जिसका किसी मानक (Standard) इंजन में अपस्फोटन दिये हुए ईंधन के अपस्फोटन के बराबर होता है, अर्थात् किसी ईंधन की ऑक्टेन संख्या, हेप्टेन तथा आइसो ऑक्टेन के मिश्रण में आइसो ऑक्टेन का प्रतिशत होती है।

प्रश्न 31.
पैराफीन्स, ओलिफीन्स एवं ऐसीटिलीन की निम्न बिन्दुओं में तुलना कीजिए –
1. IUPAC नाम
2. सामान्य सूत्र
3. क्रियाशीलता
4. ब्रोमीन जल से क्रिया।
उत्तर:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 56

हाइड्रोकार्बन लघु उत्तरीय प्रश्न

प्रश्न 1.
बेन्जीन, n – हेक्सेन तथा एथाइन को घटते हुए अम्लीय व्यवहार के क्रम में व्यवस्थित कीजिए और इस व्यवहार का कारण बताइए।
उत्तर:
दिये गये यौगिकों में कार्बन की संकरण अवस्था निम्न है –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 57
अम्लीय व्यवहार, कक्षक के S – गुण में वृद्धि के साथ-साथ बढ़ता है। अतः बेन्जीन, n-हेक्सेन तथा एथाइन के अम्लीय व्यवहार का घटता हुआ क्रम निम्न है –
ऐथाइन > बेन्जीन > n – हेक्सेन

प्रश्न 2.
किसी निकाय द्वारा ऐरोमैटिकता प्रदर्शित करने के लिए आवश्यक शर्ते क्या हैं ?
उत्तर:
किसी निकाय द्वारा ऐरोमैटिकता प्रदर्शित करने के लिए आवश्यक शर्ते निम्न हैं –

  • अणु समतलीय होना चाहिए।
  • अणु चक्रीय होना चाहिए जिसमें एकान्तर क्रम में एकल तथा द्विबंध होना चाहिए अर्थात् वलय में T – इलेक्ट्रॉनों का संपूर्ण विस्थानीकरण होना चाहिए।
  • अणु के वलय (ring) में (4n + 2) π इलेक्ट्रॉन होने चाहिए। जहाँ n = 0,1,2,3 …….. (ह्यूकेल नियम)। यदि कोई अणु उपरोक्त में से किसी एक अथवा अधिक दशाओं को संतुष्ट नहीं कर पाता है, तो उसे अ-ऐरोमैटिक कहते हैं।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 3.
मध्यावयवता समावयवता क्या है ? उदाहरण सहित समझाइये।
उत्तर:
जब दो या दो से अधिक यौगिकों के अणुसूत्र समान हो और उनमें उपस्थित क्रियात्मक समूह भी समान हो लेकिन उनसे जुड़े एल्किल मूलक में भिन्नता हो तो इस प्रकार उत्पन्न समावयवता को मध्यावयवता कहते हैं।
उदाहरण –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 58
प्रश्न 4.
चलावयवता समावयवता क्या है ? उदाहरण सहित समझाइये।
उत्तर:
यह एक विशिष्ट प्रकार की क्रियात्मक समावयवता है, जिसमें दोनों समावयवयी साम्य अवस्था में होते हैं तथा सरलता से एक-दूसरे में परिवर्तित हो सकते हैं। इस प्रकार की समावयवता तब उत्पन्न होती है, जब हाइड्रोजन या कोई भी अन्य समूह द्विबंध या त्रिबंध के दोनों तरफ दोलन करता है।
यह दो प्रकार की होती है –
1. द्विक प्रणाली – इस प्रणाली में हाइड्रोजन का दोलन दो बहु-संयोजकीय परमाणुओं के बीच होता है।
उदाहरण – H – C = N – H – N – C
2. त्रिक प्रणाली – इस प्रणाली में हाइड्रोजन का दोलन तीन बहु-संयोजकीय परमाणुओं के बीच होता है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 59
इनॉल रूप इसे कीटो-इनॉल समावयवता भी कहते हैं।

प्रश्न 5.
न्यूमैन प्रक्षेपण सूत्र क्या है ?
उत्तर:
यदि दो कार्बन परमाणु के मध्य एकल बंध उपस्थित हो और दोनों कार्बन को एक वृत्त के रूप में दर्शाया जाये तथा इनसे जुड़े हाइड्रोजन को C – H बंध द्वारा उनके केन्द्र से जुड़ा हुआ दर्शाया जाये। यदि दोनों कार्बन एक-दूसरे के पीछे व्यवस्थित हो तो उनमें से केवल सामने वाला कार्बन दिखाई देता है तथा उससे जुड़े हुए तीनों हाइड्रोजन उसके केन्द्र से जुड़े दिखाई देते हैं तथा पीछे वाले कार्बन के हाइड्रोजन पहले कार्बन की परिधि पर जुड़े हुए दिखाई देते हैं।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 60
प्रश्न 6.
मार्कोनीकॉफ नियम क्या है ? उदाहरण सहित समझाइये।
उत्तर:
जब सममित हाइड्रोकार्बन पर असममित अभिकर्मक का योग होता है तो आक्रमणकारी समूह का एक भाग द्विबंध या त्रिबंध वाले एक कार्बन परमाणु पर तथा दूसरा भाग दूसरे कार्बन परमाणु पर जुड़ता है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 61
लेकिन जब असममित ऐल्कीन पर असममित अभिकर्मक का योग होता है तो सामान्यतः अभिक्रिया मार्कोनीकॉफ नियम के अनुसार होती है। इस नियम के अनुसार युग्म बंध पर जुड़ने वाले आक्रमणकारी समूह का ऋणात्मक भाग द्विबंध से जुड़े उस कार्बन परमाणु पर जुड़ता है जिस पर हाइड्रोजन की संख्या न्यूनतम होती है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 62
प्रश्न 7.
रेसेमिक मिश्रण को उदाहरण सहित समझाइये।
उत्तर:
दो प्रतिबिम्ब समावयवी की समान मात्राओं का मिश्रण ध्रुवण घूर्णकता नहीं दर्शाता क्योंकि मिश्रण में उपस्थित दोनों प्रतिबिम्ब समावयवी की ध्रुवण घूर्णकता बराबर किन्तु विपरीत दिशा में होती है तथा एक – दूसरे के कारण उत्पन्न ध्रुवण घूर्णकता को विनष्ट कर देती है। ऐसे मिश्रण को रेसेमिक मिश्रण कहते हैं तथा इसे dl या ± चिन्ह द्वारा दर्शाते हैं। उदाहरण – रेसेमिक लेक्टिक अम्ल – यह d तथा l रूप का समअणुक मिश्रण है। इसमें 50% d रूप तथा 50% l रूप होता है। यह रूप ध्रुवण अघूर्णक होता है तथा इसे d तथा l रूप में वियोजित किया जा सकता है। इसे dl या ± द्वारा दर्शाते हैं।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 63
प्रश्न 8.
ऐल्केन की प्रतिस्थापन अभिक्रिया को उदाहरण सहित समझाइये।
उत्तर:
वह अभिक्रिया जिसमें किसी यौगिक में उपस्थित परमाणु किसी अन्य परमाणु या मूलक से इस प्रकार प्रतिस्थापित होता है कि यौगिक की आंतरिक संरचना में कोई परिवर्तन नहीं आता प्रतिस्थापन अभिक्रिया कहलाती है। ऐल्केन में होने वाली हैलोजनीकरण, नाइट्रीकरण, सल्फोनीकरण अभिक्रिया इसके उदाहरण हैं। हैलोजनीकरण अभिक्रिया – ऐल्केन की अभिक्रिया क्लोरीन के साथ सूर्य प्रकाश की उपस्थिति में कराने पर ऐल्केन में उपस्थित हाइड्रोजन का प्रतिस्थापन क्लोरीन द्वारा होता है तथा क्रमशः मोनो, डाई, ट्राई तथा टेट्रा हैलोएल्केन का मिश्रण प्राप्त होता है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 64
प्रश्न 9.
B.H.C. क्या है ? इसका उपयोग बताइये।
उत्तर:
बेंजीन की अभिक्रिया सूर्य प्रकाश अथवा पराबैंगनी प्रकाश की उपस्थिति में क्लोरीन से कराने पर बेंजीन हेक्साक्लोराइड प्राप्त होता है।
यह आठ त्रिविम समावयवयी रूपों में मिलता है। लेकिन इसके केवल चार समावयवयी रूप α β γ या δ रूप को शुद्ध अवस्था में प्राप्त किया जा सकता है। इसके विभिन्न समावयवयी रूप हाइड्रोजन तथा क्लोरीन की विभिन्न व्यवस्थाओं के कारण उत्पन्न होते हैं। इसका γ समावयवयी रूप सबसे अधिक स्थायी तथा प्रबल कीटनाशी है। इसको लिण्डेन या गैमेक्सेन या 666 के नाम से भी जाना जाता है। इसका उपयोग कीटाणुनाशक के रूप में होता है।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 10.
निम्नलिखित परिवर्तन कैसे करोगे केवल समीकरण दीजिए –

  1. मेथेन से एथेन
  2. एथेन से मेथेन
  3. ऐसीटिलीन से बेंजीन।

उत्तर:
1. मेथेन से एथेन –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 65

2. एथेन से मेथेन –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 67
3. ऐसीटिलीन से बेंजीन –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 68

प्रश्न 11.
कैसे प्राप्त करोगे (केवल समीकरण दीजिए) –

  1. बेंजीन से B.H.C.
  2. बेंजीन से ऐसीटोफिनोन
  3. क्लोरोएथीन से पी.वी.सी.
  4. टेट्राफ्लोरो एथीन से टेफ्लॉन।

उत्तर:
1. बेंजीन से B.H.C –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 69
2. बेंजीन से ऐसीटोफिनोन –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 70
3. क्लोरोएथीन से –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 71
4. टेट्राफ्लोरो एथीन से टेफ्लॉन
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 72

प्रश्न 12.
ज्यामितीय समावयवता किस प्रकार के यौगिकों में पायी जाती है ? उदाहरण सहित समझाइये।
उत्तर:
यह एक प्रकार की त्रिविम समावयवता है। जो युग्म बंध युक्त ऐसे यौगिकों द्वारा प्रदर्शित की जाती है, जिनमें युग्म बंधित कार्बन परमाणु से जुड़े दो परमाणु या समूह भिन्न-भिन्न प्रकार के हो सकते हैं। जब समान परमाणु या समूह द्विबंध के एक ओर स्थित होते हैं तो प्राप्त यौगिक समपक्ष समावयवयी कहलाता है तथा जब विपरीत परमाणु या समूह द्विबंध के एक ओर स्थित हो तो प्राप्त यौगिक विपक्ष समावयवयी कहलाता है। इसलिये इसे समपक्ष-विपक्ष समावयवता भी कहते हैं।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 73
उदाहरण – 2 – butene
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 74

प्रश्न 13.
ह्यूकेल का नियम क्या है ?
उत्तर:
ह्यूकेल ने अनेक ऐरोमैटिक यौगिकों का अध्ययन करने के पश्चात् एक नियम प्रतिपादित किया जिसे ह्यूकेल का नियम कहते हैं। इस नियम के अनुसार वे सभी समतलीय चक्रीय यौगिक ऐरोमैटिक गुण प्रदर्शित करते हैं। जिनके चक्र में (4n + 2) π इलेक्ट्रॉन होते हैं, यहाँ n पूर्णांक है जिसका मान 0, 1, 2 ………. होता है। अत: जिन चक्रीय यौगिक में 6(n = 1), 10 (n = 2), 14(n=3) इलेक्ट्रॉन होते हैं, उनमें ऐरोमैटिक गुण होता – है। ऐरोमैटिक यौगिक दो प्रकार के होते हैं –
1. बेंजीनोइड्स – वे यौगिक जो एक या अधिक बेंजीन वलय युक्त होते हैं, बेंजीनोइड्स कहलाते हैं।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 75

2. नॉन – बेन्जीनोइड्स – ऐसे यौगिक जिनमें बेंजीन रिंग नहीं होती है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 76

प्रश्न 14.
ऐल्कीन सरलता से योगात्मक अभिक्रिया प्रदर्शित करता है, क्यों ?
उत्तर:
ऐल्कीन एक असंतृप्त हाइड्रोकार्बन है। इसमें कार्बन – कार्बन के बीच द्विबंध होता है तथा इस द्विबंध में एक σ बंध एक π बंध होता है। बंध – बंध की तुलना में दुर्बल होता है। इस π बंध की उपस्थिति के कारण एल्कीन सरलता से योगात्मक अभिक्रिया दर्शाता है। इस योगात्मक अभिक्रिया के दौरान एक π बंध टूटता है तो दो नये σ बंध का निर्माण होता है।
CH2 = CH2 + HCl → CH3 – CH2Cl

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 15.
फ्रीडल क्राफ्ट्स अभिक्रिया को समीकरण सहित दर्शाइये।
उत्तर:
एल्किलीकरण:
बेंजीन की अभिक्रिया निर्जल AlCl3 की उपस्थिति में CH3Cl के साथ कराने पर टॉलुईन प्राप्त होता है। इस अभिक्रिया के दौरान बेंजीन में से हाइड्रोजन का प्रतिस्थापन एल्किल समूह द्वारा होता है इसलिये इसे एल्किलीकरण कहते हैं।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 78
एसिलीकरण – बेंजीन की अभिक्रिया निर्जल AlCl3 की उपस्थिति में एसीटिल क्लोराइड

के साथ कराने पर एसीटोफिनोन प्राप्त होता है। इस अभिक्रिया के दौरान बेंजीन में से हाइड्रोजन का प्रतिस्थापन एसीटिल या एसिल समूह द्वारा होता है। इसलिये इसे एसिटलीकरण या एसिलीकरण अभिक्रिया कहते हैं।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 141

प्रश्न 16.
ज्यामितीय समावयवियों के नामकरण हेतु E व z संकेत क्या है ?
उत्तर:
जब द्विबंधित कार्बन परमाणु पर सभी चारों समूह अलग – अलग हों तो ज्यामितीय समावयवियों को E व Z संकेत से दर्शाते हैं। ये निम्न अनुक्रम नियम पर आधारित हैं –

नियम I:
सभी परमाणु और समूह जो द्विबंधित कार्बन परमाणु से जुड़े होते हैं। उनके प्रथम परमाणु के परमाणु क्रमांक के बढ़ते क्रम के आधार पर उनकी प्राथमिकता निर्भर करते हैं। कम परमाणु क्रमांक वाले परमाणु या समूह को निम्नतम प्राथमिकता देते हैं तथा अधिक परमाणु क्रमांक वाले परमाणु या समूह को उच्चतम प्राथमिकता देते हैं । यदि इन समूह के प्रथम परमाणु समान हों तो द्वितीय परमाणु अथवा तृतीय परमाणु के परमाणु क्रमांक द्वारा प्राथमिकता का अनुक्रम निर्धारित करते हैं।

नियम II:
जब द्विबंध से बँधे दोनों कार्बन परमाणु पर उच्च प्राथमिकता वाले परमाणु या समूह विपरीत ओर एक ही दिशा में हो तो इस विन्यास को E रूप से दर्शाते हैं। जब यदि द्विबंध से बँधे दोनों कार्बन परमाणु पर उच्च प्राथमिकता वाले परमाणु या समूह एक ही दिशा में हो तो इस विन्यास को Z रूप से दर्शाते हैं।
उदाहरण –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 79
प्रश्न 17.
डाइईन्स किसे कहते हैं ? डाइईन्स कितने प्रकार के होते हैं ? उदाहरण सहित समझाइये।
उत्तर:
डाइईन्स असंतृप्त हाइड्रोकार्बन है, इनमें कार्बन श्रृंखला में कार्बन – कार्बन के मध्य दो द्विबंध होते हैं तथा द्विबंधों की सापेक्षिक स्थिति के आधार पर डाइईन्स तीन प्रकार के होते हैं –
1. विलगित डाइईन्स:
ऐसे डाइईन्स जिसमें दो द्विबंध परस्पर एक से अधिक एकल बंधों द्वारा अलग होते हैं।
CH2 = CH – CH2 – CH = CH2

2. संयुग्मित डाइईन्स – ऐसे डाइईन्स में दो द्विबंध संयुग्मित या एकान्तर स्थिति पर होते हैं।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 80
3. संचयी डाइईन्स – इन डाइईन्स में दो द्विबंध समीपस्थ स्थिति पर होते हैं।
CH2 = C = CH – CH3
CH3 – CH = C = CH2

प्रश्न 18.
डील्स एल्डर अभिक्रिया को समीकरण सहित लिखिए।
उत्तर:
जब संयुग्मित डाइईन्स को किसी एल्कीन या प्रतिस्थापित एल्कीन के साथ गर्म करते हैं तो एक छः सदस्यीय चक्रीय यौगिक बनता है इसलिये इस अभिक्रिया को चक्रीय संकलन अभिक्रिया भी कहते हैं। इसमें एक 47 इलेक्ट्रॉन निकाय से जुड़ता है। इस तरह की अभिक्रिया को डील्स एल्डर अभिक्रिया कहते हैं।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 81

प्रश्न 19.
लिण्डलार उत्प्रेरक क्या है ? तथा इसके उपयोग लिखिए।
उत्तर:
बेरियम सल्फेट या कैल्सियम कार्बोनेट पर निक्षेपित पैलेडियम उत्प्रेरक का मिश्रण लिण्डलार उत्प्रेरक कहलाता है। यहाँ सल्फर या क्विनोलीन उत्प्रेरक विष का कार्य करता है और केवल एल्कीन अवस्था तक ही एल्काइन का अपचयन करता है।
उपयोग – एल्काइन का अपचयन हाइड्रोजन द्वारा लिण्डलार उत्प्रेरक की उपस्थिति में कराने पर एल्कीन प्राप्त होता है। यह उत्प्रेरक आगे एल्कीन को एल्केन में अपचयित नहीं होने देता।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 82
प्रश्न 20.
बेंजीन की संरचना के लिये कैकुले सूत्र के पक्ष में चार प्रमाण दीजिए।
उत्तर:
बेंजीन की संरचना के लिये कैकुले सूत्र के पक्ष में प्रमाण –
1. बेंजीन तीन अणु हाइड्रोजन के साथ संयोग कर चक्रीय यौगिक साइक्लोहेक्सेन बनाता है, जिससे बेंजीन में तीन युग्म बंध की पुष्टि होती है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 142
2. बेंजीन तीन अणु क्लोरीन से संयोग कर B.H.C. बनाता है। अतः यह भी तीन युग्म बंध की पुष्टि करता है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 84
3. बेंजीन ओजोन के साथ संयोग कर ट्राइ ओजोनाइड बनाता है जो जल अपघटित होकर ग्लाईऑक्सेल के तीन अणु बनाता है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 85
4. एसीटिलीन के तीन अणु बहुलीकरण के द्वारा बेंजीन का निर्माण करते हैं। ..
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 86

प्रश्न 21.
कारण दीजिए –
1. शाखायुक्त यौगिकों के क्वथनांक सीधी श्रृंखला युक्त यौगिकों की अपेक्षा कम होते हैं, क्यों ?
2. विषम संख्या कार्बन परमाणु वाले यौगिक के गलनांक सम संख्या कार्बन परमाणु वाले यौगिकों से कम होते हैं, क्यों?
उत्तर:
1. रेखीय शृंखला वाले कार्बनिक यौगिकों का पृष्ठीय क्षेत्रफल अधिक होता है और इनमें अंतरअणुक आकर्षण बल अधिक होता है जबकि कार्बन परमाणु की श्रृंखला में शाखायुक्त हो जाने पर अणु में स्थित विभिन्न परमाणु पास-पास आ जाते हैं, जिससे उनके बीच अंतर-अणुक आकर्षण बल कम होता है इसलिये श्रृंखला वाले यौगिकों का क्वथनांक शाखायुक्त यौगिकों से अधिक होता है।

2. कार्बन परमाणु की विषम संख्या युक्त ऐल्केन कार्बन श्रृंखला के सिरों पर स्थित कार्बन परमाणु समान पक्ष में होते हैं। जबकि कार्बन परमाणु की सम संख्या वाले ऐल्केन में कार्बन शृंखला के सिरों पर स्थित कार्बन विपरीत पक्ष में होते हैं। सम संख्या वाले यौगिकों के विषम कार्बन संख्या वाले यौगिकों की तुलना में पैकिंग अधिक सघन होती है। इसलिए सम कार्बन संख्या वाले यौगिकों के क्वथनांक अधिक होते हैं।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 22.
निम्नलिखित पर टिप्पणी लिखिए –

  1. सबात्ये और सेण्डरेन्स अभिक्रिया
  2. बुर्दज अभिक्रिया
  3. इयमा अभिक्रिया
  4. स्वार्ट अभिक्रिया।

उत्तर:
1. सबात्ये और सेण्डरेन्स अभिक्रिया – ऐल्कीन की अभिक्रिया Ni या Pt की उपस्थिति में हाइड्रोजन के साथ कराने पर हाइड्रोजनीकरण के पश्चात् ऐल्केन प्राप्त होता है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 87
2. बुर्दज अभिक्रिया – दो अणु ऐल्किल हैलाइड की अभिक्रिया सोडियम के साथ शुष्क ईथर की उपस्थिति में कराने पर ऐल्केन प्राप्त होता है। इस प्रकार प्राप्त ऐल्केन में ऐल्किल हैलाइड की तुलना में दो गुना ज्यादा कार्बन होते हैं।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 88
3. ड्यूमा अभिक्रिया – मोनोकार्बोक्सिलिक अम्ल के सोडियम लवण की अभिक्रिया सोडालाइम के साथ कराने पर विकार्बोक्सीकरण के पश्चात् एल्केन प्राप्त होता है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 89
4. स्वार्ट अभिक्रिया – जब एल्किल हैलाइड की अभिक्रिया मरक्यूरिक फ्लोराइड के साथ कराने पर फ्लोरो एल्केन प्राप्त होता है। इस अभिक्रिया के दौरान एल्किल हैलाइड के हैलोजन का प्रतिस्थापन फ्लोरीन द्वारा होता है।
2C2H5 – I + HgF2 → 2CH3 → 2C2H5 + F + HgI2
प्रश्न 23.
कोल्बे की वैद्युत अपघटन अभिक्रिया को समीकरण सहित लिखिए।
उत्तर:
मोनो कार्बोक्सिलिक अम्ल के सोडियम या पोटैशियम लवण के सान्द्र जलीय विलयन का वैद्युत अपघटन करने पर एनोड पर एल्केन प्राप्त होता है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 90
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 91

एनोड पर – एसीटेट आयन इलेक्ट्रॉन त्यागकर उदासीन हो जाता है और विघटित होकर एल्केन देता है।
2CH3COO – 2e → 2CH3 COO → C2H6 + 2CO2

कैथोड पर – हाइड्रोजन आयन इलेक्ट्रॉन ग्रहण कर हाइड्रोजन देता है।
2Na+ + 2HOH + 2e → 2NaOH + H2

प्रश्न 24.
निम्नलिखित अभिक्रियाओं के केवल समीकरण दीजिए –

  1. कैल्सियम कार्बाइड की जल से।
  2. एथिलीन पर ब्रोमीन जल की अभिक्रिया।
  3. एथिलीन को क्षारीय KMnO4के साथ गर्म करने पर।
  4. बेंजीन को सान्द्र HNOJ तथा सान्द्र H2SO, के साथ गर्म करने पर।
  5. बेंजीन को मेथिल क्लोराइड के साथ निर्जल AICI, की उपस्थिति में गर्म करने पर।

उत्तर:
1. कैल्सियम कार्बाइड की जल के साथ अभिक्रिया –
CaC2 + 2HOH → CH = CH + Ca(OH)2
2. एथिलीन पर ब्रोमीन जल की अभिक्रिया –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 92
3. एथिलीन को क्षारीय KMnO, के साथ गर्म करने पर
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 93
4. बेंजीन को सान्द्र HNOJ तथा सान्द्र H,SO, के साथ गर्म करने पर –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 94
5. बेंजीन को CHICI के साथ निर्जल AICI की उपस्थिति में गर्म करने पर
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 95

प्रश्न 25.
निम्नलिखित को कैसे प्राप्त करोगे

  1. एसीटिलीन से एसिटैल्डिहाइड
  2. एथिलीन से मस्टर्ड गैस
  3. ग्रिगनार्ड अभिकर्मक से एथेन
  4. एसीटिलीन से क्यूप्रस एसीटिलाइड
  5. ऐल्युमिनियम कार्बाइड से मेथेन।

उत्तर:
1. एसीटिलीन से एसिटैल्डिहाइड –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 96
2. एथिलीन से मस्टर्ड गैस –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 97
3. ग्रिगनार्ड अभिकर्मक से एथेन –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 98
4. एसीटिलीन से क्यूप्रस एसीटिलाइड –
CH ≡ CH + Cu2Cl2 + 2NH4OH D Cu – C ≡ C – Cu + 2NH4Cl + 2H2O
5. ऐल्युमिनियम कार्बाइड से मेथेन –
Al4C3 + 12H2 O → 3CH4 + 4Al(OH)2

प्रश्न 26.
किसी प्राथमिक ऐल्किल हैलाइड की वु अभिक्रिया कराने पर एकमात्र उत्पाद के रूप में C8H18 प्राप्त होता है। इस ऐल्केन का मोनोब्रोमीकरण करने पर तृतीयक ब्रोमाइड का एकल समावयव प्राप्त होता है। ऐल्केन तथा तृतीयक ब्रोमाइड की पहचान लिखिए।
उत्तर:
चूँकि ऐल्केन C8H18 मोनोब्रोमीकरण के पश्चात् तृतीयक ब्रोमाइड का एक समावयव बनाता है अतः ऐल्केन में तृतीयक हाइड्रोजन उपस्थित होनी चाहिए। यह तभी सम्भव है जबकि प्राथमिक ऐल्किल हैलाइड (जो वु अभिक्रिया में भाग लेता है) के पास तृतीयक हाइड्रोजन हो।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 143

प्रश्न 27.
2 – मेथिल प्रोपेन के मोनो क्लोरीनीकरण में बनने वाले मध्यवर्ती हाइड्रोकार्बन मूलकों को लिखिए। इनमें से कौन-सा अधिक स्थायी होगा। कारण भी दीजिए।
उत्तर:
2-मेथिल प्रोपेन निम्न दो प्रकार के मूलक देता है, जो निम्न है –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 100
मूलक (I) अधिक स्थायी है क्योंकि यह 3° मुक्त मूलक है तथा नौ अति संयुग्मित संरचनाओं को स्थायी करता है (क्योंकि इसमें 9a -हाइड्रोजन है।)
मूलक (II) कम स्थायी है क्योंकि यह 1° मुक्त मूलक है तथा यह केवल एक अति संयुग्मित संरचना को स्थायी करता है। (क्योंकि इसमें केवल 1a- हाइड्रोजन है।)

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 28.
विहाइड्रोहैलोजनीकरण तथा विहैलोजनीकरण अभिक्रिया को उदाहरण सहित समझाइये।
उत्तर:
विहाइड्रोहैलोजनीकरण – किसी कार्बनिक यौगिक में हाइड्रोजन हैलाइड के अणु का विलोपन विहाइड्रोहैलोजनीकरण कहलाता है। इस अभिक्रिया के दौरान β स्थिति से हाइड्रोजन का विलोपन होता है। इसलिये इसे β विलोपन अभिक्रिया भी कहते हैं।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 101
उदाहरण – नॉर्मल प्रोपिल क्लोराइड को एल्कोहॉलिक KOH के साथ गर्म करने पर एल्कीन प्राप्त होता है।
CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – Cl + KOH → CH3 – CH = CH2 + KCl + H2O

विहैलोजनीकरण – बिस डाइहैलाइड को Zn चूर्ण के साथ मेथिल एल्कोहॉल की उपस्थिति में गर्म करने पर एल्कीन प्राप्त होता है, इस अभिक्रिया के दौरान केवल हैलोजन का विलोपन होता है इसलिए इसे विहैलोजनीकरण अभिक्रिया कहते हैं।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 102

प्रश्न 29.
क्या होता है जब

  1. सोडियम एसीटेट को सोडालाइम के साथ गर्म करने पर।
  2. 2 – प्रोपेनॉल को एलुमिना के साथ 300°C ताप पर गर्म करने पर।
  3. एसीटिलीन को अमोनियामय AgNO3 के विलयन में प्रवाहित करने पर।
  4. एथिल आयोडाइड को सोडियम के साथ गर्म करने पर।
  5. एथिलीन पर हाइपोक्लोरस अम्ल की अभिक्रिया कराने पर।

उत्तर:
1. सोडियम एसीटेट को सोडालाइम के साथ गर्म करने पर –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 103
2. 2-प्रोपेनॉल को एलुमिना के साथ 300°C ताप पर गर्म करने पर –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 104
3. एसीटिलीन को अमोनियामय AgNOJ के साथ गर्म करने पर –
CH ≡ CH + 2AgNO3 + 2NH4OH → Ag – C ≡ C – Ag + 2NH4NO3 + 2H2O
4. एथिल आयोडाइड को सोडियम के साथ गर्म करने पर –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 109
5. एथिलीन पर हाइपोक्लोरस अम्ल की अभिक्रिया कराने पर –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 105

प्रश्न 30.
निम्नलिखित पर टिप्पणी लिखिए –
1. हाइड्रोबोरोनीकरण
2. एपॉक्सीकरण।
उत्तर:
1. हाइड्रोबोरोनीकरण – एल्कीन पर जब डाइबोरेन से अभिक्रिया करायी जाती है तब एल्कीन के द्विबंध पर योगात्मक क्रिया होती है एवं ट्राइऐल्किल बोरेन बनता है, जो जल अपघटन पर एल्कोहॉल देता है यह हाइड्रोबोरोनीकरण अभिक्रिया कहलाती है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 106

2. एपॉक्सीकरण – एल्कीन ऑक्साइड को एपॉक्साइड कहते हैं। एल्कीन के ऑक्सीकरण से एपॉक्साइड बनने की क्रिया एपॉक्सीकरण कहलाती है।
उदाहरण – निम्नतर एल्कीन 200 – 400°C ताप पर सिल्वर उत्प्रेरक की उपस्थिति में ऑक्सीजन से संयोग करके एपॉक्साइड बनते हैं।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 107

प्रश्न 31.
वुज अभिक्रिया को विषम कार्बन संख्या वाले ऐल्केन बनाने के लिये क्यों उपयुक्त नहीं माना जाता है ?
उत्तर:
एल्किल हैलाइड के दो अणु सोडियम के साथ शुष्क ईथर की उपस्थिति में गर्म करने पर ऐल्केन प्राप्त होता है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 108
इस अभिक्रिया द्वारा विषम कार्बन संख्या वाले ऐल्केन का निर्माण नहीं किया जा सकता है। क्योंकि इसके लिये दो अलग-अलग एल्किल हैलाइड को सोडियम के साथ गर्म करने पर ऐल्केनों का मिश्रण प्राप्त होता है जिन्हें पृथक् करना बहुत कठिन होता है। उदाहरण के लिये यदि मेथिल ब्रोमाइड तथा एथिल ब्रोमाइड को शुष्क ईथर की उपस्थिति में सोडियम के साथ गर्म करने पर एथेन, प्रोपेन तथा ब्यूटेन का मिश्रण प्राप्त होता है और इसमें से प्रोपेन को पृथक् करना अत्यन्त कठिन होता है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 109
प्रश्न 32.
HI, HBr तथा HCl की प्रोपीन के साथ क्रिया में बना मध्यवर्ती कार्बधनायन समान रहता है। HCl, HBr तथा Hl की आबंध ऊर्जाएँ क्रमशः 430.5 kJmol 363.7 kJmol तथा 296.8 kJmol होती है। इन हैलोजन अम्लों की क्रियाशीलता का क्रम क्या होगा?
उत्तर:
हैलोजन अम्लों का ऐल्कीन के साथ योग एक इलेक्ट्रॉन स्नेही योगात्मक अभिक्रिया है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 110

चूँकि प्रथम पद मंद है अतः यह दर निर्धारक पद है। इस पद की दर, प्रोटॉन की उपलब्धता पर निर्भर करती है। जो पुनः H – X अणुओं की आबंध वियोजन ऊर्जा पर निर्भर करती है। H – X अणु की आबंध वियोजन ऊर्जा जितनी कम होती है, हैलोजन अम्ल की क्रियाशीलता उतनी ही अधिक होती है। अतः हैलोजन अम्लों की क्रियाशीलता का घटता हुआ क्रम निम्न है
HI(296.8kJ) > HBr(363.7kJ) > HCl(430.5kJ)

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 33.
भंजन से क्या समझते हैं ? भंजन तथा इसके उपयोग पर टिप्पणी लिखिए।
उत्तर:
उच्च ताप के द्वारा या उत्प्रेरक की उपस्थिति में उच्चतर और जटिल हाइड्रोकार्बन का सरल हाइड्रोकार्बन में होने वाला अपघटन भंजन कहलाता है। दूसरे शब्दों में, कम वाष्पशील तथा उच्च हाइड्रोकार्बन का अधिक वाष्पशील तथा निम्न हाइड्रोकार्बन में तापीय अपघटन भंजन कहलाता है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 111
भंजन दो प्रकार का होता है –
1. ताप भंजन – जब भंजन उच्च ताप व दाब की परिस्थिति में उत्प्रेरक की अनुपस्थिति में कराया जाता है, तो इसे तापीय भंजन कहते हैं।
2. उत्प्रेरक भंजन – जब उत्प्रेरक की उपस्थिति में भंजन कराया जाता है, तो उसे उत्प्रेरक भंजन कहते हैं। उत्प्रेरक की उपस्थिति में भंजन तापीय भंजन की तुलना में कम ताप तथा कम दाब पर कराया जाता है।

उपयोग –

  • मिट्टी के तेल से गैस बनाना।
  • पेट्रोल के भंजन से पेट्रोलियम गैस बनाना।

प्रश्न 34.
एक हाइड्रोकार्बन A वाष्प घनत्व (14) बेयर अभिकर्मक को रंगहीन कर निम्नानुसार रासायनिक क्रिया करता है –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 112
प्राप्त उत्पादों A, B, C और D के नाम और सूत्र लिखिये।
उत्तर:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 113
(A) एथीलीन, (B) 1, 2 डाई ब्रोमो एथेन या एथीलीन ब्रोमाइड ,(C) एसीटिलीन, (D) एसीटेल्डिहाइड।

हाइड्रोकार्बन दीर्घ उत्तरीय प्रश्न

प्रश्न 1.
एल्कीन बनाने की प्रयोगशाला विधि का चित्र सहित वर्णन कीजिए।
उत्तर:
प्राथमिक एल्कोहॉल को सान्द्र H2SO4 के आधिक्य के साथ 170°C ताप पर गर्म करने पर एल्कोहॉल में से एक जल का अणु निकल जाता है और निर्जलीकरण के पश्चात् एल्कीन प्राप्त होता है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 114
एक गोल पेंदी वाले फ्लास्क में एल्कोहॉल तथा सान्द्र H2SO लेते हैं। इस मिश्रण में निर्जल Al(SOA)3 तथा रेत मिलाते हैं। AICSO), तथा रेत का मिश्रण झाग उत्पन्न होने नहीं देता तथा अभिक्रिया 140°C ताप पर ही सम्पन्न हो जाती है। आसवन फ्लास्क में या गोल पेंदी वाले फ्लास्क में एक थर्मामीटर, बिन्दुपाती कीप तथा निकास नली लगाते हैं। निकास नली का दूसरा सिरा दो वाष्प बोतलों से जुड़ा रहता है।

जिसमें सान्द्र H SoA तथा KOH भरा रहता है। बिन्दुपाती कीप की सहायता से एल्कोहॉल तथा सान्द्र H2SOA के मिश्रण को गिराते हैं। इसे बालू उष्मक पर 150°C ताप पर गर्म करते हैं । बनने वाली एथिलीन गैस में SO, तथा CO, की अशुद्धि भी होती है जो क्रमशः H,SO, तथा KOH में अवशोषित हो जाती है और शुद्ध एथिलीन गैस को गैस जार में जल के ऊपर एकत्रित कर लेते हैं।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 2.
एसीटिलीन बनाने की प्रयोगशाला विधि का चित्र सहित वर्णन कीजिए।
अथवा
एसीटिलीन बनाने की प्रयोगशाला विधि का वर्णन निम्नांकित बिन्दुओं के आधार पर कीजिए

  1. विधि एवं रासायनिक समीकरण
  2. नामांकित चित्र।

उत्तर:
प्रयोगशाला में एसीटिलीन गैस को CaC2पर जल की अभिक्रिया द्वारा बनाया जाता है। इस विधि से प्राप्त एसीटिलीन में NH3 तथा PH3 की अशुद्धि होती है जिन्हें दूर करने के लिये इसे अम्लीय CuSO4 में प्रवाहित करते हैं।
CaC2 + 2H2O → CH == CH + Ca(OH)2
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 115

एक कोनिकल फ्लास्क में थोड़ी – सी रेत लेकर उसके ऊपर CaC2 के टुकड़े रखते हैं तथा फ्लास्क में उपस्थित वायु को तेल गैस प्रवाहित कर विस्थापित कर देते हैं। कोनिकल फ्लास्क में बिन्दुपाती कीप तथा निकास नली लगी होती है। बिन्दुपाती कीप की सहायता से CaC2 पर धीरे-धीरे H2O की बूंदें डालते हैं जिससे एसीटिलीन गैस प्राप्त होती है। जिसे अम्लीय CuSO4 विलयन में प्रवाहित कर – एसीटिलीन विरंजक चूर्ण के निलंबन में प्रवाहित करते ram हैं तथा एसीटिलीन गैस को गैस जार में जल के ऊपर एकत्रित कर लेते हैं।

सावधानी:

  • प्रयोग के पूर्व बालू फ्लास्क की वायु को तेल गैस द्वारा विस्थापित कर देते हैं क्योंकि एसीटिलीन अम्लीकृत विरंजक चूर्ण Cuson का निलंबन वायु के साथ विस्फोटक मिश्रण बनाती है।
  • CaC2 के ऊपर धीरे-धीरे जल डाला जाता है क्योंकि अभिक्रिया बहुत तीव्र गति से होती है।
  • फ्लास्क की तली में पहले रेत रखकर CaC2 के टुकड़ों को रखा जाता है क्योंकि अभिक्रिया में बहुत अधिक मात्रा में ऊष्मा प्राप्त होती है।

प्रश्न 3.
मेथेन बनाने की प्रयोगशाला विधि का सचित्र वर्णन कीजिए।
उत्तर:
वसीय अम्लों के सोडियम लवणों को सोडा लाइम के साथ 630°K ताप पर गर्म करने पर एल्केन प्राप्त होता है। कॉस्टिक सोडा NaOH तथा अनबुझा चूना Cao के मिश्रण को सोडा लाइम कहते हैं। यहाँ अभिक्रिया में केवल NaOH भाग लेता है Cao, NaOH को शुष्क रखता है और NaOH की तीव्रता को कम करता है जिससे काँच पर अभिक्रिया नहीं हो पाती।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 116
एक कठोर काँच की नली में कडे काँच की नली सोडियम एसीटेट व सोडालाइम का मिश्रण लेते हैं तथा कॉर्क की सहायता साड से इसमें निकास नली लगाते हैं। जिसका सोडालाइम दूसरा सिरा जल से भरे गैस जार में लगा रहता है। सोडियम एसीटेट व सोडा लाइम के मिश्रण को परखनली में बुन्सन बर्नर पर गर्म करते हैं तथा बनने वाली मेथेन गैस को जल से भरे गैस जार में जल के ऊपर एकत्रित कर लेते हैं।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 117

प्रश्न 4.
एक असंतृप्त हाइड्रोकार्बन ‘A’ दो अणु H, को जोड़ता है तथा अपचयित ओजोनीकरण के पश्चात् ब्यूटेन-1,4 डाइअल, एथेनल तथा प्रोपेनोन देता है। यौगिक ‘A’ की संरचना तथा IUPAC नाम लिखिए। प्रयुक्त अभिक्रियाओं को समझाइए।
उत्तर:
हाइड्रोकार्बन ‘A’ में दो अणु H2 का योग हो सकता है। अतः ‘A’ एल्केन, डाइईन या ऐल्काइन होना चाहिए। अपचयित ओजोनीकरण के पश्चात् ‘A’ तीन स्पीशीज देता है जिनमें से एक डाइऐल्डिहाइड है। इसका अर्थ है कि अणु दोनों सिरों से टूटता है। अतः ‘A’ में दो द्विआबंध होने चाहिए। यह निम्नलिखित तीन स्पीशीज देता है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 118

अतः यौगिक ‘A’ की संरचना निम्न है –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 119
प्रश्न 5.
एसीटिलीन की अम्लीय प्रकृति को उदाहरण सहित समझाइये।
उत्तर:
ऐसे एल्काइन जिनके अणु के अंतिम छोर में = बंध होता है वे दुर्बल अम्लीय प्रकृति दर्शाते हैं। इनकी अम्लीय प्रकृति को संकरण के आधार पर समझाया जा सकता है। ऽ कक्षक में उपस्थित इलेक्ट्रॉन pad कक्षक में उपस्थित इलेक्ट्रॉन की तुलना में नाभिक से अधिक दृढ़ता से बँधे होते हैं। क्योंकि ऽ कक्षक, p व d कक्षक की तुलना में नाभिक के अधिक पास स्थित होता है। दूसरे शब्दों में sp संकरित कक्षक में 5 गुण (50%), sp2 (33:3%) तथा sp3 संकरित कक्षक (25%) की तुलना में अधिक होता है।

जिसके कारण sp संकरित कार्बन परमाणु sp2तथा sp3 संकरित कार्बन की तुलना में अधिक ऋणविद्युती होता है। जिसके कारण C – Hबंध के इलेक्ट्रॉन कार्बन की ओर विस्थापित होने लगता है। जिसके फलस्वरूप कार्बन पर आंशिक ऋणावेश व हाइड्रोजन पर आंशिक धनावेश आ जाता है और इस प्रकार यह आयनित होकर धनावेशित H+ को प्रोटॉन के रूप में दान कर सकता है। इसलिये यह दुर्बल अम्ल के रूप में कार्य करता है।
उदाहरण –

(1) AgNO3 से अभिक्रिया – एसीटिलीन गैस को अमोनियामय सिल्वर नाइट्रेट के विलयन में प्रवाहित करने पर सिल्वर एसीटीलाइड का श्वेत अवक्षेप प्राप्त होता है। H – C ≡ C – H + 2NH4OH + 2AgNO3 → Ag – C = C – Ag + 2NH4NO3 + 2H2O

(2) अमोनियामय कॉपर क्लोराइड के साथ अभिक्रिया-एसीटिलीन गैस को अमोनियामय क्यूप्रस क्लोराइड के विलयन में प्रवाहित करने पर लाल रंग का क्यूप्रस एसीटीलाइड का अवक्षेप प्राप्त होता है। H – C ≡ C – H + Cu2Cl2 + 2NH4 OH ≡ Cu – C ≡ C – Cu + 2NH4Cl + 2H2O

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 6.
संरूपण से आप क्या समझते हैं ? एथेन के संरूपण का विस्तारपूर्वक वर्णन कीजिए।
उत्तर:
कार्बन-कार्बन एकल बंध के मध्य घूर्णन के कारण जो विभिन्न आकाशीय व्यवस्थाएँ उत्पन्न होती हैं, जिन्हें संरूपी कहते हैं तथा संरूपियों से संबंधित आण्विक ज्यामिति को संरूपण समावयवता कहते हैं। एथेन में संरूपण समावयवता-एथेन में दो कार्बन परमाणु एकल बंध की सहायता से जुड़े रहते हैं तथा प्रत्येक कार्बन पर तीन हाइड्रोजन परमाणु द्वारा जुड़े रहते हैं। अर्थात् एथेन अणु में दो मेथिल समूह एकल बंध की सहायता से जुड़े रहते हैं।

यदि इसमें से एक कार्बन को स्थिर रखते हुए दूसरे कार्बन परमाणु को एकल बंध के चारों तरफ मुक्त घूर्णन करने दिया जाये तो विभिन्न त्रिविम व्यवस्थाएँ संभव हैं। सामान्यतः यदि एक कार्बन को स्थिर रखते हुये दूसरे कार्बन को एकल बंध के चारों तरफ 60° के कोण से मुक्त घूर्णन करने दिया जाये तो मुख्यतः 6 त्रिविम व्यवस्थाएं संभव हैं, जिनमें से 1, 3 और 5 संरचनाएँ समान हैं। इसलिये इनकी ऊर्जा तथा स्थायित्व भी समान होगा। इसी प्रकार 2, 4 और 6 वीं संरचना समान है इसलिये इनकी ऊर्जा तथा स्थायित्व भी समान होगा।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 120
1. सांतरित रूप:
सांतरित रूप में दोनों कार्बन परमाणुओं पर H परमाणु इस प्रकार व्यवस्थित रहते हैं कि उनके बीच दूरी अधिकतम है जिसके कारण इनके बीच लगने वाला प्रतिकर्षण बल न्यूनतम रहता है जिसके फलस्वरूप इनकी ऊर्जा कम तथा स्थायित्व अधिक रहता है।

2. ग्रसित रूप:
ग्रसित रूप में दोनों कार्बन परमाणु इस प्रकार व्यवस्थित रहते हैं कि उनसे जुड़े हाइड्रोजन परमाणु के मध्य न्यूनतम दूरी है जिसके कारण इनके बीच लगने वाला प्रतिकर्षण बल अधिकतम होता है जिसके फलस्वरूप इनकी ऊर्जा अधिकतम तथा स्थायित्व न्यूनतम होता है। एथेन में सांतरित संरूपीय ग्रसित संरूपीय की अपेक्षा 12.6 kJ/mo ऊर्जा से अधिक स्थायी है। यह ऊर्जा का अंतर बहुत कम होने के कारण एथेन में से दोनों संरूपों को पृथक् करना कठिन होता है।

प्रश्न 7.
परॉक्साइड की उपस्थिति में, प्रोपीन में HBr का योग प्रतिमार्कोनीकॉफ नियमानुसार होता है, परन्तु HCl तथा Hl परॉक्साइड प्रभाव प्रदर्शित नहीं करते हैं, क्यों?
उत्तर:
प्रोपीन में HCI तथा HI के योग में परॉक्साइड प्रभाव प्रदर्शित नहीं होता है। इसका कारण है कि H – Cl आबंध (430.5 kJ moll-1), H – Br आबंध (363.7 kJ moll-1) की अपेक्षा प्रबल होने के कारण मुक्त मूलक द्वारा विदलित नहीं हो पाता है। दूसरी ओर H – I आबंध (296-8 kJ mol-1) दुर्बल होता है तथा आयोडीन मुक्त मूलक द्विआबंध में जुड़ने की अपेक्षा आयोडीन अणु से संयुक्त होता है। इसकी ऊष्मागतिकीय आँकड़ों की सहायता से भी व्याख्या की जा सकती है। हाइड्रोजन हैलाइड की मुक्त मूलक योगात्मक अभिक्रियाओं में प्रयुक्त चरणों में एन्थैल्पी परिवर्तन निम्न प्रकार है –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 121
उपरोक्त आँकड़ों से स्पष्ट है कि HBr के योग के दोनों चरण ऊष्माक्षेपी है जो कि अभिक्रिया होने की अनुकूल दशा है। परन्तु HCl तथा HI की दशा में एक चरण ऊष्माशोषी है, जो कि किसी भी रासायनिक अभिक्रिया के होने के लिए ऊष्मागतिकी की दृष्टि से अनुकूलतम स्थिति नहीं है।

प्रश्न 8.
साइक्लोहेक्सेन में संरूपण समावयवता को समझाइये।
उत्तर:
खुली श्रृंखला वाले एल्केनों के अतिरिक्त बंद श्रृंखला वाले साइक्लोएल्केन भी संरूपण समावयवता दर्शाते हैं। साइक्लोप्रोपेन तथा साइक्लोब्यूटेन में बंध कोण क्रमश: 60° तथा 90° का होता है। जिनके कारण ये वलय तनाव में होते हैं तथा इनकी क्रियाशीलता अधिकतम होती है।

साइक्लोपेंटेन में बंध कोण 108° होता है जो कि सामान्य चतुष्फलकीय बंध कोण के निकटतम है। साइक्लोहेक्सेन में बंध कोण 109°28′ होता है। जिसके कारण वलय तनावरहित तथा अधिक स्थायी होती है। इसलिये इसमें संरूपण समावयवता दर्शायी जा सकती है। त्रिविम में विभिन्न व्यवस्थाओं के कारण यह दो समावयवी रूपों में पाया जाता है।

1. कुर्सी संरूपण – यह साइक्लोहेक्सेन का अत्यधिक स्थायी संरूपी है जिसमें सभी बंध कोण चतुष्फलकीय बंध कोण 109°28 के बराबर है। लेकिन समीपवर्ती कार्बन परमाणु के हाइड्रोजन सांतरित स्थिति में है। इसलिये यह वलय तनाव से मुक्त है और इसका स्थायित्व अधिकतम है।

2. नाव संरूपण – यह साइक्लोहेक्सेन का कम स्थायी समावयवी रूप है। इसमें भी सभी बंध कोण चतुष्फलकीय बंध कोण के बराबर है। लेकिन समीपवर्ती कार्बन परमाणु के हाइड्रोजन ग्रसित रूप में है जिसके कारण वलय तनाव में है तथा इसका स्थायित्व कुर्सी रूप की तुलना में कम है। कुर्सी रूप तथा नाव रूप में ऊर्जा का अंतर 44 kJ/mol-1 है।
नाव संरूपण –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 122
कुर्सी संरूपण –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 123

प्रश्न 9.
ऐथेन के ग्रस्त तथा सांतरित रूपों के न्यूमैन तथा साँहार्स प्रक्षेप लिखिए। इनमें से कौन-सा प्रक्षेप अधिक स्थायी होगा तथा क्यों?
उत्तर:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 124
ऐथेन का सांतरित रूप, ग्रस्त रूप की अपेक्षा लगभग 12.5 kJmol-1 ऊर्जा द्वारा अधिक स्थायी होता है। इसका कारण है कि सांतरित रूप में कोई भी दो हाइड्रोजन परमाणु समीपवर्ती कार्बन परमाणुओं से अधिकतम दूरी पर स्थित होते हैं जबकि ग्रस्त अवस्था में ये अत्यधिक पास-पास (कभी-कभी अध्यारोपित भी हो जाते हैं) आ जाते हैं। अतः सांतरित रूप में, इनमें न्यूनतम प्रतिकर्षण बल, न्यूनतम ऊर्जा तथा अधिकतम स्थायित्व होता है।

प्रश्न 10.
ब्यूटेन में संरूपण समावयवता को समझाइये।
उत्तर:
n ब्यूटेन को एथेन का डाइ मेथिल व्युत्पन्न माना जा सकता है जिसमें प्रत्येक कार्बन का एकएक हाइड्रोजन परमाणु मेथिल समूह से प्रतिस्थापित हो गया है। ऐथेन के समान ब्यूटेन में यदि C2 को स्थिर रखकर C3 को घुमाया जाता है तब 360° से घुमाने पर अणु पुनः मूल स्थिति में आ जाता है। जब दोनों कार्बन परमाणु के मेथिल समूह एक-दूसरे से अधिकतम दूरी पर स्थित होते हैं तो इनमें न्यूनतम प्रतिकर्षण होता है तथा सबसे स्थायी रूप है इसे पूर्णतः सांतरित रूप (I) कहते हैं।

पूर्ण सांतरित रूप को घूमाने पर क्रमशः 120° व 240° पर III व V रूप प्राप्त होता है इसमें एक कार्बन का मेथिल समूह दूसरे कार्बन के मेथिल व हाइड्रोजन परमाणु के मध्य होता है। इसे गॉश रूप कहते हैं, यह कम स्थायी होता है। रूप I को 60° व 300° पर घुमाने से क्रमशः II व VI रूप प्राप्त होते हैं ।

ये ग्रसित रूप कहलाता है तथा 180° पर रूप IV प्राप्त होता है जो पूर्णतः ग्रसित रूप है। रूप IV सबसे कम स्थायी है। इसमें दोनों मेथिल समूह की दूरी न्यूनतम होती है। अतः प्रतिकर्षण अधिकतम होता है। पूर्णतः ग्रसित रूप IV की अपेक्षा ग्रसित रूप II व III का स्थायित्व थोड़ा अधिक होता है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 125

प्रश्न 11.
बेंजीन के अनुनाद सूत्र को समझाइये।
उत्तर:
बेंजीन में प्रत्येक C – Cबंध लंबाई 1.40 A होती है जो कि एकल बंध 154 A और युग्म बंध 134 A के मध्यवर्ती है। अत: बेंजीन में C – C बंध एकल बंध या युग्म बंध से न जुड़े होकर आंशिक युग्म बंध तथा आंशिक एकल बंध से जुड़े होते हैं। अर्थात् कुछ समय पश्चात् द्वि-बंध एकल बंध में तथा एकल बंध द्विबंध में परिवर्तित होते रहते हैं। ऐसे बंधों की कल्पना तो की जा सकती है। लेकिन इन्हें कागजों पर नहीं दर्शाया जा सकता है। इसलिये ऐसा माना जाता है कि बेंजीन निम्नलिखित संरचनाओं का अनुनादी सूत्र है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 126
उपर्युक्त संरचनाओं में पहली तथा दूसरी संरचना Kekule संरचना है तथा तीसरी, चौथी तथा पाँचवीं संरचना Dewar संरचना है। Dewar संरचना की ऊर्जा अधिक होती है Para बंध की उपस्थिति के कारण। इसलिये अनुनाद में इनका योगदान केवल 20% होता है। जबकि Kekule सूत्र समतुल्य है और अन्य सूत्र की अपेक्षा अधिक स्थायी है।

इसलिये अनुनाद में इनका योगदान 80% होता है। इसी कारण बेंजीन को इन दो संरचनाओं Kekule सूत्र का ही अनुनादी संकर माना जाता है। सामान्यतः अनुनादी संकर सूत्र को अनेक सूत्र के स्थान पर केवल एक पार्श्व सूत्र द्वारा प्रदर्शित करते हैं जिसमें खंडित वृत्त असंतृप्तता को दर्शाता है।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 12.
एल्केन में होने वाली हैलोजनीकरण अभिक्रिया की मुक्त मूलक क्रियाविधि को समझाइये।
उत्तर:
एल्केन में हैलोजनीकरण अभिक्रिया मुक्त मूलक क्रियाविधि द्वारा सम्पन्न होती है।
1. श्रृंखला का समारम्भ पद – उच्च ताप या प्रकाश के पराबैंगनी विकिरण की ऊर्जा से क्लोरीन के अणु का समांश विखण्डन होता है एवं क्लोरीन का मुक्त मूलक प्राप्त होता है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 127
2. श्रृंखला संचरण पद – उक्त पद में क्लोरीन मुक्त मूलक एल्केन अणु में हाइड्रोजन को विस्थापित कर एक एल्किल मुक्त मूलक प्राप्त होता है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 128
यह मुक्त मेथिल मूलक क्लोरीन अणु से क्रिया कर एल्किल हैलाइड तथा क्लोरीन मुक्त मूलक देता है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 129
यह मुक्त क्लोरीन मूलक पुनः एल्केन से अभिक्रिया कर मेथिल मूलक देता है। इस प्रकार अभिक्रिया की पुनरावृत्ति होती रहती है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 130
3. श्रृंखला का समापन पद – अंत में दोनों मुक्त मूलक परस्पर क्रिया करके श्रृंखला अभिक्रिया को समाप्त कर देते हैं।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 131
हैलोजन का मुक्त मूलक एल्किल हैलाइड पर आक्रमण कर नया मुक्त मूलक बनाता है।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 132
यह मुक्त मूलक हैलोजन के साथ क्रिया कर डाइ हैलोएल्केन देता है। यह प्रक्रिया धीरे – धीरे तब तक चलती रहती है जब तक सभी हाइड्रोजन परमाणु क्लोरीन द्वारा प्रतिस्थापित नहीं हो जाते हैं।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 133

प्रश्न 13.
समूहों के दिशात्मक प्रभाव का इलेक्ट्रॉनिक स्पष्टीकरण दीजिए।
उत्तर:
यदि बेंजीन रिंग पर एक प्रतिस्थापी समूह पहले से उपस्थित है तो प्रतिस्थापन अभिक्रिया के फलस्वरूप नया समूह रिंग के किस स्थान पर प्रवेश करेगा इसका निर्धारण पहले से उपस्थित प्रतिस्थापी समूह की प्रकृति के आधार पर होता है इसे उस समूह का दैशिक प्रभाव कहते हैं।

इलेक्ट्रॉनिक सिद्धान्त के आधार पर समूह के निर्देशक प्रभाव की व्याख्या –
1. ऑर्थों व पैरा निर्देशकारी समूह – ये वे समूह होते हैं जो बेंजीन वलय पर पहले से उपस्थित होने पर नये समूह को ऑर्थो व पैरा स्थान पर निर्देशित करते हैं।
उदाहरण – OH, – OCH3, – CH3, – NH2
ये समूह अपनी इलेक्ट्रॉन मुक्तकारी क्षमता के कारण बेंजीन में ऑर्थो व पैरा स्थिति में इलेक्ट्रॉन घनत्व बढ़ा देते हैं। इलेक्ट्रॉन घनत्व बढ़ जाने की वजह से बेंजीन नाभिक की क्रियाशीलता बढ़ जाती है तथा इलेक्ट्रॉन स्नेही अभिकर्मक इस स्थिति में उच्च इलेक्ट्रॉन घनत्व होने के कारण इन्हीं स्थानों पर प्रवेश करता है। .

2. मेटा निर्देशकारी प्रभाव – ये वे समूह हैं जो बेंजीन वलय पर पहले से उपस्थित होने पर नये समूह को मेटा स्थान पर निर्देशित करते हैं।
उदाहरण- – NO2 – COOH, – SO3H, – CN
जब ये समूह बेंजीन वलय पर जुड़े होते हैं तो मेसोमेरिक प्रभाव के कारण बेंजीन वलय से इलेक्ट्रॉन खींच लेते हैं जिसके फलस्वरूप वलय का इलेक्ट्रॉन घनत्व कम हो जाता है तथा इलेक्ट्रॉन घनत्व मुख्यतः ऑर्थो तथा पैरा स्थिति पर घटता है जबकि मेटा स्थिति अप्रभावित रहती है अर्थात् मेटा स्थिति पर इलेक्ट्रॉन घनत्व उच्च रहता है। इसलिये इलेक्ट्रॉन स्नेही अभिकर्मक मेटा स्थिति पर प्रवेश करता है।

प्रश्न 14.
क्लोरीनीकरण के प्रति 1°,2°,3° हैलोजनों की आपेक्षिक क्रियाशीलता 1:3.8:5 है। 2 – मेथिल ब्यूटेन के सभी मोनोक्लोरीनीकृत उत्पादों की प्रतिशतता ज्ञात कीजिए।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 134
मोनो क्लोरीनीकृत उत्पादों की आपेक्षिक मात्रा = हाइड्रोजन की मात्रा × आपेक्षिक क्रियाशीलता –
(1°) मोनो क्लोरीनीकृत उत्पाद के लिए = 9 × 1 = 9
(2°) मोनो क्लोरीनीकृत उत्पाद के लिए = 2 × 3.8 = 7.6
(3°) मोनो क्लोरीनीकृत उत्पाद के लिए = 1 × 5 = 5
मोनो क्लोरीनीकृत यौगिकों की कुल संख्या = 9 + 7.6 + 5 = 21.6
1° मोनो क्लोरीनीकृत उत्पाद की % मात्रा = \(\frac { 9 × 100 }{ 21.6 }\) = 41.67%
2° मोनो क्लोरीनीकृत उत्पाद की % मात्रा = \(\frac { 7.6 × 100 }{ 21.6 }\) = 35.18%
3° मोनो क्लोरीनीकृत उत्पाद की % मात्रा =\(\frac {5 × 100 }{ 21.6 }\) = 23.15 %

प्रश्न 15.
निम्नलिखित अभिक्रिया के फलस्वरूप कौन-सा उत्पाद प्राप्त होगा तथा क्यों ?
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 135

जब फ्रीडल – क्राफ्ट ऐल्कीकरण उच्च ऐल्किल हैलाइड जैसे n – प्रोपिल क्लोराइड के साथ होता है, तो इलेक्ट्रॉन स्नेही, n – प्रोपिल कार्बधनायन (1° कार्बधनायन) पुनर्व्यवस्थित होकर अधिक स्थायी आइसो-प्रोपिल कार्बधनायन (2° कार्बधनायन) में बदल जाता है तथा अभिक्रिया के परिणामस्वरूप मुख्य उत्पाद आइसो-प्रोपिल बेन्जीन प्राप्त होता है।

MP Board Solutions

प्रश्न 16.
निम्नलिखित यौगिकों को इलेक्ट्रॉन स्नेही अभिकर्मक के प्रति उनकी घटती हुई आपेक्षिक क्रियाशीलता के क्रम में व्यवस्थित कीजिए।
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 137
उत्तर:
OCH3 (मेथॉक्सी समूह) इलेक्ट्रॉन निर्मुक्त करने वाला समूह है। यह अनुनाद प्रभाव (+R प्रभाव) के कारण बेन्जीन नाभिक पर इलेक्ट्रॉन घनत्व बढ़ाता है। इसके कारण एनीसॉल, इलेक्ट्रॉन स्नेही अभिकर्मकों के प्रति, बेन्जीन की अपेक्षा अधिक क्रियाशील है। ऐरिल हैलाइडों की दशा में, हैलोजन अपने प्रबल – I प्रभाव के कारण अत्यधिक निष्क्रिय होते हैं जिससे बेन्जीन वलय में कुल इलेक्ट्रॉन घनत्व घट जाता है। इसके कारण पुनः प्रतिस्थापन घट जाता है।

– NO2 समूह इलेक्ट्रॉन आकर्षित करने वाला समूह है। यह प्रबल – प्रभाव के कारण बेन्जीन नाभिक में इलेक्ट्रॉन घनत्व घटाता है। जिसके कारण नाइट्रोबेन्जीन कम क्रियाशील हो जाती है। अतः इन यौगिकों की इलेक्ट्रॉन स्नेही अभिकर्मकों के प्रति कियाशीलता का क्रम निम्न होगा –
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions Chapter 13 हाइड्रोकार्बन - 138

MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Solutions

MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Structure of Atom

MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Structure of Atom

Structure of Atom Important Questions

Structure of Atom Objective Type Questions

Question 1.
Choose the correct answer:

Question 1.
Which orbit is more close to nucleus:
(a) M
(b) N
(c) K
(d) L
Answer:
(c) K

Question 2.
Radius of atomic nucleus is approximately:
(a) 10-10cm
(b) 10-13cm
(c) 10 -15cm
(d) 10-8cm
Answer:
(b) 10-13cm

Question 3.
Magnetic quantum number is related to:
(a) Size
(b) Shape
(c) Orientation
(d) Spin
Answer:
(c) Orientation

MP Board Solutions

Question 4.
The de – Broglie’s relationship is:
(a) λ = \(\frac { h }{ mp } \)
(b) \(\frac { h }{ mc } \) = p
(c) λ = \(\frac { h }{ mv } \)
(d) mv = \(\frac { nh }{ 2\pi } \)
Answer:
(c) λ = \(\frac { h }{ mv } \)

Question 5.
Neutron is discovered by:
(a) Rutherford
(b) Newton
(c) Goldstein
(d) Chadwick
Answer:
(d) Chadwick

Question 6.
There are three unpaired electrons in the electronic configuration of nitrogen:
(a) According to Hund’s rule
(b) According to Aufbau’s principle
(c) According to Pauli’s exclusion
(d) According to Heisenberg’s principle
Answer:
(a) According to Hund’s rule

Question 7.
Electrons are filled according to increasing order of energy of different orbitals, this is the statement of:
(a) Aufbau’s principle
(b) Pauli’s exclusion principle
(c) Hund’s rule
(d) Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle
Answer:
(a) Aufbau’s principle

MP Board Solutions

Question 8.
The value of \(\frac { e }{ m } \) for electron is given by:
(a) J.J. Thomson
(b) M. Faraday
(c) R.A. Mulliken
(d) Rutherford
Answer:
(a) J.J. Thomson

Question 9.
In Isotope of element atom have:
(a) Same atomic mass and different atomic number
(b) Same atomic number and different atomic mass
(c) Different atomic number and atomic mass
(d) Different electronic configuration
Answer:
(b) Same atomic number and different atomic mass

Question 10.
Which rays used by Rutherford in their experiment:
(a) β – rays
(b) γ – rays
(c) Helium atom
(d) α – particle
Answer:
(d) α – particle

Question 11.
For a given value of quantum number / the number of allowed values of m is given by:
(a) 2l
(b) nl
(c) (2l + 1)
(d) (n – l)
Answer:
(c) (2l + 1)

MP Board Solutions

Question 12.
Outer electronic configuration of Cr is:
(a) 4s13d5
(b) 4s23d4
(c) 4s13d4
(d) 4s23d5
Answer:
(a) 4s13d5

Question 13.
de – Broglie’s equation is applicable to:
(a) Proton
(b) Electron
(c) Neutron
(d) All substance
Answer:
(d) All substance

Question 14.
According to Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle:
(a) ∆x ∆p ≥ \(\frac { h }{ 4\pi } \)
(b) ∆x ∆v ≥ \(\frac { h }{ 4\pi } \)
(c) ∆x \(\frac { c }{ \lambda } \) ≥ \(\frac { h }{ 4\pi } \)
(d) ∆x ∆m ≥ \(\frac { h }{ 4\pi } \)
Answer:
(a) ∆x ∆p ≥ \(\frac { h }{ 4\pi } \)

Question 15.
In Nodal plan probability of finding an electron is:
(a) Zero
(b) One
(c) Maximum
(d) None of the these
Answer:
(a) Zero

MP Board Solutions

Question 2.
Fill in the blanks:

  1. Energy packets of light radiation are called ……………………..
  2. Wave function of electron in atom and molecule is called ……………………….
  3. 2px, 2py and 2pz are identical in shape but different in ………………………
  4. Orbitals of equal energy are called ……………………..
  5. Transition of electron from fourth energy level to first in hydrogen spectrum forms lines in ……………………. series.
  6. Magnetic quantum number for last electron of sodium is ……………………….
  7. The increasing order of e/m for electron, proton and neutron and α – particle is ………………………..
  8. Electromagnetic radiation having maximum wavelength is …………………………..
  9. Einstein was awarded Nobel prize for the discovery of …………………………….
  10. Electronic configuration 1s2, 2s2, 2p6, 3s2, 3p4 represents element, where atomic number is ………………………..
  11. The total mass of an atom is concentrated in the ……………………..
  12. Neutron carries ………………………. charge.
  13. In negatively charged ion the number of electron present is ……………………………. than the normal atom.
  14. In a normal atom the number of ……………………… is equal to the number of ………………………..
  15. If atomic mass of an element is 35 and its atomic number is 17, then the number of neutrons present in its nucleus are ……………………….
  16. In isotopes of an element number of ……………………. are different.

Answer:

  1. Photon
  2. Orbital
  3. Three dimensional orientation
  4. Degenerate
  5. Lyman
  6. Zero
  7. n, a, p, e
  8. Radiowave
  9. Photochemical effect
  10. Sulphur
  11. Nucleus
  12. No
  13. More
  14. Proton, electron
  15. 18
  16. Neutrons

Question 3.
Answer in one word/sentence:

  1. What is the mass of electron?
  2. What is de – Broglie equation?
  3. Azimuthal quantum number is represented by?
  4. Formula of Heisenberg uncertainty principle is?
  5. What is the reason of filling of electron is 4s orbital before 3d orbital?
  6. Electronic configuration 6C12 will be:
  7. The short form of scanning tunneling microscope is:
  8. Who discover neutron?
  9. Maximum number of electrons in first and second shell is:

Answer:

  1. 9.1 × 1028gm
  2. λ = \(\frac { h }{ mv } \) = \(\frac { h }{ p } \)
  3. l
  4. ∆x × ∆p ≥ \(\frac { h }{ 4\pi } \)
  5. Aufbau’s (n + l) rule
  6. 1s2, 2s2, 2p2
  7. STM
  8. Chadwick
  9. 48

Question 4.
Match the following:
[I]
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Structure of Atom img 1t
Answer:

  1. (e)
  2. (c)
  3. (a)
  4. (c)
  5. (b)
  6. (f)

[II]
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Structure of Atom img 2
Answer:

  1. (e)
  2. (d)
  3. (a)
  4. (c)
  5. (b)
  6. (f)

[III]
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Structure of Atom img luc
Answer:

  1. (e)
  2. (d)
  3. (a)
  4. (c)
  5. (b)
  6. (f)

Structure of Atom Very Short Answer Type Questions

Question 1.
Isotope have same number of?
Answer:
Proton.

Question 2.
Number of orbital in f – subshell is?
Answer:
7.

Question 3.
Magnetic quantum number is related to?
Answer:
Orientation of orbitals.

Question 4.
What is the total number of orbitals for principal quantum number?
Answer:
n2

MP Board Solutions

Question 5.
Which is the highest wavelength radiation?
Answer:
Radio wave.

Question 6.
What is the shape of orbital if the value of azimuthal quantum number is (1)?
Answer:
Dumbel.

Question 7.
The place surrounding the nucleus where the probability of finding of electron is maximum is?
Answer:
Orbital.

Question 8.
Who discovered electron?
Answer:
J.J. Thomson.

Question 9.
Who discovered neutron?
Answer:
Chadwick.

Question 10.
What is de – Broglie’s equation?
Answer:
λ = \(\frac{h}{p}\) = \(\frac{h}{mv}\)

Question 11.
Helium nucleus is known as which particle?
Answer:
α – particle (alpha).

Question 12.
Formula of Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle is?
Answer:
∆x∆p ≥ \(\frac { h }{ 4\pi } \)

Question 13.
Azimuthal quantum number is represented by?
Answer:
l.

MP Board Solutions

Question 14.
Who discovered nucleus?
Answer:
Rutherford.

Question 15.
What is Threshold frequency?
Answer:
The minimum value of specific frequency energy after that the photoelectric effect can be occur.

Question 16.
What is the charge of an electron?
Answer:
1.60 × 10-19 coulombs.

Question 17.
Why Aufbau’s principle is known as (n + 1) rule?
Answer:
Because the measurement can be done by the sum of energy level of principal quantum number (n) and azimuthal quantum number (l).

Question 18.
Number of electrons in CN ion is:
Answer:
14.

Question 19.
In hydrogen spectrum, spectral lines of Balmer series are present in region of:
Answer:
Visible region.

Question 20.
Number of unpaired electrons in Ni+2 ion is.
Answer:
2.

Structure of Atom Short Answer Type Questions – I

Question 1.
Differentiate between Atomic number and Mass number?
Answer:
Differences between Atomic number and Mass number:
Atomic number:

  1. Atomic number is equal to the number of proton present in the nucleus of an atom.
  2. It is represented by Z.

Mass number:

  1. Mass number is equal to the sum of number of proton and neutron present in the nucleus of an atom.
  2. It is represented by A.

Question 2.
Write the characteristics of electrons?
Answer:
Characteristics of Electrons:

  1. Electrons are present in all gases and they are produced in the discharge tube at 10-2 atmospheric pressure and high voltage from the cathode.
  2. Electrons is the necessary particle with a charge of 1 .6 × 10-19 coulombs. Charge of electron is supposed to be of unit charge.
  3. Atomic mass of an electron is \(\frac { 1 }{ 1837 } \) times that of hydrogen atom (Mass of electron = 9.1 × 10-31kg).
  4. Nature of electron does not depend on the gas taken in the discharge tube or the material of the cathode which proves that electron is the fundamental particle of every substance.
  5. Electron is represented as -1°e.

Question 3.
How was neutron discovered? Write its main properties?
Answer:
Chadwick in 1932 bombarded a thin sheet of beryllium element with α – particles and observed highly penetrating rays of neutral particles. He called these neutral particles as neutrons. The mass of a neutron is approximately same as the mass of a proton but there is no charge on neutron.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Structure of Atom img 4
Thus, a neutron may be defined as, “A fundamental particle present in an atom having a mass of l.67 × 10-24 gm and no charge.” It is represented by 0‘n.

Question 4.
Write the two characteristics of cathode rays?
Answer:

  1. When a solid object is placed in the path of cathode rays, its shadow is produced at the end opposite to cathode. This shows that cathode rays travel in straight line.
  2. Cathode rays produce X – rays when they strike against hard metals like tungsten, copper etc.

Question 5.
How was anode rays discovered? Write its main properties?
Answer:
In 1836, E. Goldstein observed a new type of luminous rays passing through the holes or perforation of the cathode and moving in a direction opposite to the cathode rays. Thus these rays consisted of positively charged particle moving away from the anode and were named as positive rays or anode rays.
Characteristics of anode rays:

  1. Anode rays travel in a straight line.
  2. The anode rays can rotate a light paddle wheel placed in their path. This shows that they consist of material particles.
  3. The anode rays are deflected by electric and magnetic field. The direction of deflection is opposite to that of cathode rays. This shows that anode rays consist of positively charged particle.
  4. The charge to mass ratio for anode rays is considerably smaller than electron.

MP Board Solutions

Question 6.
To determine exact position and velocity simultaneous of fast moving electron is not possible. Why? Explain?
Answer:
Electron is a micro particle which can be seen by X – rays or y rays at low wave – length. To see it is essential that photon of light colloids with electron and returns for vision. But due to collision, momentum (Velocity) of electron changes. Therefore to locate the exact position of electron its momentum (Velocity) changes.

Question 7.
What is the maximum number of emission lines when the excited electron of a H atom in n = 6 drops to the ground state? (NCERT)
Answer:
The number of lines may be calculated from simple formula,
Number of lines = \(\frac { n(n-l) }{ 2 } \)
= \(\frac { 6(6-1) }{ 2 } \)
= \(\frac { 6\times 5 }{ 2 } \) = 15

Question 8.
What is Zeeman effect?
Answer:
Zeeman in 1896, observed that when a magnetic field is applied on a source producing spectral line, the spectral lines get split into several fine lines. This phenomenon is called Zeeman effect.

Question 9.
What is a particles?
Answer:
Each a particle carry two unit of positive charge (+2) and four unit mass. Hence it is called Helium nucleus and represented as 2He4.

Question 10.
Write the characteristics of protons?
Answer:
Characteristics of protons:
1. Proton is the fundamental particle of proton by passing an electric discharge through a gas in a discharge tube H+ ions obtained are called protons or bombarding electron on H atom electrons is released and H+ is obtained.
H + e → H+ + 2e
By taking different gases in the discharge tube positive particles of different masses are obtained. Positive particle (proton) obtained from hydrogen is the least. Thus, proton is the fundamental particle of an atom.

MP Board Solutions

Question 11.
Why electronic configuration of Cr is 4s13d5 in place of 4s23d4?
Answer:
If Cr contains four electron in 3d subshell, 3d subshell is in complete filled orbital and represented unstable state. If one electron of 4s subshell existed into vacant 5d orbital, both 4s and 3d orbitals are half filled and represents stable state. That is why electronic configuration of Cr is 4s13d5 in place of 4s23d4.

Question 12.
Why is emission spectrum called line spectrum?
Answer:
On passing current in a discharge tube containing hydrogen gas at high voltage, radiations are emitted. When these radiations pass through prism, split into different sharp lines. On viewing by spectroscope, it is clear that here are many series of coloured lines. Each line has definite wavelength. Due to presence of lines of different wavelength in emmission spectrum, it is called line spectrum.

Question 13.
What is Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle? Write its mathematical form?
Answer:
Heisenberg in 1927, put forward a principle known as Heisenbeig’s uncertainty principle. It states that: “It is not possible to measure simultaneously both the position and momentum of a microscopic particle with absolute accuracy”. Mathematically, this law may be expressed as ∆x∆p ≥ \(\frac { h }{ 4\pi } \) Or ∆x × m∆v ≥ \(\frac { h }{ 4\pi } \)
Where, ∆x = uncertainty in position
∆p = uncertainty in momemtum
∆v = uncertainty in velocity
m = mass of the particle
h = Planck constant
The sign ≥ means that product of Ax and Ap can be either greater or equal to \(\frac { h }{ 4\pi } \) It can never be less than \(\frac { h }{ 4\pi } \) Therefore, the sign of equality refers to minimum uncertainty associated since the minimum product of ∆x and ∆p is constant.

Question 14.
In A1 and Si, there are unpaired electrons in 3p orbitals. Which electron will feel more effective nuclear charge from nucleus?
Answer:
13Al = 1s2, 2s22p6,3s23p1
14Si = 1s2, 2s22p6,3s23p2
In both the elements the number of orbitals are same. Due to more nuclear charge on Si (+4) than A1 (+3), it will feel more effective nuclear charge.

Question 15.
Which of the following are isoeiectronic species Le. those having the same number of electron:
Na+,K+,Mg+2,Ca+2,S-2,Ar.
Answer:

  1. Number of electron in 11Na+ = 10 [11 – 1 = 10]
  2. Number of electron in 19K+ = 18 [19 – 1 = 18]
  3. Number of electron in 12Mg+2 = 10 [12 – 2 = 10]
  4. Number of electron in 20Ca+2 = 18 [20 – 2 = 18]
  5. Number of electron in 16S-2 = 18 [16 + 2 = 18]
  6. Number of electron in 1gAr = 18 [16 + 2 = 18]

Hence, (i) Na+, Mg+2 are isoeiectronic (10 electron each), (ii) Ca+2, K+, S-2, Ar are isoelectronic (18 electron each).

MP Board Solutions

Question 16.
Write the value of all four quantum number for last and unpaired electron of chlorine?
Answer:
17Cl = 1s2, 2s2 2p6, 3s2 3p5 image 4
For last electron n = 3, l = 1, m = 0, s = \(\frac{-1}{2}\)
For unpaired electron n = 3, l = 1, m = +1, s= + \(\frac{1}{2}\)

Question 17.
What is quantum?
Answer:
According to quantum theory of radiation, emmission or absorption of energy is not continuous but energy is transformed in the form of small energy packet or quanta which are always in integer number e.g. 1, 2, 3 …. Unit of energy is called quantum.

Structure of Atom Short Answer Type Questions – II

Question 1.
What is Pauli’s exclusion principle?
Answer:
Pauli’s exclusion principle: “No two electrons in an atom can have the same value of all four quantum number”. It means even if two electron have the same values for n, 7 and m they must have different values of s.
Example: The value of four quantum number for 2 electrons present in 3s orbital.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Structure of Atom img 5
The three quantum numbers are same for these two electrons but one quantum number is different in spin quantum number which proves the Pauli’s exclusion principle.
Importance: Using this principle, the number of electrons in a shell or main energy level can be known because the number of electrons in an orbit is equal to the number of groups of four quantum numbers in different combinations.

Question 2.
Write the characteristics of cathode rays?
Answer:

  1. These rays travel in a straight line and have velocity equal to that of light.
  2. These rays exert mechanical pressure. If a paddle wheel is placed in the path of these rays.
  3. Cathode rays get deflected towards positive plate when an electric field is applied to it. This showed that cathode rays themselves are negatively charged.
  4. These rays ionize gases and affect photographic plate.
  5. Cathode rays produce X – rays when they strike on a very hard metals like copper.

Question 3.
What is (n + l) rule?
Answer:
According to this rule, the new electron will occupy that orbital which have minimum (n + l) value, where n and l represent principle quantum number and azimuthal quantum number respectively. If two or more orbitals have same (n + l) value, the new electron will enter in the orbital having lowest n value (principle quantum number).
Example: 2s and 2p orbital value 2, 3 respectively. So electron will occupy first 2s orbital. 4s and 3p orbital have same (n + l) value 4 but n value is lower in 3p, so firstly 3p orbital will be filled.

MP Board Solutions

Question 4.
What are the symbols of orbitals of p, d and f subshell?
Answer:
In p subshell, total 3 orbitals Px, Py, Pz.
In d subshell, total 5 orbitals , dxy, dyz, dxz, d\(x^{ 2 }-y^{ 2 }\), dz2
In f subshell, total 7 orbitals f3x,f3y, f3z, fx(\(z^{ 2 }-y^{ 2 }\)) , fy(\(x^{ 2 }-z^{ 2 }\)), fz(\(y^{ 2 }-x^{ 2 }\), fxyz.

Question 5.
Write the main characteristics of Summerfield atomic model?
Answer:
The main characteristics of Summerfield atomic model is as follows:

  1. Electrons revolves in orbitals as well as in shells where they is two radius.
  2. Shells are made up of sub-shells.
  3. The number of sub-shells in a shell is equal to quantum number ‘n’.

Question 6.
Write the Bohr – Bury arrangement for filling of shells by electrons?
Answer:
The sequential arrangement of filling of shells in atom is given by scientist Bohr – Bury:

  1. In any n shell the maximum number of electrons will be 2n2.
  2. In last shell 8 electrons and a shell second to last shell should not be contained more than 18 electrons.
  3. In last shell 2 electrons and in penultimate shell the electrons number will be 9 only when all the inner shells are full-filled.
  4. Next shell is filled when the last shell contains 8 electrons.
  5. It is not necessary that the electrons cannot go in the next shell, when the inner orbitals are filled with 2n2 rule.

Question 7.
What are isoelectronic ions? Give examples?
Answer:
The ions of different elements who have different charges, but have same number of electrons in ionic state are called isoelectronic ions.
Example 1:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Structure of Atom img 5
Example 2:
K+ and Ca+ are isoelectronic ion.
Number of electron in K+ = 18
Number of electron in Ca+2 = 18
Electronic configuration = 2,8,8
Electronic configuration = 2,8,8

Question 8.
What is difference between atom and ion?
Answer:
Differences between atom and ion:
Atom:

  1. They are fully neutral.
  2. The number of proton and neutron is same.
  3. Atom is unstable and takes part in chemical reaction.

Ion:

  1. It is positively or negatively charged.
  2. The number of proton and neutron is not same.
  3. Ions are stable in solutions.

Question 9.
Write Aufbau principle?
Answer:
Aufbau is a German word which means building up. According to this principle electron one filled in different energy subshells according to the increasing order of their energies. Thus subshell of minimum energy are filled first.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Structure of Atom img 8
The increasing order energies of various orbital is:
1s < 2s < 2p < 3s < 3p < 4s < 3d < 4p < 5s < 4d < 5p < 6s < 4f < 5d < 6p < 7s < 5f < 6d < 7p.

Question 10.
(a) How many sub – shells are present in n = 4?
(b) How many electrons are present in the sub – shell which have ms = \(\frac{-1}{2}\) and n = 4?
Solution: (a) For n = 4, Imax = (n – 1)
= 4 – 1
= 3
l = 0,1,2,3
∴four sub – shells 4s, 4p, 4d and 4f.
(b) Number of shells in n = 4, n2 – 42 = 16
Maximum electrons in any orbital = 2
In each orbital number of electrons having ms = \(\frac{-1}{2}\), spin = 16.

Question 11.
Show that the circumference of the Bohr orbit for the hydrogen atom is an integral multiple of the de – Broglie wavelength associated with electron revolving around the orbit?
Answer:
According to Bohr theory,
mvr = \(\frac { nh }{ 2\pi } \)
2πr = \(\frac{nh}{mv}\) or mv = \(\qquad \frac { nh }{ 2\pi r } \) …… (i)
According to de – Broglie equation
λ = \(\frac{h}{mv}\) or mv = \(\frac{h}{λ}\)
Compairing eqn. (i) and eqn. (ii)
\(\frac { nh }{ 2\pi r } \) = \(\frac{h}{λ}\) or 2πr = nλ
Thus, the circumference 2 nr of the Bohr orbit for hydrogen atom is an into the de Broglie wavelength.

MP Board Solutions

Question 12.
What is Planck’s quantum theory?
Answer:
1. Energy is neither emitted nor absorbed continuously in the form of small energy packet or quanta which are always in integer number (1, 2, 3 …).

2. Unit of energy absorbed or emitted is quantum.

3. The amount of energy associated with a quantum of radiation is proportional to the frequency of light.
E ∝ v
E = hυ
Where h is constant called Planck’s constant.

4. The total amount of energy emitted or absorbed by a body will lie some whole number multiple of quantum, i.e. E = nhυ Where n = 1, 2, 3 ….

Question 13.
What is the number of photons of light with wavelength 4000 pm which provide 1J of energy?
Solution:
λ = 4000 pm = 4 × 10-9m, h = 6.626 × 10-34 Js, c = 3 × 108 m/s
E = nhυ = \(\frac { nhc }{ \lambda } \)
or n = \(\frac { E\lambda }{ hc } \) = \(\frac { 1\times 4\times 10^{ -9 } }{ 6.26\times 10^{ -34 }\times 3\times 10^{ 8 } } \) = 2.01 × 1016 photons.

Question 14.
Write the differences between Anode and Cathode rays. Ans. Differences between Anode and Cathode rays:
Answer:
Anode rays:

  1. These are made by positively charged particles.
  2. The nature of Anode rays are depends upon the gas taken in discharging tube.
  3. The mass of particles present in Anode rays are equal to the mass of gas taken in discharge tube.

Cathode Rays:

  1. These are made by negatively charged particles.
  2. The nature of Cathode rays are not depends on the nature of gas taken in discharge tube.
  3. The mass of particles present in Cathode rays are negligible.

Question 15.
Write the observation and conclusion of Rutherford’s scattering experiment?
Answer:
Observation and Conclusions of Rutherfords experiment:
1. Most of the α – particles passed through the gold foil undeflected which concludes that there is a lot of empty space in an atom.

2. Few α – particles were deflected through small angles. Thus the central part of an atom consist of positive charge which is called nucleus.

3. Out of the 20,000 particles bombarding only one particle gets deflected and returns back. Thus the volume of nucleus is a minute part of the atom. Rutherford determined that the radius of the atom is 10-8 cm (1Å) and radius of nucleus is 10-13cm.

4. Electrons revolve in great speed around the nucleus. Due to this speed the centrifugal force produced balanced the electrostatic force of attraction between the positively charged nucleus and the electrons. Due to this balance electron do not fall into the nucleus.

Question 16.
Write the defects of Rutherford Model?
Answer:
Defects of Rutherford’s Model: In 1913 Neel Bohr pointed out the following defects in Rutherfords model:
1. According to the electromagnetic theory of Maxwell, a charged particle when accelerated emits energy in the form of electromagnetic radiations. Since electrons are charged particles, therefore, electrons revolving in an orbit should continuously emit radiations.

As a result of this, it would slow down and would no longer withstand the attractive forces of the nucleus. Hence, it would move closer and closer to the nucleus and would finally fall in the nucleus following a spiral path. This means that atom should collapse. But we all know that atom is quite stable in nature. Thus, Rutherford’s model failed to explain stability of atoms.

2. Rutherford’s model also failed to explain the existence of definite lines in the hydrogen spectrum. If the electrons were to lose energy continuously, the atomic spectrum of hydrogen should have been continuous. But it was found to be discontinuous in the form of lines of definite wavelength.

3. This model does not determine the number of electrons in each orbit. Thus, the Rutherford’s model could not explain the stability of an atom and line spectra of atoms.

MP Board Solutions

Question 17.
What are the main defects of Bohr’s model?
Answer:

  1. The theory could not explain the atomic spectra of the atoms containing more than one electron or multielectron atoms.
  2. Shell of electrons are spherical according the Bohr’s theory but these shells are long eliptical.
  3. It is not explained Heisenberg’s theory.
  4. It is not explained the dual nature of light.

Question 18.
Explain Hund’s rule with an example?
Answer:
Hund’s rule:
This rule deals with degenerate orbitals (orbitals having similar energy). It states as, “Pairing of electron in the orbitals of a particular subshell (p, d, f) does not take place until all the orbitals of the subshell are singly occupied.”
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Structure of Atom img 10

Question 19.
Caluculate the wavelength, frequency and wavelength of light wave whose period 2.0 × 10-10s.
Solution:
Frequency (υ) =
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Structure of Atom img 11
1 = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2.0\times 10^{ -10 }s } \)
Wavelength (λ) = \(\frac{c}{υ}\) = \(\frac { 3\times 10^{ 8 }ms^{ -1 } }{ 5\times 10^{ 9 }s^{ -1 } } \) = 6.0 × 10-2m
Wave number (\(\bar { \upsilon } \)) = \(\frac{1}{λ}\) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 6\times 10^{ -2 }m } \) = 16.66 m-1

Question 20.
What is the maximum number of emission lines when the excited electron of a atom in n = 6 drops to the ground state?
Solution:
The posible transitions are:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Structure of Atom img 12
The maximum number of emission lines,
= \(\frac { n(n-1) }{ 2 } \) = \(\frac { 6(6-1) }{ 2 } \) = 15.

Question 21.
Caluculate the wavelenth of the emission transition if is from the orbit have radius 1.3225 nm and ends at 211.6 pm. Name the series to which this transition being and the region of the spectrum?
Solution:
Radius of the orbit of H – like species \(\frac { 0.529n^{ 2 } }{ Z } \) pm.
r1 = 1.3225 nm = 1322.5 pm = \(\frac { 0.529n_{ 1 }^{ 2 } }{ Z } \)
r2 = 211.6 pm = \(\frac { 0.529n_{ 2 }^{ 2 } }{ Z } \)
\(\frac { r_{ 1 } }{ r_{ 2 } } \) = \(\frac{1322.5}{211.6}\) = \(\frac { n_{ 1 }^{ 2 } }{ n_{ 2 }^{ 2 } } \)
\(\frac { n_{ 1 }^{ 2 } }{ n_{ 2 }^{ 2 } } \) = 6.25 or \(\frac { n_{ 1 } }{ n_{ 2 } } \) = (6.25)1/2 = 2.5
If n1 = 2, n2 = 5, this transition corresponds to transition from 5th orbit to 2nd orbit. This means the transition belongs to Balmer series.
\({ \bar { \upsilon } }\) = R \(\frac { 1 }{ n_{ 1 }^{ 2 } } -\frac { 1 }{ n_{ 2 }^{ 2 } } \)
= 1.097 × 107 \(\frac { 1 }{ 4 } -\frac { 1 }{ 25 } \) m-1 = 1.097 × 21 × 105m-1
λ = \(\frac { 1 }{ \bar { \upsilon } } \) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 1.097\times 21\times 10^{ 5 } } \) = 434 × 10-9m = 434 nm.
If n1 = 2, n2 = 5, this transition corresponds to transition from 5th orbit to 2 nd orbit. This means the transition belongs to Balmer series.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Structure of Atom img 13
It lies the visible region of light.

Question 22.
Atomic spectrum is called linear spectrum. Why?
Answer:
This type of spectrum is given by the atoms of all elements. It contains continuous thin coloured, sparkled lines, separated by black lines. Every element gives spectral type of line spectrum and these spectrums are their specific identity.
For example: In the spectrum of sodium, their obtained two clear yellow lines on 5890 A and 5896 A. If in a discharge tube, a hydrogen gas is filled at low pressure and electricity is passed, then a red coloured light can be seen. In this way the analysis of this emitted light can be done by spectroscope and a discontinuous spectrum is obtained in which four main lines are obtained which are called Hα, Hβ, Hγ and Hg. The spectrum in which only lines are obtained is called linear spectrum.

Question 23.
What do you mean by dual nature of a tiny particle like electron?
Or, A moving electron shows particle as well as wave nature. Give reason?
Answer:
Electron is a tiny particle, and it have a specific momentum due to particle nature and behave like a wave due to mobility, due to their refraction pattern appears and electron shows both the effects simultaneously. Other particles proton, neutron as well as atoms show dual nature when move with high velocity. The wavelength of wave produced by a moving particle is shown by de – Broglie equation. According to this the wavelength is inversely proportional to momentum.
λ = \(\frac { h }{ mv } \)
or λ = \(\frac { h }{ p } \) or λ ∝\(\frac { 1 }{ p } \)
Where, λ = wavelength of tiny particle like electron, m = mass of particle, v = velocity of particle, p = momentum of particle, h = Planck’s constant.

MP Board Solutions

Question 24.
Quantum number of electron is given below. Arrange them in the increasing order of energy. Is the energy of any of them is same?

  1. n = 4, l = 2, ml = -2, ms = \(\frac{-1}{2}\)
  2. n = 3, l = 2, ml = 1, ms = \(\frac{+1}{2}\)
  3. n = 3, l = 1, ml = -1, ms = \(\frac{+1}{2}\)
  4. n = 3, l = 2, ml = 1, ms = \(\frac{-1}{2}\)
  5. n = 3, l = 1, ml = -1, ms = \(\frac{+1}{2}\)
  6. n = 4, l = 1, ml = 0, ms = \(\frac{+1}{2}\)

Solution:
The energy of multi electron atom depends upon the total of (n + l)
Sub – shells for (a) set 4d = (n + l) = 4 + 2 = 6
Sub – shells for (b) set 3d = (n + l) = 3 + 2 = 5
Sub – shells for (c) set 4p = (n + l) = 4 + 1 = 5
Sub – shells for (d) set 3d = (n + l) = 3 + 2 = 5
Sub – shells for (e) set 3p = (n +l) = 3 + 1 = 4
Sub – shells for (f) set 4p = (n + l) = 4 + 1 = 5
3p < 3d = 3d < 4p < 4p < 4d (Increasing of energy).

Question 25.
Find the mass of 1 mole electron?
Solution:
Mass of electron = 9.1 × 10-28 gm
1 mole electron = 6.023 × 1023 electron
Mass of 1 mole electron = 9.1 × 10-28 × 6.023 × 1023 = 5.48 × 10-4 gm.

Question 26.
Find the charge on 1 mole electron?
Solution:
Charge on electron = 1.6 × 10-19 coulomb
1 mole electron = 6.023 × 1023 electron
Charge on 1 mole electron = 1.6 × 10-19 × 6.023 × 1023
= 9.63 × 104 coulomb.

Structure of Atom Long Answer Type Questions – I

Question 1.
Write difference between Isotopes and Isobar?
Answer:
Differences between Isotope and Isobar:
Isotopes:

  1. Different atoms of same elements having same atomic number but different mass number are called isotopes.
  2. Number of protons present in nucleus is same but number of neutrons is different.
  3. Similarity in chemical properties.
  4. Number of electrons present in outermost orbit is same.

Isobars:

  1. Different atoms of different elements whose mass number is same but atomic number is different are known as isobars.
  2. Number of protons and neutrons present in nucleus is different.
  3. Dissimilarity in chemical properties.
  4. Number of electrons present in outer – most orbit is different.

Question 2.
Write the observation and conclusion of Rutherford’s scattering experiment?
Answer:
Observation and Conclusions of Rutherfords experiment:
1. Most of the α – particles passed through the gold foil undeflected which concludes that there is a lot of empty space in an atom.

2. Few α – particles were deflected through small angles. Thus the central part of an atom consist of positive charge which is called nucleus.

3. Out of the 20,000 particles bombarding only one particle gets deflected and returns back. Thus the volume of nucleus is a minute part of the atom. Rutherford determined that the radius of the atom is 10-8 cm (1Å) and radius of nucleus is 10-13cm.

4. Electrons revolve in great speed around the nucleus. Due to this speed the centrifugal force produced balanced the electrostatic force of attraction between the positively charged nucleus and the electrons. Due to this balance electron do not fall into the nucleus.

Question 3.
The emission transition of Paschen series starts from n shell and ends at n = 3 shell. So, determine the value of it and give the area of spectrum?
Solution:
Frequency,
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Structure of Atom img 15
0.0709 = 0.1111 – \(\frac { 1 }{ n^{ 2 } } \)
\(\frac { 1 }{ n^{ 2 } } \) = 0.1111 – 0.0709 = 0.0402 = 0.04 ~ 0.04 = \(\frac{1}{25}\)
or n2 = 25 or n = 5
∴Electron jumps from n = 5 to n= 3, so transistion takes place in Paschen series and present in IR range.

Structure of Atom Long Answer Type Questions – II

Question 1.
Write the main postulates of Bohr’s atomic model?
Answer:
The main postulates of Bohr’s atomic model: Niels Bohr followed quantum theory and describe model of atom as:
1. Electron moves around the nucleus in closed circular orbit. These orbits are called energy levels, its energy is fixed.

2. When an electron moves in an orbit it neither absorbs nor liberates energy. During revolution in orbit electron neither absorbs nor emits energy,

3. An electron undergoes a process of emission or absorption of energy when it goes from one energy level to other i.e., E2 – E1 = hυ

4. Various energy levels are shown by simple no. 1,2,3, ……………. etc. or K, L, M, ………………………. etc. and these are called principle quantum no. The angular momentum of orbits are integral multiple of h/2π i.e., mvr = nh/2π

MP Board Solutions

Question 2.
What are quantum numbers? How many types of quantum number are there? Explain the informations obtained from them?
Answer:
Calculation of laws of quantum mechanics gives certain numbers which can be used to trace out possible states of electrons such as location and energy of electrons are known as Quantum numbers.There are four types of quantum numbers characteristics of these are given below:
1. Principal quantum number (n):
This shows the principal orbit of electron. Its value is any number 1, 2, 3, …………….. from this quantum number, i.e., ‘n’ we know about the average distance of electron from nucleus and energy state.
The energy states corresponding to different principal quantum numbers are designated by letters K, L, M, N, etc. These are called energy shells.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Structure of Atom img 16

2. Azimuthal quantum number (l):
From this, we know about angular momentum and shape of orbital. For each value of principal quantum number, l has values from 0 to (n – 1) which shows the suborbital obtained. Different values of l corresponding to n are:
When n = 1, n = 2, n = 3, n = 4
Then l = 0, l = 0,1, l = 0, 1, 2 l = 0, 1, 2, 3
The orbitals are designated by letters s, p, d, f for the corresponding value of 4. Thus,
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Structure of Atom img 17

3. Magnetic quantum number (m):
This explains effect of spectrum of atom when kept in magnetic field known as Zeeman effect. For each value of azimuthal quantum number l, m has values -l to 0 to +l, i.e., total (2l + 1) values. Thus,
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Structure of Atom img 18
It tells us about the orientation of the orbitals in space. s – orbital has 1 orientation, p – orbital has 3, d – orbital has 5 and f – orbital has 7 orientations.

4. Spin quantum number (s):
The electron moving around the nucleus spin on its axis in left (↓) and right side (↑) For each value of m, s has two values +1/2, -1/2.
Use of quantum numbers:

  1. It helps in writing the electronic configuration in a systematized way.
  2. Each electron of an element can be recognized separately because any two electrons cannot have the same value of all the four quantum numbers.

Question 3.
Write differences between Orbit and Orbital?
Answer:
Differences between Orbit and Orbital:
Orbit:

  1. It is a well defined circular path around the nucleus in which the electron revolves.
  2. Orbit is circular or elliptical in shape.
  3. It represents the movement of an electron in one plane.
  4. The maximum number of electrons in an orbit is according to 2n<sup>2</sup>, where n is number of orbit.
  5. It represents that position as well as momentum of an electron can be known.

Orbital:

  1. It is a region in three-dimensional space around the nucleus where the probability of finding the electron is maximum.
  2. Orbitals may be spherical, dumb-bell or double dumb – bell in shape.
  3. It represents the movement of an electron in the three – dimensional space.
  4. The maximum number of electrons in an orbital is 2.
  5. It represents that position as well as momentum of an electron cannot be known.

Question 4.
Write the de – Broglie’s hypothesis?
Answer:
de – Broglie explains the wave nature of the electron. According to this,“Every tiny particle shows the properties of a wave”. According to the Planck’s quantum theory,
E = hυ …….. (i)
According to Einsteins’s mass – energy realation,
E = mc2 …………. (ii)
From eqn. (1) and (2)
mc2 = hυ
⇒ mc2 = h \(\frac { c }{ \lambda } \) [υ = \(\frac { c }{ \lambda } \)]
⇒ mc = \(\frac { h }{ \lambda } \)
⇒ λ = \(\frac{h}{mc}\)
The nature of particle is wave like, so c is substituted with v. If a particle of mass m moving with a velocity v, then
λ = \(\frac{h}{mv}\) …… (3)
So, λ = \(\frac{h}{p}\) [mv = p] ………….. (4)
So, it is clear from eqn. (4) that the wavelength of any moving particle depends upon its momentum.

MP Board Solutions

Question 5.
Calculate the Bohr radius?
Answer:
When the single electron of hydrogen revolves around the nucleus, then two forces act on it.

  1. Attraction force by nucleus = \(\frac { Ze^{ 2 } }{ r^{ 2 } } \)
  2. Centrifugal force acting outside = \(\frac { mv^{ 2 } }{ r } \qquad \)

Where, Z = atomic number, m = mass of electron, v = velocity of electron, e = charge, r = atomic radius.
The centripetal and centrifugal forces of a moving electron works in opposite direction and if their value is same than they balance each other and the electron rotate at its position.
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Structure of Atom img 20
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Structure of Atom img 20a
This equation is known as Bohr’s radius.

Question 6.
What is Balmer formula? How it explains the line spectrum of hydrogen?
Answer:
According to J.J. Balmer, the frequency of spectrum in visible range of hydrogen atom can be shown by following formula:
\(\bar { \upsilon } \) = RH = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2^{ 2 } } -\frac { 1 }{ n^{ 2 } } \)
Where, RH = Rydberg’s constant and n = 3, 4, 5, 6, ……..
These line series falls in visible range and known as Balmer series. After this four more series were discovered. Lyman series in ultraviolet region, Paschen series, Brackett series and Pfund series in IR region. To explain these series Balmer formula is converted into following formula:
MP Board Class 11th Chemistry Important Questions Chapter 2 Structure of Atom img 21

MP Board Class 11 Chemistry Important Questions